k* , s M -. rw «ij' • - ^» * .- 2* A :* *W JK |«« r **. iJkrlJ i $I£L x-r V.// lW'Oa>- TRANSACTIONS OF THE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. YOLUME XI, (CENTENNIAL VOLUME) PAET I. •♦♦♦♦♦— NEW HAYEN: PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY. 190 1-1 903. THE TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR < OMl'A NTY. CONNECTICUT ACADEMY uBRAtnr TRANSACTIONS OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. VOLUME XI, (CENTENNIAL VOLUME.) NEW HAVEN : PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY. 1901-1903. THE TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR COMPANY. A .7^33 v.//' 09- TRANSACTIONS OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. VOLUME XI, (CENTENNIAL VOLUME) PAET I. LIBRARY NEW YORK BOTANICAL GARDEN NEW HAYEK: PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY. 1901-1902. THE TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR COMPANY. Entered according to Act of Congress in the year 1902, by Addison E. Verkill, for the Academy ; in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. The Academy regrets to announce the death of Professor Josiah Willard Gibbs. Professor Gibbs was born in New Haven, Conn., Febru- ary 11, 1839,' and died April 28, 1003. At the regular meeting of the Academy held May 13, the following minute on the death of Professor Gibbs was unanimously adopted : The Academy has learned with the deepest regret and sor- row of the death of its most distinguished member, Professor Josiah Willard Gibbs, and desires to place on record its deep sense of the loss sustained by the whole scientific world, and in an especial degree by the members of this body. The first published investigations of Professor Gibbs ap- peared in the Transactions of this Academy in 1873, under the titles of "Graphical Methods in the Thermodynamics of Fluids," and "A Method of Geometrical Representation of the Thermodynamic Properties of Substances by means of Surfaces," and these were followed, in 1875 and 1878, by his celebrated papers on "The Equilibrium of Heterogeneous Substances." The great importance of this work is shown by the fact that the author anticipated, by purely theoretical considerations, a large number of the discoveries in Physical Chemistry which have since been made, and that he intro- duced, into this field, the most powerful method of theoreti- cal investigation now known : — a method, moreover, which, being independent of special hypotheses, seems destined to hold a permanent place among those gi'eat scientific methods which the lapse of time does not render obsolete. The Academy in emphasizing, in this memorial, the researches of Professor Gibbs published in its Transactions, is not unmind- ful of his distinguished achievements in other scientific lines, but it leaves to others the special mention of such work, proud of the fact that it recognized so early the value of his researches in Thermodynamics, and was instrumental in giv- ing that work to the scientific world. CONTENTS OF PAET I. Page List of Officers, Members and Patrons ii-vi Proceedings at the Centennial Anniversary of the Academy, Oct. 11, 1899 vii Historical Address by Hon. Simeon E. Baldwin. The First Century of the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences xiii Address by Professor William North Rice. Scientific Thought in the Nineteeth Century xxxvi Address by Professor William H. Brewer. The Debt of this Century to Learned Societies xlv List of Additions to the Library lv Art. I. — Observations on the Digestion of Proteids with Papain. By Lafayette B. Mendel and Frank P. Underhill... 1 Art. II. —Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas from the Yale Expedition of 1901, with notes on other Species. By Addison E. Verrill. Plates 1-9 15 Art. III. — Variations and Nomenclature of Bermudian,West Indian, and Brazilian Reef Corals, with notes on various Indo-Pacific Corals. By Addison E. Verrill. _.. 63 Art. IV. — Comparisons of the Bermudian, West Indian, and Brazil- ian Coral Faunae. By Addison E. Verrill. Plates 10-35. 169 Art. V.— Notes on Corals of the genus Acropora (Madrepora Lam.), WITH NEW DESCRIPTIONS AND FIGURES OF TYPES, AND OF SEVERAL new Species. By Addison E. Verrill. Plates 36, 36 A-F 207 Art. VI. — Some Spiders and Mites from the Bermuda Islands. By Nathan Banks 267. Art. VII.— Marine and Terrestrial Isopods of the Bermudas, with descriptions of new Genera and Species. By Harriet Richard- son. Plates 37-40 277 Art. VIII. — Reconstruction of a Cretaceous Dinosaur, Claosaurus annectens Marsh. By Charles E. Beecher. Plates 41-45 311 Art. IX. — The Ascidians of the Bermuda Islands. By Willard G. Van Name. Plates 46-64 325 Index to Part I - i CONTENTS OF PART II. Art. X. — The Bermuda Islands : Their Scenery, Climate, Pro- ductions, Physiography, Natural History, and Geology ; with sketches of their early history and the changes due to man. By Addison E. Verrill. Plates 65-104 413 Index to Part II 913 OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY, 1900-1902. President. CHARLES E. BEECHER. Vice President. RUSSELL H. CHITTENDEN. Secretary. ALEXANDER W. EVANS. Librarian. • ADDISON VAN NAME. Treasurer. MORRIS F. TYLER. Publishing Committee. GEORGE J. BRUSH. ADDISON E. VERRILL. RUSSELL H. CHITTENDEN EDWARD S. DANA. CHARLES S. HASTINGS. CHARLES E. BEECHER. ADDISON VAN NAME. Auditing Committee. ADDISON E. VERRILL. ADDISON VAN NAME. LIST OF MEMBERS, 1899-1903. ACTIVE MEMBERS Baldwin, Hon. Simeon Eben, LL.D., Beach, Asst. Prof. Frederic Elijah, Ph.D., Beach, John Kimberly, LL.B., Beebe, Prof. William, Beecher, Prof. Charles Emerson, Ph.D Bennett, Thomas Gray, Ph.B., Bishop, Louis Bennett, M.D., Blake, Henry Taylor, M.A., Boltwood, Bertram B., Ph.D., Brewer, Prof. William Henry, Ph.D., Bristol, Eugene Stuart, M.A., Brown, Robert, M.A., Browning, Asst. Prof. Philip Embury, Ph.D., Brush, Prof. George Jarvis, LL.D., Bumstead, Asst. Prof. Henry Andrews, Ph.D. Carmalt, Prof. William Henry, M.D. , Chittenden, Prof. Russell Henry, Ph.D Clark, Prof. John E., Coe, Asst. Prof. Wesley Roswell, Ph.D. Curtis, George W., Dana, Prof. Edward Salisbury, Ph.D., Day, Wilbur Fisk, Dexter, Franklin Bowditch, Litt.D., Downs, Edgar Selah, Ph.D., DuBois, Prof. Augustus Jay, Ph.D., Eaton, Prof. Daniel Cady, Eaton, George Francis, Ph.D., . Elkin, William Lewis, Ph.D., Ely, Prof. John Slade, M.D., Evans, Asst. Prof. Alexander William, Ph.D., Farnam, Prof. Henry Wolcott, R. P.D., Farnam, William Whitman, J.U.D., Fisher, Prof. Irving, Ph.D., Gallaudet, Edson Fessenden, Ph.D Gibbs, Prof. Josiah Willard, LL.D., Gooch, Prof. Frank Austin, Ph.D.. Goodwin, Ralph Schuyler, Jr.. M.D., Graves, Prof. Henry Solon, Harrison, Hon. Lynde, Hastings, Prof. Charles Sheldon, Ph.D. Henderson, Yandell, Ph.D., Hill, Albert Banks, C.E., Hoppin, Prof. James Mason, LL.D., Hotchkiss, Justus S., Kindle, Edward Martin, Ph.D., . Kingsbury, Frederick John, LL.D., Kreider, Asst. Prof. Daniel Albert, Ph.D., New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Longineadow, Mass. New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Philadelphia, Pa. New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Dayton, Ohio New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Waterbury, Conn. New Haven IV List of Members. Kunkel, Beverly Waugh, Ph.B., Ladd, Prof. George Trumbull, LL.D., Lockwood, Asst. Prof. Edwin Hoyt, Ph.D MacCurdy, George Grant, M.A., Mendel, Asst. Prof. Lafayette Benedict Palmer, Eev. Charles Ray, D.D., Penfield, Prof. Samuel Lewis, Phillips, Prof. Andrew Wheeler, Ph.D. Pierpont, Prof. James, Ph.D., Pirsson, Prof. Louis Valentine, . Eaynolds, Prof. Edward Vilette, D.C.L Rice, Prof. William North, LL.D., Richards, Prof. Charles Brinckerhopf, Rowe, Henry C, Russell, Prof. Thomas Hubbard, M.D., Sargent, Henry Bradford, Sargent, Joseph B., Smith, Prof. Charles Henry, LL.D., Smith, Prof. Herbert Eugene, M.D., Smith, Prof. Percey Franklyn, Ph.D., Smith, Prof. Sidney Irving, Sturgis, William C, Ph.D., Swain, Prof. Henry Lawrence, M.D., Toumey, Asst. Prof. James William, Tyler, Morris Frank, LL.B., Van Name, Willard Gibbs, Ph.D., Van Name, Addison, M.A., VanVleck, Prof. John Monroe, LL.D., Verrill, Prof. Addison Emory, Washington, Henry Stephens, Ph.D., Watrous, Prof. George Dutton, D.C.L Wells, Prof. Horace Lemuel, : Wheeler, Asst. Prof. Henry Lord, Ph.D Wheeler, Edwin Saxton, M.A., . White, Charles Atwood, M.A., . Whitney, Eli, M.A., . . . Williams, Prof. Henry Shaler, Ph.D., Woodford, Prof. Arthur Burnham, Pli Wright, Prof. Arthur Williams, Ph.D., Wright, Prof. Henry Parks, LL.D., Ph.D D., New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Middletown, Conn. New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Colorado Springs New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Middletown, Conn. New Haven Locust, N. J. New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven ASSOCIATE MEMBERS. Bolton, Prof. Henry Carrington, Ph.D., Call, R. Ellsworth, Carter, President Franklin, LL.D., Gardiner, James Terry, Ph.B., . Gilman, President Daniel C, LL.D., Skinner, Prof. Joseph John, Ph.D., Washington, D. C. Brooklyn, N. Y. Williamstown, Mass. New York, N. Y. Washington, D. C. . Boston, Mass. ADDITIONAL ACTIVE MEMBEES, 1903. Bacon, Francis, M.D., Barney, Prof. Samuel Eben, C.E., Bartlett, Prof. Charles Joseph, M.D., Britton, Wilton Everett, B.S., Eliot, Gustavus, M.D., Emery, Prof. Henry Crosby. Ph.D., Foote, Harry Ward, Ph.D., Jenkins, Edward H., Ph.D., Lindsley, Prof. Charles Augustus, M.D. Mixter, Prof. William Gilbert, Schwab, Prof. J. G, Ph.D., Stokes, Rev. Anson Phelps, Jr., M.A., Winton, Andrew Lincoln, Ph.B., Wheeler, Lynde Phelps, Ph.D., Woolsey, Prof. Theodore Salisbury, LL.B., New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven LIST OF PATRONS. The following persons contributed to tiie special fund for publication of this volume Adler, Max, Bacon, Francis, M.D., Baldwin, Henry, Baldwin, Hon. Simeon Eben, LL.D., Bartlett, Prof. Charles Joseph, M.D., Beach, John Kimberly, LL.B., Beebe, Prof. William, Beecher, Prof. Charles Emerson, Ph.D. Bennett, Thomas Gray, Ph.B., Bishop, Louis Bennett, M.D., Blake, Henry Taylor, M.A., Boltwood, Bertram B., Ph.D., Brewer, Prof. William Henry, Ph.D., Bristol, Eugene Stuart, M.A., Brown, Robert, M.A., Brush, Prof. George Jarvis, LL.D., Carmalt, Prof. William Henry, M.D. , New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven .\'.\V H.-lVrll New Haven VI List of Patrons. Chittenden, Prof. Russell Henry, Ph.D., Clark, Prof. John E.. Cleaveland, Judge Livingston \Y\, Coe, Prof. Wesley Roswell, Ph.D., Curtis, George W. Dana, Prof. Edward Salisbury, Ph.D., Day, Wilbur Fisk. Dexter, Franklin Bowditch, Litt.D.. Dimock, Henry Farnam, M.A., DuBois, Prof. Augustus Jay, Ph.D., Dwight, President Timothy, D.D., LL.D. Eaton, Prof. Daniel Cady. Eaton, George Francis, Ph.D.. . Eliot, Gustavus. M.D., Elkin, William Lewis. Ph.D., Ely. Prof. John Slade, M.D., Evans, Prof. Alexander William, Ph.D. Farnam, Prof. Henry Wolcott, R.P.D.. Farnam. William Whitman, J.U.D., Fisher, Prof. Irving, Ph.D., Gibbs, Prof. Josiah Willard, LL.D.. Gilman, President Daniel C, LL.D., Gooch, Prof. Frank Austin. Ph.D.. Hadley, President Arthur T., Harrison, Hon. Lynde, Hastings, Prof. Charles S., Ph.D., Hill, Albert Banks, C.E., Hoppin, Prof. James Mason, LL.D., Hotchkiss, Henry L. , Hotchkiss, Justus S., LL.B. Jenkins, Edward H.. Ph.D., Kingsbury, Frederick John, LL.D., Ladd, Prof. George Trumbull, LL.D., Lindsley, Prof. Charles Augustus, M.D. MacCurdy, George Grant, M.A., Mather, Thomas W., Mendel, Prof. Lafayette Benedict, Ph.D., Mixter, Prof. William Gilbert, Osborne, Thomas B., M.D., Palmer, Rev. Charles Ray, D.D., Penfield, Prof. Samuel Lewis, Phelps, Prof. William Lyon, Ph.D., Phillips, Prof. Andrew Wheeler, Ph.D. Pierpont, Prof. James, Ph.D., Pirsson, Prof. Louis Valentine, . Raynolds, Prof. Edward Vilette, D.C.L. Rice, Prof. William North, LL.D., Rowe, Henry C, . Russell, Prof. Thomas Hubbard. M.D., New Haven Longmeadow, Ma>>. New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New York New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Washington, D. C. New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Waterbury, Conn. New Haven New Haven New Haven Florida New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Middletown, Conn. New Haven New Haven List of Patrons. via Salisbury, Prof. Edward Elbridge, Sanford, Leonard C, M.D., Sargent, Henry Bradford, Sargent, Joseph B., Smith, Prof. Charles Henry, LL.D.. Smith, Prof. Herbert Eugene, M.D., Smith, Prof. Percey Franklyn, Ph.D., Smith, Prof. Sidney Irving, Stokes, Rev. Anson Phelps, Jr., M.A., Sturgis, William C, Ph.D., Sumner, Prof. William Graham, LL.D., Swain. Prof. Henry Lawrence, M.D., Toumey, Prof. James William, Van Name, Willard Gibbs, Ph.D., Van Name, Addison, M. A., VanVleck, Prof. John Monroe, LL.D., Ykrrill, Prof. Addison Emory, Watrous, Prof. George Dutton, D.C.L., Wells, Prof. Horace Lemuel, Wheeler. Prof. Henry Lord, Ph.D., White, Charles Atwood, M.A., . Whitney, Eli, M.A., Williams, Prof. Henry Shaler, Ph.D., Williams, Prof. Frederick Wells, Woolsey, Prof. Theodore S., LL.B., Wright, Prof. Arthur Williams, Ph.D., Wright, Prof. Henry Parks, LL.D., New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Colorado Springs New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven Middletown, Conn. New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven New Haven THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF AETS AND SCIENCES. CENTENNIAL ANNIVERSAEY, OCTOBER lira. 1899. NORTH SHEFFIELD HALL. Afternoon Session, 3 p. m. 1. Reading of Communications from Corresponding Societies, by Alexander W. Evans, Ph.D., Secretary of the Academy. 2. Address of Welcome, by His Honor Lyman A. Mills, Lieutenant Governor of Connecticut. 3. Address ; The Debt of this Century to Learned Societies, by Professor William H. Brewer, Ph.D., President of the Academy. 4. Address ; Scientific Thought in the Nineteenth Century, by Professor William North Rice, LL.D., of Wesleyan University. [At the close of the addresses an opportunity will be offered for oral communications from delegates of Corresponding Societies.] Evening Session, 8 p. h. 5. Address; The History of the Academy during its First Century, by Hon. Simeon E. Baldwin, LL.D. Eeception by the Academy of delegates from Corresponding Societies and invited guests, in Winchester Hall, from 9 to 11 p. m. With the above program the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, the third in age of the learned societies of America, celebrated on the 11th of October, eighteen hundred and ninety- nine, its one-hundredth anniversary. By a happy coincidence the Centennial of the Academy came into near conjunction with the Bicentennial of Yale University, the foster-parent of the Vlll Centennial Anniversary. Academy, but at the same time was far enough removed to escape occupation. In the absence of his Excellency the Governor of Connecticut, who had official engagements elsewhere, the Lieutenant Governor, Hon. Lyman A. Mills, welcomed the Academy and its guests in the name of the State. The addresses of the occasion, by the President of the Academy and two of its honored members, are printed in the pages that follow. Both to Judge Baldwin, of the Supreme Court of Con- necticut, who drew so faithful a picture of the Academy ? s past, setting it in just relation to its environment and making even its more humble details attractive, and to Professor Rice, of Wes- leyan University, who so admirably outlined the course of scien- tific thought in the nineteenth century, the Academy is under great obligation for the service rendered. The cordial greetings received from the correspondents of the Academy at home and abroad, conveying congratulations on the work achieved in the past and good wishes for the future, added much to the interest of the occasion. Their number and wide distribution, as shown in the subjoined list, bear witness to the sympathy which in this age unites the workers in science of all lands. Johns Hopkins University, Boston Society of Natural History, Harvard Universitv, Field Columbian Museum, Connecticut Historical Society, Trinity College, .... State Historical Society of Wisconsin, Wesleyan University, New London County Historical Society, Linnean Society of New York, New York Academy of Sciences, . American Philosophical Society, Franklin Institute, Pennsylvania Historical Society, Missouri Botanical Garden, Academy of Science, Essex Institute, .... Georgia Historical Society, Smithsonian Institution, United States Naval Observatory, . Baltimore. Boston. Cambridge. Chicago. Hartford. Hartford. Madison. Middletown. New London. New York. New York. Philadelphia. Philadelphia. Philadelphia. St. Louis. St. Louis. Salem. Savannah. Washington. Washington. Centennial Anniversary. IX Koninklijke Akademie van Wetenschappen, . Amsterdam. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, . . . Basel. Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Weten- schappen, Batavia. Koninklijke Natuurkundige Yereeniging in Neder- landseh-Indie, ..... Batavia. Koniglich Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaf- ten, ....... Berlin. Government Observatory, .... Bombay. Meteorologisches Observatorium, . . . Bremen. Naturwissenschaftlicher Yerein, . . . Bremen. Queensland Branch of the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia, .... Brisbane. Academie des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux- Arts de Belgique, Bruxelles. Institut Meteorologique de Roumanie, . . Bucharest. Societe Linneenne de Normandie, . . . Caen. Asiatic Society of Bengal, .... Calcutta. Kongelige Frederiks Universitet. . . . Christiania. Koninklijk Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Instituut, De Bilt. Naturforscher-Gesellschaft bei der Kaiserlichen Universitat, ...... Dorpat. Yerein fiir Erdkunde, ..... Dresden. Royal Observatory, ..... Edinburgh. Naturforsehende Gesellschaft, . . . Emden. JNaturforschende Gesellschaft, . Freiburg im Breisgau. Gorlitz. Gothenburg. Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Kongliga Yetenskaps och Yitterhets Samhalle, Nova Scotian Institute of Science, Societas Scientiarum Fennica, Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica, Medicinisch-Naturwissenschaniche Gesellschaft, Societe* Physico-Mathematique, IN aturwissenschaftlicher Yerein fiir Schleswig-Hol- stein, Physikalisch-okonomische Gesellschaft, . Geological Society, . Mathematical Society, ..... Royal Historical Society, .... Royal Society, ...... Konglige Carolinska Universitet, -Literary and Philosophical Society, AVesfalischer Provincial- Yerein fiir Wissenschaft unci Kunst, Real Istituto d'Incoraggiainento, ISIorth of England Institute of Mining and Mecharir ical Engineers, . . . Newcastle-upon-Tyne. Geological Survey of Canada, . . . Ottawa. Halifax. Helsingfors. Helsingfors. Jena. Kasan. Kiel. Konigsberg. London. London. London. London. Lund. Manchester. Minister. Naples. x Centennial Anniversary. Societe Mathematique de France, . . . Paris. Observatoire Central Nicolas, . . . Pulkowa. Reale Accademia dei Lincei, .... Rome. Societa Italiana delle Scienze detta del XL, . Rome. Academic Imperiale des Sciences, . . . St. Petersburg. Comite Geologique, ..... St. Petersburg. Observatoire Physique Central Nicolas, . St. Petersburg. Russisch Kaiserliche Mineralogische Gesellschaft, St. Petersburg. Sociedad Cientifica de Chile, .... Santiago. Royal Society of New South Wales, . . Sidney. Museum, ....... Tromso. Reale Museo di Zoologia e di Anatomia Comparata, Turin. Konglige Universitet, ..... Upsala. From these greetings we venture to select for reproduction here, on the ground of our inheritance of a common language and of other common heritages, the following : THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF LONDON FOR IMPROVING NATURAL KNOWLEDGE Sends to the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences on the happy occasion of its celebrating the Centenary of its foundation brotherly greetings and hearty congratulations. From the earliest days the Royal Society has felt that its efforts should not be confined to the city whose name forms part of its title, and has always sympathized with, and, from time to time, has assisted undertakings for improving Natural Knowledge carried out in various parts of the world. It remembers with pride how since its early years it has been able to count as mem- bers of itself many distinguished men of science dwelling on the other side of the Atlantic, some of whom Connecticut can claim as its own. And to the earnest wish that the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences may enjoy continued prosperity in time to come it adds the no less sincere and earnest wish that the brotherly ties between those who on the two sides of the ocean are devoting themselves to improving Natural Knowledge may grow still stronger as the years pass on. Listee, Pres. R. 8. Centennial Anniversary. xi THE LONDON MATHEMATICAL SOCIETY Present fraternal greetings to the Connecticut Academy of Sciences on the occasion of the hundredth anniversary of their foundation. They look back with satisfaction on the exchange of publica- tions which has subsisted between the two bodies ever since their own foundation in the year 1865. They recognize with much pleasure the importance of the researches in Mathematical and Physical Science given to the world by the Connecticut Academy in a language which does not convey to them any suggestion of a foreign origin. In no coun- try has the value of these researches been earlier or more fully recognized than in Great Britain. They desire and expect a long career of increasing usefulness and honor for the Connecticut Academy of Sciences, which even now takes rank among the most ancient of the existing learned societies of the world. Signed in behalf of the London Mathematical Society. Kelvin, President. Joseph Larmor, Treasurer. Robert Tucker, ) , , „ TT r ' \ secretaries. A. E. H. Love, ) London, July 31, 1899. THE COUNCIL OF THE MANCHESTER LITERARY AND PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY Send most cordial greetings on the occasion of the Centenary of the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences. They recall the great services which the Academy has rendered, not only in the encouragement of scientific research within its own borders, but also by the singular merit of its publications, many of which they feel will rank as permanent landmarks in the history of Science. The Council feel that they can express no better wish than that the Academy may continue to nourish in a manner worthy of its past traditions. 26th September, 1899. Horace Lamb, President. R. G. Gwyther, \ Honorary Francis Jones, ) Secretaries. xii Centennial Anniversary. Royal Observatory, Edinburgh. 27th September, 1899. To the Secretary Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, New Haven, Connecticut, U. S. A. Dear Sir — The Staff of this Observatory desire to join with me in most heartily congratulating the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences on the celebration of the hundredth anniver- sary of its foundation. On this auspicious occasion we particularly call to mind the distinguished services to the Sciences of Meteorology and Astron- omy done by your illustrious members Loomis and H. A. Newton, whose names will ever be associated with the scientific progress of the closing century. Wishing the most complete success to your commemoration and regretting that it is not practicable for any of us to share per- sonally therein, I am, Dear Sir, Very faithfully yours, Ralph Copeland. In addition to the greetings sent, several of the societies had also appointed delegates to represent them at the Celebration, delegates of foreign societies being naturally chosen from their American membership. Some who had accepted appointment found themselves at the last moment unable to come. Actually present were these : from the Boston Society of Natural History, Professor Edward S. Morse ; from Harvard University, Professor Charles R. Lanman; from the Connecticut Historical Society. Hon. Simeon E. Baldwin ; from Wesley an University, Professor William North Rice; from the Geological Society of London, Professors George J. Brush and Edward S. Dana; from the Literary and Philosophical Society of Manchester, Professor J. Willard Gibbs ; from the North of England Institute of Mining and Mechanical Engineers, Newcastle-upon-Tyne, Mr. Richard P. Rothwell, of New York. With a reception tendered by the Academy to the delegates and invited guests, the celebration, and with it the record of the first century, was closed. THE, FIRST CENTURY OF THE CONNECTICUT ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES. An Historical Address delivered before the Academy at its Centennial Anniversary, on October 11th, 1899. By Simeon E. Baldwin, LL.D. American science, and perhaps we may say American letters, first began to take shape in the latter half of the eighteenth century. Franklin was easily the first in each. One is almost tempted to declare that he was the iirst American who wrote good English : it is certainly safe to say that he was the first whose style of composition had a distinct and lasting charm. This gave wings to his scientific discoveries and conclusions, and made him a citizen of the world. It was natural that he should take the lead in introducing upon our continent the learned academy. The American Philosophical Society sprang from his creative touch, and had its first beginnings at Philadelphia in 1744. Bos- ton followed in 1780 with the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, and the list for the century was closed at New Haven with the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences in 1799.* It is seldom that anything enduring is originally constituted in the form and manner which subsequently mark its character. In laying the foundations of the oldest of the societies which I have named, which was in 1743, it was Franklin's aim to bring into association all who had any reputation for scientific attain- ments in the different colonies. While an organization was effected in 1744, no one came in, outside of Pennsylvania, New York and New Jersey, and after a languishing existence of a quarter of a century it was merged with a local society of Phila- * An association called "The Society for Promoting Useful Knowledge" existed in the city of New York in 1792, which met monthly ; but it was not incorporated. Morse's American Geography, ed. of 1792, 265. Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. IX. xiv Centennial Anniversary delphia under a charter from the State of Pennsylvania, incor- porating it as the American Philosophical Society for the Promo- tion of Useful Knowledge. Of this Franklin was the first President, and it has ever since maintained an honorable position in the republic of letters. In like manner the Academy, whose centennial we meet to-night to celebrate, was founded on the ruins of an earlier organization,, the Connecticut Society of Arts and Sciences. In 1779, Benjamin Guild, a Harvard tutor, w T ho was then planning the foundation of the American Academy at Boston, on his way back from Phila- delphia, where he had probably made himself acquainted with the constitution and methods of the American Philosophical Society, stopped over at New Haven to see one of its early mem- bers, President Stiles. The establishment of academies both at Boston and New Haven was talked over at length, and each soon made earnest efforts in that direction. A few months later, Mr. Guild was able to send Dr. Stiles a copy of the charter granted by Massachusetts for the American Academy of Arts and Sciences. In Connecticut, however, a less friendly spirit was shown. The relations between the State and Yale College were somewhat strained. That institution had become a body of great and grow- ing importance. It was self-governing. The fellows or trustees were all Congregational clergymen, and perpetuated themselves by filling vacancies, as they might arise. No power of visitation had been reserved in terms to the State, when the charter was granted, and none was admitted to exist by the College authori- ties. It was obvious that any academy of arts and sciences which might be incorporated would naturally gravitate towards the College, and come ultimately under the leadership of the same set of men. There were those also, even among the Congregational clergy, by whom the College was viewed with some distrust. President Clap had been a Calvinist of the old school, but President Stiles was what in those days was denominated a Latitudinarian. He was of opinion that the true theory of Christian redemption was that — to use his own words in a letter to Dr. Franklin — a " happy immortality " had thus been " purchased for the virtuous and truly good of every religious denomination in Christendom, and for those of every age, nation and mythology, who reverence the Address by Professor Baldwin. xv Deity, are filled with integrity, righteousness, and benevolence."* Such sentiments did not generally prevail in the Congregational pulpits of the State, and those who did not share them were able to point to the declining state of the College church as evidence of their evil tendency. Under these circumstances a charter for " the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences," drafted by President Stiles, was sent by him to the liev. Dr. Nathan Strong of Hartford for pre- sentation to the General Assembly at its May session, to be held in that city in 1781. The Academy was to consist of a President and Fellows, the first meeting to be called by Dr. Stiles and held at " the chapel of the College of Connecticut Hall in New Haven." A blank was left in the draft for the names of the incorporators, which it was probably supposed could best be filled by Dr. Strong on consultation with the friends of the measure in the Assembly. Apparently it found friends in the upper house, for it was there passed, and with such inconsiderate haste that the blank was left unfilled, thus making the bill totally inoperative. In the lower house it received more careful attention. An amendment was proposed to make the Academy " at all times subject to the visitation and inspection of the General Assembly " and the matter continued to the next session at New Haven. f In this disposition of it the upper house finally concurred, and after one or two similar continuances at subsequent sessions, Di\ Stiles evidently thought it best to make a fresh start on a different basis, for we find him, in 1783, in consultation with his cousin, Rev. John Devotion of Saybrook, over a new charter, for the " Connec- ticut Academy of Sciences," making the Governor of the State the first President, and the Secretary of the State the " chief Secretary." The Academy was to have power to establish a botanical garden and to purchase or erect a suitable building, con- taining a hall for its meetings, a library, and rooms adapted to the purposes of a museum. The first meeting was to be held at Middletown4 * Franklin's Memoirs, Phila. ed. of 1834, i, 622. fConn. State Mss. Archives, Colleges and Schools, 1763-1789, No. 134. The Yale Book, I, 331. % Mss. Diary of President Stiles, Vol. 11, p. 282. This draft of a charter is also preserved in the Stiles Mss., in the Yale library. xvi Centennial Anniversary A sedulous desire to avoid any marked connection with the Col- lege is shown in this scheme of organization. The arts were even excluded from the corporate name. It fared, however, no better than its predecessor; one cause perhaps, being that it provided that the proposed building should be free of taxation. The pub- lic mind, also, was full of other things. The era of the revolution had closed, but that of reconstruction, with all its possibilities, was now opening. Three years later, in despair of obtaining the legislation desired, a voluntary association* was formed at Hartford during the ses- sion of the General Assembly there, by the name of the Connecti- cut Society of Arts and Sciences. Dr. Stiles and Dr. Strong were among its active promoters, the number of whom was limited to sixty, and soon rose to over forty, the Lieutenant-Governor of the State being the first President. It was to have two semi-annual sessions, alternately at Hartford and JSfew Haven, during the ses- sion of the legislature at each place. No prophet was needed to predict the practical failure of this scheme. It was an appendage to the General Assembly, but without its countenance. It had no fixed center nor place of abode. A learned academy must be the outgrowth, or at least must have the cordial support, either of a university or of a capital. It must draw its life from an exchange of the fruits of scholarship, or an exchange of news of scientific discovery. Nor can it be migratory. It must have a irov ar>ics and of political science and jurisprudence. From these the Academy had largelv turned, awav since the insti- tution of the American Journal of Science and Arts, and durino- his term of office as President of the University, the rise and growth of the Scientific School had brought it into a more vital connection with that than it had ever had with the college proper, or, as it now began to be called, the academic department. Another change came over the Academy at the time when the last of its original founders were passing away. In the true and original sense it had from its early years been a convivial body. Nothing, after all. promotes freedom of intellectual intercourse, and the exchange of thought, so much as gathering to share a social meal. Such assemblies the Romans called convivia because, as Cicero says in one of his letters.^ it is on occasions of this kind that life is most truly enjoyed. From its earlv days it had been one of the unwritten laws and institutions of the Academy, that the member at whose house the monthly or bi-monthly meetings were held should provide some simple entertainment to succeed the regular business of the even- ing. At first the refection was confined to the fruit in season, or nuts and raisins. Later it as>umed more the form of a supper, and while some of the members insisted that it did as much as anything else to hold the Academy together, there were others, among whom President (then Professor) "Woolsey was prominent, who declared that it was a diversion from their proper work and ought to be abandoned. In November. 1842, a committee was appointed to report mi the expediency of such a change of practice, consisting of Rev. Dr. Murdock, and Professors Larned and Olmstead. A month * To Lucius Papillitis Paetus, Book XIII, Ep. IX. Address by Professor Baldwin. xxv later they reported that while the customary entertainment might be " an elegant and agreeable relaxation after the severer exercises of the meeting " and afforded a pleasant opportunity for social inter- course, yet, to quote their words, " that the indulgence of the sen- sual appetites never made a philosopher ; that animal pleasures and indulgences are unbecoming and unsuitable in the conven- tions of scientific men for scientific purposes ; that such festivities, late in the evening, are generally injurious to health ; that the expense and trouble of preparing them are very considerable and unequally fall on only a part of the attending members ; that these festivities are becoming more and more luxurious and expen- sive, and cannot easily be kept within moderate bounds ; and lastly that they are a bad example to be exhibited in the vicinity of the college : they afford to dissipated students a plausible excuse for their midnight revels, and tend to paralyze the efforts of the college officers to restrain their pupils from debasing and expensive carousals." The report was accepted, and so in Christmas week of 1842 the modest suppers of the Academy came to an end. Tradition says that President Woolsey never attended another meeting. There is, in truth, a certain and altogether natural and right attraction to almost every man, now, as fully as in the days of Cicero, in the pleasures of the table, enjoyed in moderation and in congenial company. The Academy had thrown away what had been a real magnet, and its meetings as years went on became more formal, and not infrequently were without a quorum. One may sometimes read between the leaves of history more than the page contains. I am inclined to think that President Woolsey 's attack and Professor Larned's report came in part — though no doubt half unconsciously to themselves — from the fact that their wants in the direction of such social entertainments had been better met by an institution, now become a venerable one, founded in 1838 by eight gentlemen of the city, all, I believe, members of the Academy, and still known, by right of primogen- iture, only by the name of " The Club." This was a company of personal friends, by 1842 somewhat enlarged in numbers, who took tea, in the old New England fashion (what the housewives call a " high tea ") at each other's houses in succession two or three times a month, and afterwards xxvi Centennial Anniversary listened to a paper or a talk on a given subject which was after- wards discussed by all in turn. Of this President "Woolsey, Professor Larned, Dr. Bacon, Pro- fessor Gibbs, Professor Twining, Henry White, Rev. Henry GL Ludlow and Dr. Henry A. Tomlinson were the original members, and in a smaller circle and with the freedom which greater inti- macy gives, after what took the place of an ordinary meal could enjoy the pleasures of literary conversation. The weakening of the Academy which followed the abandon- ment of the supper was soon manifested in another way. A library of some value had been accumulated, partly by gift or exchange and partly b} 7 purchase, during its first half century. In 1847 the whole of it was sold to Yale College. The Connecticut Historical Society of Hartford had been incorporated in 1825. Here was another organization formed to accomplish what had been originally one of the cherished objects of the Academy, and towards which its early members had made such important contribution. In 1847, at the same time when the library was disposed of, it was voted to deposit with this Society, as a loan, all the statistical accounts of Connec- ticut towns which remained in manuscript in its archives. These covered with more .or less completeness, twenty-five towns.* Subsequently, in 1859, when the Historical Society was about to publish a volume of its transactions, the Academy contributed a sixth of the entire cost. The change of policy manifested by the steps taken in 1817 which I have mentioned was followed in 1848 by a vote to sus- pend the collection of the annual dues. The Academy had thus in some measure settled its estate ; but it was by no means dead. The meetings were still often of decided interest, and served at least to diffuse intelligence of what * The list of the statistics thus turned over to the Connecticut Historical Soci- ety includes those for the following towns : Bethlehem, Bolton, Canterbury. Cheshire, Cornwall, Coventry, East Windsor, Farmington (Wintonbury parish), Franklin, Haddam, Goshen, Lebanon, Lisbon, Pornfret, Preston (North Society), Ridgefield, Stratford, Tolland, Union, Wallingford, Washington, Watertown, Willington, Windham, Winchester. Certain statistics as to New London remain in the archives of the Academy. Address by Professor Baldwin. xxvii was going on in the scientific world.* In 1856 a movement was made toward resuming greater activity, by the introduction of a resolution " that literature as well as science and every subject tending to the advancement of knowledge or the promotion of human happiness conies within the scope and original plan of this Association," and further that papers suitable for publication should thereafter be published as from the Transactions of the Academy, either in the American Journal of Science or in the volume form, and that collection of the annual dues should be resumed. A discussion, however, resulted in laying these propositions on the table. They were evidently somewhat antagonistic to the policy which had been adopted by the American Journal of Science, which naturally preferred to ignore the original sources from which so many of its articles were derived. In 1861, how- ever, a vote was passed to request the editors of the Journal to give credit to the Academy for all papers which had formed a part of its transactions A year later the Academy obtained what it had long needed, and the more imperatively, since the discontinuance of its evening sup- pers, a regular and fixed place of meeting. This was due to the kindness of Mr. Sheffield, one of its members, who is gratefully remembered as the founder of the Sheffield Scientific School. Its last gathering at the house of a member was on November 19, 1862, at that of Tutor Lebeus C. Chapin, on the corner of Church and Wall streets, and it has met ever since at Sheffield Hall. In modelling that building, a few years later, Mr. Sheffield constructed the handsome library room in the third story with special reference to the wants of the Academy, and in conformity with his wishes, the Governing Board of the School in 1866 offered it as a place where our meetings could be permanently held. The offer was received with due thanks, but the Academy did not commit itself to an acceptance in terms. Had it done so, it would have been less wise and far-seeing than those who laid its first foundations. The charter prepared by President Stiles and Mr. Devotion, in 1783, contemplated a building which the Acad- * Those of its members most interested in philological studies had, under the lead of Dr. Murdock, procured a charter from the State in 1844 for their incor- poration as the " Philological Society." Special Laws of Conn. IV, 1199. xxviii Centennial Anniversary emy should own, itself, and make a place, not only for its meet- ings, but for collections which might be of public value. Such a building may yet be its final home. Let us hope that when our successors celebrate its next centennial, it may be in an unbor- rowed hall, that shall perpetuate the name of some friend of learn- ing and stand as his stately gift to science and the arts, as culti- vated by the people of Connecticut. In December, 1863, at the instance of Professor Grilman, now President of John Hopkins University, the Academy voted to recommence the publication of its transactions, but to aim espec- ially at printing such papers as " on account of their length, their technical or special character, or their local interest, would be inappropriate to the American Journal of Science ; " particularly disclaiming any desire to interfere with " the field which the Jour- nal occupies with so much credit to the country and the College." Collection of the annual dues of the Academy had been resumed, and with the aid of some special subscriptions to the publication fund, the first part of the first volume of the current series of our Transactions was carried through the press in 1865. In 1867 a further contribution of nearly $400 was received from the treasury of the " Yale Natural History Society," which had become prac- tically defunct, to be devoted to the publication of papers on the branches of science which that Society had been formed to pro- mote. In 1871 the second part of the volume appeared, and since then parts of volumes have been issued every few years, the tenth volume being now half through the press. The general character of their contents is such as was indicated by the vote of the Academy in 1863. There is little in them of a popular character ; but it may fairly be said that there has been much to interest and to inform the scientific reader. An occa- sional contribution will be found by students of philology, and one pertains to the general history of letters and the drama, but the subjects considered have generally been such as relate to Nat- ural History, Physiology or Mathematics, and the papers mainly of the kind that are originally submitted by title, and are known only to the committee on publication before they appear in print. While this is true of them, in the shape in which they appear in our Transactions, it is, however, no less true that in many instances the subject considered has been less formally presented Address by Professor Baldwin. xxix "by the author at the meetings of the Academy, and the main results or conclusions thus communicated and discussed. Our first published volume bore, as has been said, the name of Memoirs of the Academy. In planning for the second volume, half a century later, it was thought best to entitle it as the Transac- tions of the Academy. The question then arose whether it should be numbered as volume two, or volume one, and in view of this change of name, as well as of the great lapse of time since the earlier publication, it was concluded to make it the commence- ment of an independent series. The exchange list of the Academy in 1810 was limited for the United States to the Massachusetts Historical Society ; the Amer- ican Academy of Arts and Sciences ; the New York Agricultural Society ; the New York Historical Society, and the American Philosophical Society. Six copies of Part 1 of Volume I were also put in the hands of Dr. Noah Webster, to be transmitted by him to such foreign societies or libraries as he might think proper to select. At pres- ent our Transactions are exchanged for those of nearly a hundred learned societies in this country, and of more than twice as many in foreign countries.* A valuable library has thus been accumulated, which is depos- ited for convenience, and under an arrangement which contemplates its remaining there permanently, in the library of Yale University, the head of which is also the librarian of the Academy. The Academy now assembles monthly in the Faculty room on the first floor of Sheffield Hall, its last meeting being its seven hundred and eighty-sixth. Its ordinary course of business does not differ materially from that which I have described as pursued half a century ago. Some topic previously announced is presented, either by a written paper, or an oral explanation, and opportunity is then given for a general discussion. In this way, independently of what has been accomplished by its publications, the Academy has been of substantial service for a hundred years to the College and to the city, particularly, but often to the State and to the country, as well. * About 225. Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XI. c xxx Centennial Anniversary To some of the results of its labors I have already sufficiently adverted. I must add that too high a value can hardly be set on the Statistical Account of New Haven by President D wight, as a study of an American town in the formative period of American government. It was republished, a few years ago, by the city authorities in its year book. A census of New Haven was also taken by a committee of the Academy early in the century, the results of which are on file in our archives, and well merit future publication. The collection of statistics from all the towns in the State would probably have been achieved, had President Dwight lived ten years longer, and what was accomplished will be of the greatest importance whenever a history of Connecticut is written that deals, from the standpoint of the sociologist, with the charac- ter of her people and her institutions. In 1836, when the two hundredth anniversary of the founding of New Haven was approaching, the Academy voted to appoint one of its members to prepare a historical address for the occa- sion, and took an active part in providing for its proper celebra- tion. The address by Professor Kingsley, which Avas its main feature, was a careful and masterly production, and the Academy also procured, partly at its own expense, the striking of a set of medals to commemorate the day. In 1873, the necessity of a better map of the State than any yet produced was made the subject of discussion at several of our meetings. The result was a memorial from the Academy to the General Assembly for a new topographic survey, and a public agitation of the question, out of which came the very excellent typographical atlas of Connecticut, published in 1893 by the col- laboration of the United States Geological Survey and a Commis- sion appointed by the State, of which the chairman was the present President of the Academy. Provision was made by the Academy in 1799 for keeping at its expense a meteorological register, and the results contained in its archives, when combined with some records of an earlier and others of a later date, made by other observers at New Haven, constitute a history of the weather which is nearly complete from 1779 to the present hour.* * See the Yale Book, I, 335. Address by Professor Baldwin. xxxi The stimulating effect of the discussions at the ordinary meet- ings of the Academy on the life of the community one is liable to underestimate. Here, one after another, each of the great dis- coveries of modern science, of the great advances in modern thought, has been presented by those competent to explain its character and bearings, and made familiar to a company of intelli- gent meu, who in turn were sure to diffuse the information so received through a wider circle. Thus, the stethoscope was exhibited and its utility demonstrated before the Academy by Dr. Charles Hooker in 1829, when it was still unknown to many of his profession, and distrusted by many more. So of the discoveries and conclusions of Professor Marsh in the domain of palaeontology, several were informally communicated to the Academy before they had become the property of the world. In the field of philology, the origin and growth of lan- guage, early discussed, as we have seen, by President Dwight, was taken up, forty years ago, with a profounder scholarship, by Professor Whitney, and the positions stated here which he after- wards advanced in his printed works. It would be easy to refer to others, many of whom are still of us, who have in such ways con- tributed to make the ordinary meetings of the Academy a source of influence and power. Its functions, however, have become, as the years go on, divided by sharper and sharper lines. Its unpublished transactions bear little relation to its published transactions. It may not unfairly be said that it prints nothing that has been read before it, and nothing that could be read before it. Our transactions include, as has been stated, much, the germ or antecedents of which have been the subject of an informal talk or brief paper at one of our meetings. But much of the matter is so elaborated and expressed in terms so technical as hardly to be intelligible to any one with- out the aid of plates and figures, and not to be intelligible to most of the author's associates in the Academy, at all. He is speaking to a different audience. The mathematician sends his message to scholars in his line, — to two or three in this foreign university, and two or three in that. The naturalist, in like manner, may interest one man in Vienna, another in Paris, another in Oxford. Neither of these writers, perhaps, could understand, or would care xxxii Centennial Anniversary to understand, the paper of the other. Each has made a contri- bution to the stock of human knowledge, and the Academy, with- out committing itself to the conclusions of any of its members, is glad to serve as a vehicle of transmission, by which such as it may deem of sufficient importance may be communicated to the scholars of the world. The estimation in which the publications of the Academy are held by those to whom they are thus especially addressed may be shown from a single though certainly a conspicuous instance. The three papers contributed by Professor J. Willard Gibbs to the second and third volumes of our Transactions, on Thermody- namics, and fresh modes of expression which Chemistry can bor- row from Mathematics, have been uuiversallv recognized as con- taming practical suggestions of the first importance, as well as statements of certain laws never before distinctly formulated, as to the properties and inter-relations of heterogeneous substances. One of those (the law of phases) is now commonly known by chemists as Gibbs' law. These articles were translated into Ger- man by Professor Ostwald of the University of Leipsic, in 1892, and a French version of one of them, (that in regard to the equi- librium of heterogeneous substances), by Professor Chatelier of the College of France, has appeared this year at Paris. In the preface to this book, Professor Chatelier declares that the sym- bolic representations of chemical substances or compositions pro- posed by Professor Gibbs in the second volume of our Transactions have already proved of inestimable service to science by opening a way to the study of subjects so complex that it would have been absolutely impossible to reach any intelligible result without the aid thus afforded of what spoke to the senses and the imagination. A new branch of chemistry, he says, has thus been created " dont Pi??ijjortance, tons les jours oroissante, demerit aujourd'hui com- parable d celle de la chimie ponder 'ale creeepar Lavoisier." * I need not comment on the comparison thus suggested between the recent advance in chemical science flowing from the use of Professor Gibbs' methods of investigation, and the great stride taken in human knowledge when the " phlogiston " theory of Stahl was replaced by the proposition of Lavoisier that nothing is lost * Equilibre des Systeines Chiruiques, Paris, 1899, vi. Address by Professor Baldwin. xxxiii in combustion, the weight of the products being equal to the weight of the constituents. As we look back on the century which closes to-day, we cannot but see that the Connecticut Academy of 1799 was Yale College in another form. In one sense it was a higher form, for it was a reaching forward to a broader field of acquirements and achievements than any college could lay open. It was a movement towards bringing to New Haven the life of a University, — the first movement ; for the ('..liege had done nothing beside College'work, save in the single line of theology. Most of the original members of the Academy were graduates of Yale, and, if we except Dr. Webster, the leaders among them were actively connected witli its faculty or board of government. From such a body, formed in the eighteenth century, nothing was to be expected in the line of technical or abstract research. For that the mind even of their great chief, President Dwight, avrs unfitted. He had large executive ability, and remarkable powers of close observation and forcible statement. But he was no scholar, as we now count scholarship. The same thing may be said of his colleague Silliman. He had the art of teaching others what he knew himself. He was active in gathering facts upon which later science might build theories. But he was one of those from whose followers some soon must come to outstrip him. It was not indeed until the second half of this first century of our existence that a generation of professed scholars existed in the United States. The material of our college faculties before that time was taken from the church, the bar, or the medical profes- sion.* There were no doctors of philosophy. Dr. Shepard and Dr. Percival, who made, as has been said, the geological survey of Connecticut, were doctors of medicine. We are apt to forget how short was the entire list of college presidents and professors in the United States at the close of the eighteenth century. Instead of the thousands whom we can count to-day, they hardly * Much of the teaching was done, as it still is in our professional schools, by men whose life was mainly devoted to other pursuits, to which their connection with the college was merely an incident. See Life of Francis Wayland, I, 210. xxxiv Centennial Anninrsary numbered fifty in all. It was the day of small things in Amer- ican letters. Our first volume of memoirs was such a collection as might now be made (but would not now be made) by the collaboration of a dozen intelligent men of liberal education, none of whom had made any department of human knowledge a special study, except so far as it might afford him a means of professional livelihood. I say would not now be made, for the world is quick to recognize the worth of specialization in scholarship, and to demand that what a learned academy shall publish be such as only learning and original research can produce. The history of the Academy up to 1840 was sketched by Edward C. Herrickin the American Quarterly Register for August of that year. A later article in the Yale Book,* by Professor Loomis, brought it down to 1877. Its first century is now auspiciouslv closed, and its story is before you. It is a record j^erhaps of no great achievements. It may have published no dazzling discoveries. Its influences have been often indirect, and their source perhaps unknown. But in one way or another, changing its course from time to time to meet the new conditions it had to face, as best it could, it has kept steadily to its work, with no break of activity, and hopes that it has done no dishonor to its position as the third in age of the literary societies of the United States. It has failed in the original aim, indicated by its name, of serv- ing to promote and develop the cultivation of the arts and sciences in the State of Connecticut in particular. Instead of becoming a real State organization, it has assumed the character of a local one. An association formed between men m t 1io live at a distance from each other may be able to gather many of them together at an annual meeting, or on some special occasion when topics of interest are to be discussed by those whose opinions are worth hearing. Such is the case with our State Medical and Bar Associations, and those of the clergy of the various denominations. But if meetings are to be held monthly, and always at the same place, they will soon inevitably become meetings of those who reside there, and the proceedings will take a local color. * I. 329. Address by Professor Baldwin. xxxv To this may be attributed in part the failure to complete the Statistical Account of the towns of Connecticut. Comparatively few, outside of New Haven, would interest themselves actively in a work directed and controlled by a handful of New Haven men. On the other hand, the Academy has been a source for the dif- fusion of knowledge throughout all our States, and, we may say, throughout all the world. It has been, more than anything else, the perpetual springhead of the American Journal of Science, and its Memoirs and Transactions have preserved statistics, recorded observations and developed theories, that have been of service wherever science is cultivated and arts pursued. It has not fulfilled all of its founders 1 hopes. But it may have done better. If it has narrowed its field in one direction, it has widened it in another. It does not end the century as it began it. If it did, it would be unworthy of its name. It has changed with the times. New modes of action, new premises of reasoning, new rules of science, have become the property of the world. To these the Academy has sought to conform, and as it stands before the door of the Twentieth Century, and awaits its opening, it may claim to enter as one of the rightful heirs of possessions and possibilities to which it has itself made no unimportant contributions. Child of the eighteenth century, trained at the school of the nineteenth, the Academy now steps forward to a third age, still in the spirit that belongs to perpetual youth. That can be claimed by the corporation formed for the promotion of knowl- edge, alone of all human things. Perpetuity conies to it as the gift of the State : youth as its birthright ; for human knowledge is yet in its infancy, and what we have already accumulated will be seen by each future generation in a different light, bringing to them a new meaning, and asking from them new conclusions. The business corporation, the ecclesiastical corporation, the cor- poration to support this or that particular school of professional practice, may find, as centuries go by, not only its methods but its objects antiquated and outworn. It is the corporation formed to promote all knowledge, to seek truth wherever it may be found, to expose error wherever it may be detected, that endures. SCIENTIFIC THOUGHT IN THE NINETEENTH CENTUKY. It is an interesting fact that the life of our Association is almost coextensive with that nineteenth century of Christian civilization which is now drawing to a close. In intellectual, as in physical phenomena, we are tempted to overestimate the magnitude of near objects and to underestimate that of distant ones ; but science and art tend to advance with accelerated velocity, and we are undoubtedly right in ranking the achievements of our age in science and its applications as far greater than those of any pre- vious century. When our predecessors assembled a hundred years ago to organ- ize this Academy, they could avail themselves of no other means of transportation than those which were in use before the time of Homer. If they were required to traverse distances over land too great for convenient walking, they were carried or drawn by horses. If they had occasion to cross bodies of water, they used oars or sails. We have been brought to our destination to-day by the forces of steam and electricity. The harnessing of these mighty forces for man's use has trans- formed not only the modes of transportation, but also the processes of production of all kinds of commodities. It has wrought a revolu- tion in the whole industrial system. The day of the small work- shop is gone. The day of the great factory is come. Every phase of human life is affected by those arts which have arisen from the applications of science. Comforts and luxuries which a hundred years ago were beyond the reach of the most wealthy, are now available for the use of even the poor. Aniline dyes give to fabrics used for clothing or decoration colors beside which those of the rainbow are pale neutral tints. Sanitary science arrests the massacre of the innocents, and increases the average duration of human life. Anaesthetics and antiseptics take away from surgery its pain and its peril. But, though our Association is an Academy of Arts and Sciences, it has, at least in its later life, devoted itself chiefly to the cultivation of pure science, leaving to other organizations the Address by Professor liiee. xxxvii development of the applications of science. Fitly, then, our thoughts to-day dwell, not upon the vast progress of the useful arts, but upon the progress of pure science. Not the economic and the industrial, but the intellectual history of our century claims our attention. I do not propose, in the few moments allotted to me this after- noon, to give an inventory of the important scientific discoveries of the nineteenth century. The time would not suffice therefor, even were my knowledge of the various sciences sufficiently encyclopaedic to justify me in the attempt. I wish rather to call your attention to a single broad, general aspect of the intellectual history of our age. I wish to remind you in how large a degree those general ideas which make the distinction between the un- scientific and the scientific view of nature have been the work of the nineteenth century. The first of these ideas is the extension of the universe in space. The unscientific mind looks upon the celestial bodies as mere appendages to the earth, relatively of small size, and at no very great distance. The scientific mind beholds the stellar universe stretching away, beyond measured distances whose numerical expression transcends all power of imagination, into immeasur- # able immensities. The second of these ideas is the extension of the universe in time. To the unscientific mind, the universe has no history. Since it began to exist, it has existed substantially in its present condition. Among Christian peoples, until the belief was cor- rected by science, the Hebrew tradition of a creative week six thousand years ago was generally accepted as historic fact. If, on the other hand, unscientific minds, not possessed of any sup- posed revelation in regard to the date of the world's origin, thought of the universe as eternal, that eternity was still con- ceived as an eternity of unhistoric monotony. The scientific mind sees in the present condition of the universe the monuments of a long history of progress. The third of these ideas is the unity of the universe. To the unscientific mind the universe is a chaos. To the scientific mind it becomes a cosmos. To the unscientific mind, the processes of nature seem to be the result of forces mutually independent and often discordant. Polytheism in religion is the natural counter- xxxviii Centennial Anniversary part of the unscientific view of the universe. To the scientific mind, the boundless complexity of the universe is dominated by a supreme unity. One system of law, intelligible, formulable, per- vades the universe, through all its measureless extension in space and time. The student of science may he theist or pantheist, atheist or agnostic ; polytheist he can never be. What, then, let us ask ourselves, has been the contribution of our century to the development of these three ideas, which char- acterize the scientific view of nature : — the spatial extension of the universe, the historic extension of the universe, and the unity of the universe. The development of the idea of the extension of the universe in space belongs mainly to earlier times than ours. The Greek geometers acquired approximately correct notions of the size of the earth and the distance of the moon. The Coperuican astron- omy in the sixteenth century shifted the center of the solar system from the earth to the sun, and placed in truer perspective our view of the celestial spheres. But, though astronomy, the oldest of the sisterhood of the sciences, attained a somewhat mature devel- opment centuries ago, it has in our own century thrown new light upon the subject of the vastness of the universe. The discovery of Neptune has greatly increased the area of the solar system ; the measurement of the parallax of a few of the brightest and presumably the nearest of the stars has rendered far more definite our knowledge of the magnitude of the stellar universe ; and tele- scopes of higher magnifying power than had been used before have resolved many clusters of small and distant stars. If the development of the idea of the spatial extension of the universe belongs mainly to an earlier period, the idea of its his- toric extension belongs mainly to our century. It is true, indeed, that Pythagoras and others of the ancient philosophers did not fail to recognize indications of change in the surface of the earth. And, in the beginning of the Renaissance, we find Leonardo da Vinci and others insisting that the fossils discovered in excava- tions in the stratified rocks were proof of the former existence of a sea teeming with marine life, where cultivated lands and popu- lous cities had taken its place. Hutton's " Theory of the Earth." which in an important sense marks the beginning of modern geological theorizing, appeared in the Edinburgh Philosophical Address by Professor Rice. xxxix Transactions in 1788, but was not published as a separate work till seven years later. Not till 1815 was published William Smith's Geological Map of England, the first example of system- atic stratigraphic work extended over any large area of country. To the beginning of our century belong also the classical and epoch-making researches of Cuvier upon the fossil fauna of the Paris basin. By far the larger part, therefore, of the develop- ment of geologic science, with its far-reaching revelations of con- tinental emergence and submergence, mountain growth and decay, and evolution and extinction of successive faunas and floras, belongs to the nineteenth century. Far on into our century extended the conflict with theological conservatism, in -which the elder Silliman, James L. Kingsley, and others of the early members of our Academy bore an honorable part, and which ended in the recognition, by the general public as well as by the select circle of scientific students, of an antiquity of the earth far transcending the limits allowed by venerable tradition. To our century also belongs chiefly the development in astron- omy of the idea of the history of the solar system. It is, indeed, true that, in the conception of the nebular hypothesis, Laplace, whose " Theorie de la Monde " was published in 1796, was pre- ceded by Kant and Swedenborg ; but the credit of a discovery belongs not so much to the first conception of an idea as to its development into a thoroughly scientific theory. Our century, moreover, has added to those evidences of the nebular theory which Laplace derived from the analogies of movement in the solar sys- tem, the evidence furnished by the spectroscope, which finds in the nebulae matter in some such condition as that from which the solar system is supposed to have been evolved. But by far the most important contribution of this century to the intellectual life of man is the share which it has had in devel- oping the idea of the unity of nature. The greatest step prior to this century in the development of that idea (and probably the most important single discovery in the whole history of science) was Newton's discovery of universal gravitation two hundred years ago ; but the investigations of our century have revealed, with a fullness not dreamed of before, a threefold unity in nature — a unity of substance, a unity of force, and a unity of process. Spectrum analysis has taught us somewhat of the chemical con- stitution, not only of the sun, but also of the distant stars and xl Centennial Anniversary nebulae; and has thus revealed a substantial identity of chemical constitution throughout the universe. Profoundly interesting, from this point of view, is the recent discovery, in urauinite and some other minerals, of the element helium, previously known only by its line in the spectrum of the sun. Profoundly interest- ing will be, if confirmed by further researches, the still more recent alleged discovery of terrestrial coronium. The doctrine of the conservation of energy formulates a unity of force in all physical processes. In this case, as in others, pro- phetic glimpses of the truth came to gifted minds in earlier times. Lord Bacon declared heat to be a species of motion. And Huy- ghens, in the seventeenth century, distinctly formulated the theory of light as an undulation, though the mighty influence of Newton maintained the emission theory in general acceptance for a century and a half. When Lavoisier exploded the phlogiston theory, and laid the foundation of modern chemical philosophy, it was seen that, in every chemical change, there is a complete equation of matter. But there was in the phlogiston theory a distorted representation of a truth which the chemical theory of Lavoisier and his succes- sors ignored. Thev could o-ive no account of the light and heat and electricity so generally associated with chemical transforma- tions. These "imponderable agents," as they were called, believed to' be material, yet so tenuous as to be destitute of weight, haunted like ghosts the workshop of the artisan and the laboratory of the scientist, wonderfully important in their effects, but utterly unintelligible in their nature. It was almost exactly at the beginning of our century that the researches of Rumford discovered the first words of the spell by which these ghosts were destined to be laid. When Rumford declared, in his interpreta- tion of his experiments, " Anything which any insulated body or system of bodies can continue to furnish without limitation, can- not possibly be a material substance," the fate of the supposed imponderable body, caloric, was sealed; but it was not till near the middle of our century that Joule completed the work of Rum- ford by the determination of the mechanical equivalent of heat. About the same time, Foucault's measurement of the velocity of light in air and in water afforded conclusive proof of the modula- tory theory of light. In these great discoveries was laid the Address by Professor Rice. xli strong foundation for the magnificent generalization of the con- servation of energy — a generalization which the sagacious intuition of Mayer and Carpenter and Le Conte at once extended beyond the realm of inorganic nature to the more subtile processes of vegetable and animal life. In this connection, I may be per- mitted to refer, to the work of some of my colleagues, with the At water-Rosa calorimeter, which has given more complete experi- mental proof than had previously been given of the conservation of energy in the human body. But by far the greatest of the intellectual achievements of our age has been the development of the idea of the unity of process pervading the whole history of nature. The word which sums up in itself the expression of the most characteristic and fruitful intellectual life of our age is the word evolution. The latter half of our century has been so dominated by that idea in all its think- ing, that it may well be named the Age of Evolution. We may give as the date of the beginning of the new epoch the year 1858; and the Wittenberg theses of the intellectual reformation of our time were the twin papers of Darwin and Wallace, wherein was promulgated the theory of natural selection. And yet, of course, the idea of evolution was not new, when these papers were presented to the Linnsean Society. Consciously or unconsciously, the aim of science at all times must have been to bring events that seemed isolated into a continuous develop- ment. To exclude the idea of evolution from any class of phe- nomena is to exclude that class of phenomena from the realm of science. In the former half of our century, evolutionary concep- tions of the history of inorganic nature had become pretty well established. The nebular hypothesis was obviously a theory of planetary evolution. The Lyellian geology, which took the place of the catastrophism of the last century, was the conception of evolution applied to the physical history of the earth. Nor had there been wanting anticipations of evolution within the realm of biology. The author of that sublime Hebrew psalm of creation, preserved to us as the first chapter of Genesis, was in his way a good deal of an evolutionist. "Let the earth bring forth,"— "let the waters bring forth," — are words that point to a process of growth rather than to a process of manufacture in the origination of living beings. In crude and vague forms, the idea xlii Centennial Anniversary of evolution was held by some of the Greek philosophers. Just at the beginning of our century Lamarck developed the idea of evolution into something like a scientific theory. Yet it is no less true that the epoch of evolution in human thought began with Darwin. Manifold suggestions there were of genetic relationships between different organisms, whether organic forms were studied by the systematist or the embryologist, the geographer or the paleontologist ; but each and all found the path to any credible theory of organic evolution blocked by the stub- born fact that variations in species appeared everywhere to be limited in degree, and to oscillate about a central average type, instead of becoming cumulative from generation to generation. In the Darwinian principle of natural selection, for the first time, was suggested a force, whose existence in nature could not be doubted, and whose tendency, conservative in stable environ- ment, progressive in changing environment, would account at once for the permanence of species through long ages, and for epochs of relatively rapid change. However Darwin's work may be discredited by the exaggerations of Weismannism, however it may be minified by Keo-Lamarckians, it is the theory of natural selection which has so nearly removed the barrier in the path of evolution, impassable before, as to lead, first the scientific world, and later the world of thought in general, to a substantially unani- mous belief in the derivative origin of species. Certain it is that no discovery since Newton's discovery of universal gravitation has produced so profound an effect upon the intellectual life of man- kind. The tombs of !Newtou and Darwin lie close together in England's Yalhalla, and together their names must stand as the two great epoch-making names in the history of science. Darwin's discovery relates primarily to the origin of species by descent with modification from preexisting species. It throws no direct light upon the question of the origin of life. But analogy is a guide that we may reasonably follow in our thinking, provided only we bear in mind that she is a treacherous guide and some- times leads astray. Conclusions that rest only on analogy must be held tentatively and not dogmatically. Yet it would be an unreasonable excess of caution that would refuse to recognize the direction in which analogy points. When we trace a continuous evolution from the nebula to the dawn of life, and again a con- Address by Professor Rice. xliii tinucus evolution from the dawn of life to the varied flora and fauna of to-day, crowned with glory by the appearance of man himself, we can hardly fail to accept the suggestion that the tran- sition from the lifeless to the living was itself a process of evolu- tion. Though the supposed instances of spontaneous generation all resolve themselves into errors of experimentation, though the power of chemical synthesis, in spite of the vast progress it has made, stops far short of the complexity of protoplasm, though we must confess ourselves unable to imagine any hypothesis for the origin of that complex apparatus which the microscope is reveal- ing to us in the infinitesimal laboratory of the cell, are we not compelled to believe that the law of continuity has not been broken, and that at least a reasonable hypothesis as to the method of natural transition from the lifeless to the living may yet be within reach of human discovery ? Still further. Are we content to believe that evolution began with the nebula? Are we satisfied to assume our chemical atoms as an ultimate and inexplicable fact? Herschel and Maxwell, indeed, have reasoned, from the supposed absolute likeness of atoms of any particular element, that they bear " the stamp of a manufactured article," and must therefore be supposed to have been specially created at some definite epoch of beginning. But, when we are speaking of things of which we know so little as we know of atoms, there is logically a boundless difference between saying that we know no difference between the atoms of hydrogen and saying that we know there is no difference. Is it not legiti- mate for us to recognize here again the direction in which analogy points, and to ask whether those fundamental units of physical nature, the atoms themselves, may not be products of evolution ? Thus analogy suggests to us the question, whether there is any beginning of the series of evolutionary changes which we see stretching backward into the remote past ; whether the nebulas from which systems have been evolved were not them- selves evolved ; whether existing forms of matter were not evolved from other forms that we know not ; whether creative Power and creative Intelligence have not been eternally immanent in an eternal universe. I cannot help thinking that theology may fitly welcome such a suggestion, as relieving it from the incon- gruous notion of a benevolent Deity spending an eternity in soli- xliv Centennial Anniversary tude and idleness. The contemplation of his own attributes might seem a fitting employment for a Hindoo Brahm. It hardly fits the character of the Heavenly Father, of whom we are told that he " worketh hitherto." In the last suggestion I have ventured outside the realm of science. But most men are not so constituted that they can carry their scientific and their philosophical and religious beliefs in com- partments separated by thought-proof bulkheads. Scientific and philosophic and religious thought, in the individual and in the race, must act and react upon each other. It was,therefore, inev- itable, that our century of scientific progress should disturb the religious beliefs of men. When conceptions of the cosmos, with which religious beliefs had been associated, were rudely shattered, it was inevitable that those religious beliefs themselves should seem to be imperilled. And so, in the early years of the century, it was said, u If the world is more than six thousand years old, the Bible is a fraud, and the Christian religion a dream." And later, it was said, " If physical and vital forces are correlated with each other, there is no soul, no distinction of right and wrong, and no immortality." And again it was said, " If species originate by evolu- tion, and not by special creation, there is no God." So it had been said centuries before, " If the earth revolves around the sun, Chris- tian faith must be abandoned as a superstition." But in the nine- teenth century, as in the sixteenth, the scientific conclusions won their way to universal acceptance, and Christian faith survived. It showed a plasticity which enabled it to adapt itself to the changing environment. The magically inerrant Bible may be abandoned, and leave intact the faith of the church in a divine revelation. The correlation of forces acting in the human cere- brum with those of inorganic nature may be freely admitted ; and yet we may hold that there are in the universe other forms of causation than physical energy, and that the inexpugnable belief of moral responsibility is more valid than the strongest induction. The u carpenter God" of the older natural theology may vanish from a universe which we have come to regard as a growth and not a building; but there remains the immanent Intelligence " Whose dwelling is the light of setting suns, And the round ocean, and the living air, And the blue sky, and in the mind of man ; " — the God in whom " we live and move and have our being." Address by Professor Rice. xlv The church has learned wisdom. The persecution of Galileo is not likely to be repeated, nor even the milder forms of persecution which assailed the geologists at the beginning, and the evolutionists in the middle, of our century. And science, too, has learned something. In all its wealth of discovery, it recognizes more clearly than ever before the fathomless abysses of the unknown and unknowable. It stands with unsandaled feet in the presence of mysteries that transcend human thought. Religion never so tolerant. Science never so reverent. Nearer than ever before seems the time when all souls that are loyal to truth and goodness shall find fellowship in freedom of faith and in service of love. William North Rice. d THE DEBT OF THIS CENTURY TO LEARNED SOCIETIES. Address by Professor William H. Brewer, President of the Academy. In meeting together to rejoice over the completion of a hun- dred years' work, it is fitting that we should consider what the character of that work has been and what its relations are to the century's progress. In the few minutes allotted me, anv detailed history of the origin of learned societies will be impossible. I wish, therefore, to speak more particularly of the role they have played during the one hundred years of this Academy's existence, and I think it will be found that, in this period, they have been, directly or indirectly, a most potent factor of progress in material advance- ment and in intellectual culture. Their influence has probably been even greater than that of the universities, in that they have dealt with adult men rather than with youth; for it is from men in mature life that the impulse comes which demands and promotes progress. When the Connecticut Academy was founded, the terms " learned," " learned societies," and " intellectual culture," were broad and comprehensive in theory, but in active use they were curiously restricted. There were then but three " learned " pro- fessions, — law, medicine, and theology. The universities recog- nized a fourth comprehensive department, — philosophy. But since that date, and chiefly during the last thirty or forty years, the world has acknowledged many other professions as learned. In my own college days, I can not remember of ever hearing the term " professional " engineer, or " professional " chemist, except as applied to the teachers of engineering or of chemistry in tech- nical schools, colleges, or universities. I had never then heard the term " professional engineer " applied to a person whose voca- tion was that of planning or of carrying out engineering works, nor to the chemist employed in the manufacture of commercial products. . Address by Professor Brewer. xlvii All this now is changed, and the public understanding as to what "learning" signifies is very different. The civil engineer, designing and building great structures ; the mechanical engineer, employing abstruse mathematics in economizing the energies used in steam engines, electric motors, or water wheels ; the chemist, conducting great metallurgical works or manufacturing commer- cial products : each is recognized as belonging to a learned profes- sion as truly as is the village lawyer, the parish clergyman, or the country doctor. So, too, the societies of engineers, chemical and other similar associations, are recognized as learned societies as truly as those which are more especially devoted to history, litera- ture, pure science, medicine, or philosophy. But no line of separation can be drawn between those societies honored with the term "learned," organized for the promotion of intellectual culture, and those designed purely for material or economic objects. Nor does the precise name indicate the infel- lectual status. Under various designations, — academies, societies, associations, and clubs, they range through every grade. Very few of the existing academies and learned societies of the world were founded before 1750. But between the middle and the end of the eighteenth century, the great social and industrial revolutions first allowed and then promoted the establishment of many such organizations. Some of these, although relating more particularly to the industries, may in a sense be classed as learned, since the promotion of science for its practical use in the arts of life can not be separated from its promotion for purely scientific investigation or mental culture. In this country but two " learned societies" had been founded prior to the establishment of the Connecticut Academy, and when the last century closed these were too young to have had much influence. Before our Revolutionary War, the American Philo- sophical Society of Philadelphia was the only strictly learned societv as then understood, but there were also a few local medi- cal associations. Zoology and botany may be said to have been established by Linnaeus about 1750 or a little later. Geology and chemistry had their true beginning during the last quarter of the same century. There were, of course, a science and a literature of botany long before, as there was likewise a so-called science of xlviii Centennial Anniversary chemistry and geology, but these were not founded on natural laws in the sense in which these sciences are now understood. The practical application of the natural sciences to the arts and industries began with the development of the sciences themselves, and the two went on together, so closely associated that they were never independent of each other. They were parallel and corre- lated. This was more especially felt as chemistry and geology progressed. Their applications were so important and varied, and the possible effects so far-reaching, that learned men began to take means to disseminate the knowledge gained and to make it available. While investigators in pure science thus labored directly to increase the sum of human knowledge, and indirectly to increase man's intellectual pleasure by contemplation of the phenomena of nature, the practical applications of science fur- nished the proper stimulus. "Hence, the dawning of the light of modern science inaugurated a new era in the arts and industries. Agriculture and manufac- tures form the foundation of civilization. Cultured nations subsist on the products of the soil ; and without manufactures, particu- larly of the metals, there can be no considerable wealth. As arts, these industries had been developing from pre-historic times, but as mere arts unaided by science, they furnished little hope for advance in higher development. As populations became denser, and the soil was longer tilled, new problems arose which art alone could not solve. There was and could be no science of metal- lurgy or of agriculture until there was a science of chemistry; and other industrial arts had scarcely advanced for thousands of years. As soon as chemistry and geology began to assume the dignity of exact sciences, their aid was, therefore, immediately invoked in various arts and industries. But it was agriculture that made the strongest demands for assistance. Consequently, before the close of the last century, agricultural societies were established in nearly every country of Europe, and in America as well. " The Philadelphia Society for the Promotion of Agriculture" was instituted in February, 1785, less than two years after the achievement of our national independence. A similar society was formed in Charleston, South Carolina, in August of the same year; another in Xew York, in February, 1791, one in Address by Professor Brewer. xlix Massachusetts, in March, 1792 ; and in Connecticut, in August, 1794. The New York society was organized " for the promotion of Agriculture, Arts and Manufactures ;" the others specified agriculture only. " The Connecticut Society for the Promotion of Agriculture " was founded three and a half years before this Academy, and for many years some of its leading members were the same men who were prominent in the Academy. The material interest involved was so vast, that a few states attempted to carry on agricultural schools. Finally, in 1862, the United States Congress appropriated land for the establishment of schools of science in every state in the Union ; and the organi- zation of Agricultural Experiment Stations soon followed. That all this might have been accomplished in time, without the stim- ulus of " societies," is possible. It is probable, however, that, but for them, there would have been no such rapid spread of instruction in science and its applications. We must bear in mind that in 1799 there was very little, if indeed any, natural science taught in the colleges and universities of this country. One or two professors of chemistry were appointed in the very last years of the last century, and a few more in the first decade of this. Instruction in geology came in somewhat later, but for forty years or more after the foundation of this Academy, in only half a dozen of the numerous colleges of the country was anything more than the merest rudiments of chemistry and geology taught, and nothing whatever of natural history except a little botany, which was also taught in some of the medical schools. During this period, a somewhat better condition of things existed in the universities of Europe. There was a continuous appeal from the various industries to the colleges and higher institutions of learning for more instruction in the natural sciences. But from no other source was this appeal more persist- ent and at the same time more effective than from the many socie- ties which had been formed in all these countries for the promo- tion and encouragement of science. Polytechnic schools were started after a fashion about the beginning of this century, but it was not until later that they came into existence as schools of science, to be pursued for its application to the liberal arts. In a number of cases, these 1 Centennial Anniversary schools were actually established by local societies, by extending their work from that of interesting adults to the teaching of youth also. To-day, polytechnic institutions are for "higher educa- tion," and scientific investigation goes on in them as truly and as zealously as in the universities. Among the sciences, chemistry and geology have been much alike in their influence in turning the current of popular attention toward science. They are cultivated for their practical applica- tions more than the other natural sciences, and this has brought them into closer touch with the masses of intelligent men in the industries. So long as chemistry was pursued as a mere art, it was asso- ciated with astrology and magic. While its devotees sought the Philosopher's Stone or the Elixir of Life, the outside public looked on with awe and superstition. When the art of alchemy devel- oped into the science of chemistry, there was a sudden burst of light. The mysterious chemical transformation.-, which before had awakened in the outside world only an awe resulting in superstition, now inspired a new interest, and awe was transmuted into scientific curiosity, a desire to learn what the laws were which controlled the wonderful phenomena. Geology is so extensively an applied science that it receives more government aid than any other science. Geological surveys are established in every civilized country, because of industrial necessities. The first geological surveys, systematically made, of which I have any knowledge, were instigated and carried on under the direction of the early societies; and later, when states took up the work, it was often the case that this action was first stimulated by the local societies. This Academy initiated an early geological survey of Connecticut. The facts which these surveys brought out called into existence special geological socie- ties. The field geologists had to meet in order to unify and sys- tematize their publications, as well as for mutual instruction and encouragement. The meetings of the American Geologists led to the organization of the wider and more general Am< rlcan Asso- ciation for the Advancement of Science. This in turn has reacted on the general public, and diffused the knowledge gained by special investigators. The great truths thus spread have given intellectual pleasure to thousands who do not study geology for its practical applications. Address by Professor Brewer. li The oldest geographical society dates back to 1740, and there were but few, if any, more at the close of that century. In this century they have multiplied enormously. Some of them are general, but the great majority are either local or special in their objects. They have done much to extend and disseminate geo- graphical knowledge, but vastly more in stimulating and cul- tivating a taste for the enjoyment of natural scenery. They followed rather than led the development of the societies for the promotion of geology and natural history, but have had much to do with fostering a love for these sciences in later times. Their most obvious effect on intellectual culture is the part they have played in cultivating a taste for nature, and in changing public sentiment in respect to the appreciation of natural scenery. The contemplation of the beauties of mountains or the sublimity of nature in her grander aspects formed an inconspicuous part of the intellectual pleasures of mankind until lately. Neither in the literature of sacred or profane writers of antiquity, nor in the literature of the middle ages, is there evidence of any such senti- ment as pervades the poetry and literature of the century now closing. No one climbed mountains for the sake of enjoying the grandeur of the view, nor visited them to enjoy their beauties. Mountains were held in awe and fear ; they . were the abode of dragons and demons ; they must sometimes be crossed because of necessity, but were never visited for the sake of pleasurable con- templation until scientists led the way. Before the last quarter of the last century, there are two or three records of persons visiting the Alps to see the wonderful glaciers ; but to the world at large the Alps were dreary, desolate, awful. There are many allusions in literature to this fact. As soon as the various branches of natural history began to develop as sciences, mountainous countries became most interest- ing fields for investigation, and began to be visited by scientific men, particularly those interested in geology, botany, and zoology. In 1760, that eminent scientist and lover of nature, de Saussure of Geneva, visited the valley of Chamounix, and the next year he advertised throughout the region that he would liberally reward any one who could discover a practical way to reach the top of the " Great White Mountain." Further, should the attempts be unsuccessful he would pay for the time lost in seeking a way. lii Centennial Anniversary Men crossed the mountains for business, and there were hardy guides well acquainted with the country, but they visited passes, not peaks. And not till more than a quarter of a century later did the guide Balmat succeed in finding a path to the top. The very next year (1787), de Saussure made his famous ascent, the first in history when any high mountain was climbed for scientific observation. There was a second ascent the following year, but no other till 1802. During the twenty-five years after de Saussure, there were less than half a dozen ascents; but no attempts whatever, that I am aware of, were made to climb any other high peaks. About 1810 were begun by Agassiz and Forbes those researches on glaciers, classic in the annals of science. When these pioneers had successfully frightened away the demons and devils that had so long guarded the mountain mys- teries and veiled their beauties, the general public, learned and unlearned people alike, began to find pleasure in the contempla- tion of the wild and the grand, and this sentiment now finds abundant expression in poetry, song, literature, and art. The exploration of mountains for scientific investigation has resulted in enormous gain to mankind in intellectual and aesthetic pleasure. There is to-day scarcely a mountain range in any country of our civilization but has a society or club of devotees organized for its study. As learned societies, they have greatly promoted our geographical knowledge ; incidentally they have contributed in large measure to the amount of pleasure to be derived from travel and from the better appreciation of the beauties of nature. Switzerland, which had been shunned for two thousand years because of its dreary mountains, has now, because of those same mountains, become the playground of Europe, and mountain climbing, about which so many tales of terror were formerly told, has now become a pastime and a sport. Railways carry the strong and the weak alike to peaks high in the clouds. The publications of learned societies, under various names and in various ways, furnish by far the most comprehensive literature of science, philosophy, history, and art, that we have. For a time, this was almost the only way of publishing to the world new discoveries. To-day it is as pervasive as it is extensive, and as yet no substitute has been found for this means of publishing and dis- Address by Professor Brewer. liii geminating the details by which results have been obtained, even if the bare results might be made available through the periodical press or other channels. These publications are an important part of every public library, but by reason of their enormous extent no library can be complete in them. It is only when we attempt to investigate their number in any branch of science that we can appreciate the great influence such associations must have had in diffusing learning and information among the mass of the people and in making it available for their industries, their com- fort and their intellectual pleasure. Many of the learned societies maintain libraries and museums, and in some cases these libraries furnish almost the only consider- able scientific literature accessible to the community, while the museum gives them further knowledge of other regions of the earth than their own. Finally, learned societies practice and cultivate the brotherhood of mankind as do no other organizations. Science knows no nation nor country ; it is bounded neither by oceans nor continents ; its home can not be located by latitude or longitude ; it knows no race nor people ; it swears special allegiance to no form of gov- ernment ; it is bound by no creed ; it claims no one language. A new fact observed, a new law demonstrated, immediately becomes public property. No matter in what continent or country it originates, or to what nation or creed or race the discoverer belongs, or in what language the new truth is first announced ; the learned societies discuss it, and pass upon it, they aid in dis- seminating it, their publications give it a measure of authority, and through the various channels for the diffusion of knowledge it is sure in time to become the common property of mankind. The function of these organizations will of course be modified in the new century upon which we are approaching, but it is safe to say that they will contribute as greatly to its progress as they have to that of the century now closing. Societies of one kind and another are to-day so numerous, they embrace such a wide range of objects, and there is gathered into them so large a propor- tion of the active men of all the countries of our modern civiliza- tion, that they have come to be the leading and perhaps the most important factor in shaping and directing human activities, both material and intellectual. ADDITIONS TO THE LIBKARY OF THE Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, By Gift and Exchange from Oct. 1, 1899, to Dec. 31, 1902. Albany. — New York Slate Library. Annual report. LXXXI, LXXXII, 1898-99. 8°. Bulletin. Legislation. No. XI-XIV, 1S99-1901. 8°. New York State Museum of Natural History. Annual report. L. 2, LI. 1, 2, LII. 1, 2, 1896-98. 8°. Bulletin. No. 24-39, 41-43, 45, 1899-1901. 8°. University of the Stale of New York. Home education bulletin. No. XXX-XXXVIII, 1899-1901. 8°. American Association for the Advancement of Science. Proceedings. Meeting XLVIII-L, 1899-1901. 8°. Annapolis. — United States Naval Institute. Proceedings. Vol. XXV. 3, 4, XXVI. XXVII, XXVIII. 1-3, 1899-1902. 8°. Baltimore. — Johns Hopkins University. American chemical journal. Vol. XXII. 4-6, XXIII-XXVIII, 1899-1902. 8°. University circulars. No. 142-160, 1899-1902. 4°. Berkeley. — University of California. Publications. Botany. Vol. I. 1, 1902. 8°. Zoology. Vol. I. 1, 1902. 8°. Blue Hill. — Meteorological Observatory. Bulletin. 1900, no. I. 4°. Boston. — American Academy of Arts and Sciences. Proceedings. Vol. XXXV. 4-27, XXXVI, XXXVII, XXXVIII. 1-9, 1898- 1902. 8°. Society of Natural History. Memoirs. Vol. V. 6-8, 1900-02. 4°. Proceedings. Vol. XXIX. 6-18, XXX. 1-7, 1899-1902. 8°. Occasional papers. IV. Vol. I. 3, VI, 1900-01. 8°. Boulder. — University of Colorado. Studies. Vol. I. 1, 1902. 8°. Brooklyn. — Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. Science bulletin. Vol. I. 1, 2, 1902. 8°. Buffalo. — Society of Natural Sciences. Bulletin. Vol. VI. 2-4, VII. 1, 1899-1901. 8°. Cambridge. — Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College. Annals. Vol. XXVIII. 2, XXXII. 2, XXXIII, XXXVII. 1, 2, XXXVIII, XL. 6-9, XLII. 2, XLIII, XLIV. 1, 2, XLV, XLVIII. 1, 2, 1899-1902. 4°. Annual report. LIV-LVII, 1899-1902. 8°. lyi Additions to the Library. Cambridge. — Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College. Memoirs. Vol. XXIII. 2, XXIV, XXV. 1, XXVII. 1, 2, 1899-1902. 4°. Bulletin. Vol. XXXIV, XXXV. 3-8, XXXVI, XXXVII. 1-3, XXXVIII. 1-7, XXXIX. 1-4, XL. 1-3, XLI. 1, 1899-1902. 8°. Annual report. 1899-1900, 1900-01, 1901-02. 8°. Chapel Hill. — Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society. Journal. Vol. XVI, XVII, 1899-1901. 8°. Chicago. — Academy of Sciences. Bulletin. Vol. II, 3-5, 1900-02. 8°. Geographical and Natural History Survey. Bulletin. No. IV. 1, 1900. 8°. Special publication. No. I, 1902. 8°. Entomological Society. Occasional memoirs. Vol. I, 1900. 8°. Field. Columbian Museum. Publications. No. 40-58, 60-68, 1899-1902. 8°. Birds of Eastern North America. Water birds. Pt. I, II. By C. B. Cory. 1899. 4°. John Crerar Library. Annual report. V, VII. List of books in the reading room, Jan. 1900. 8°. List of bibliographies of special subjects, July 1902. 8°. University of Chicago. Journal of geology. Vol. VII. 6-8, VIII-X, 1899-1902. 8°. Cincinnati. — Lloyd Library of Botany, Pharmacy and Materia Medica. Bulletin. Reproduction series. No. 1, 2, 1900-01. 8°. Mycological series. No. 1, 2, 1902. 8°. Museum. Association. Annual report. XIX, XXI, 1899-1901. 8°. Society of Natural History. Journal. Vol. XIX. 5-8, XX. 1, 2, 1900-02. 8°. Colorado Springs. — Colorado College Scientific Society. Colorado College studies. II, IV, V, VII-IX, 1891-1901. 8°. Columbia. — University of Missouri. Studies. Vol. I. 1-4, 1901-02. 8°. Laws Observatory. Bulletin. No. 1, 1902. 4°. Columbus. — Journal of mycology. Vol. VIII. 3, 1902. 8°. Des Moines. — Iowa Academy of Sciences. Proceedings. Vol. VII, 1899. 8°. Iowa Geological Survey. Publications. Vol. XI, 1901. 8°. Granville. — Denison University. Bulletin of the Scientific Laboratories. Vol. XL 9-11, XII. 1-4, 1899- 1902. 8°. Journal of comparative neurology. Vol. IX. 3, 4, X-XII, 1899-1902. 8°. Honolulu. — Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum. Memoirs. Vol. I. 1-4, 1899-1902. 4°. Occasional papers. Vol. I, 1898-1902. 8°. Fauna Hawaiieusis. Vol. I. 1-3, II. 1-5, III. I, 1899-1901. 4°. Indianapolis. — Indiana Academy of Science. Proceedings. 1897. 8°. Ithaca— Journal of physical chemistry. Vol. III. 7-9, IV-VI, 1S99-1902. 8°. Lansing. — Michigan Academy of Science. Report. I, III, 1894-1901. 8°. Additions to the Library. lvii Lawrence. — University of Kansas. Kansas University quarterly. Vol. VIII, A. 4, B. 1 ; IX, A ; X, A ; 1899- 1901. 8°. Science bulletin. Vol. I. 1-9, 1902. 8°. Bulletin of the Department of Entomology. Alfalfa, grasshoppers, bees : their relationship. 1899. 8°. ■ The honey-bee and its food plants, with special reference to alfalfa. 1899. 8°. Madison. — Washburn Observatory. Publications. Vol. X. 2, XI, 1901-02. 8°. Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters. Transactions. Vol. XII. 2, XIII. 1, 1899-1901. 8°. Wisconsin Geological and Natural History Survey. Bulletin. No. 1-6, 7, pt. 1, 1898-1901. Milwaukee. — Public Museum. Annual report. XVII-XX, 1898-1902. 8°. Wisconsin Natural History Society. Bulletin. N. S. Vol. I, II. 1-3, 1900-1902. 8°. Minneapolis. — Minnesota Geological and Natural History Survey. Annual report. XXIV, 1895-9S. 8°. Geology of Minnesota. Final report. Vol. I V-VI, 1899-1901. 4°. Missoula. — University of Montana. Bulletin. Biological series. No. 1, 1901. 8°. Mt. Hamilton. — Lick Observatory. Publications. Vol. IV, V, 1900-01. 4°. New York. — Academy of Scie?ices. Annals. Vol. XII, XIII, XIV. 1, 2, 1899-1901. 8°. Memoirs. Vol. II. 1-3, 1899-1901. 4°. American Geographical Society. Bulletin. Vol. XXXI. 4, 5, XXXII-XXXIV, 1899-1902. 8°. American Museum of Natural History. Bulletin. Vol. XI. 2-4, XII-XIV, XVI, XVII. 1, 2, XVIII. 1, 1899-1902. 8°. Annual report. 1899-1900. 8°. Memoirs. Vol. I. 4-7, II. 4-6, III. 1, IV. 1, 2, 1900-01. 4°. Botanical Garden. Bulletin. No. 1-7, 1896-1902. 8°. Entomological Society. Journal. Vol. VIII. 1, 3, 4, IX, X. 1, 1900-02. 8°. Linnaean Society. Abstract of proceedings. 1898-1902. 8°. Public Library. Bulletin. Vol. III-VI, 1899-1902. 8°. Scientific Alliance. Annual directory. IX, X, 1899-1901. 8°. Oberlin. — Oberlin College. Laboratory bulletin. No. 10-12, 1900-1902. 8°. Wilson Ornithological Chapter of the Agassiz Association. Wilson bulletin. No. 28, 29, 38, 40, 1899-1902. 8°. Philadelphia. — Academy of Natural Sciences. Journal. Vol. XL 3, 4, XII. 1, 1900-02. 4°. ' — American Entomological Society. Transactions. Vol. XXVI. 2-4, XXVII, XXVIII. 1, 2, 1899-1902. 8°. Franklin Institute. Journal. Vol. CXLVIII. 4-6, CXLIX-CLIV, 1899-1902. 8°. lviii Additions to the Library. Philadelphia. — University of Pennsylvania. Contributions from the Botanical Laboratory. Vol. II. 1, 1898. 8°. Wagner Fire Institute. Transactions. Vol. III. 4, IV-VI, 1898-91). 8°. Pittsburgh. — (Jarnegie Museum. Publications. No. VI, VII, 1900. 8°. Celebration of founder's day. IV, V, 1899-1900. 8°. Portland, Me. — Society of Natural History. Proceedings. Vol. II. 5, 1901. 8°. Providence. — Brown University. Contributions from the Anatomical Laboratory. I, II, 1898-1901. S°. Rochester. — Academy of Science. Proceedings. Vol. III. 2, IV. 1, 1900-01. 8°. St. Louis. — Academy of Science. Transactions. Vol. IX. 5-9, X, XI, XII. 1-7, 1S99-1902. 8°. Missouri Botan ical Garden. Annual report. XI-XIII, 1901-02. 8°. Salem. — Essex Institute. Annual report. 1899-1902. 8°. San Francisco. — California Academy of Sciences. Occasional papers. VII, VIII, 1900-1901. 8°. Proceedings. Ser. III. Math.-phys., Vol. I. 5-7; Geology, Vol. I. 7-11, II. 1; Botany, Vol. I. 10, II. 1-10; Zoology, Vol. II. 1-11, III. 1-4; 1899-1902. 8°. California State Mining Bureau. Bulletin. No. XIII, XIV, XVI, 1897-99. 8°. Topeka. — Kansas Academy of Science. Transactions. Vol. XVII, 1899-1900. 8°. Tufts College. Studies. VI, VII, 1900-1902. 8°. Urbana. — Illinois State Laboratory of Natural History. Bulletin. Vol. V. 7-12, VI. 1, 1899-1901. 8°. Washington. — Biological Society. Proceedings. Vol. XIII, pp. 61-200, 1900. 8°. Philosophical Society. Bulletin. Vol. VIII, XII, XIII, XIV, pp. 1-204, 1S85-1902. 8°. United States Department of Agriculture Bureau of Plant Industry. Bulletin. No. IX, XII, XV, 1902. 8°. Division of Agrostology. Bulletin. No. XXII, XXIV, 1900. 8°. Library bulletin. No. XXXVII, XXXIX-XLIV, 1901-2. 8°. Weather Bureau. Report. 1899-1902. 4°. Bulletin. No. XXVIII, XXX-XXXII, XXXV, 1S99-1902. United States Geological Survey. Annual report. XIX, pt. 2, 3, 5, XX, pt 1-7, XXI, pt. 1-7, 1898-1900. 8°. Bulletin. No. 157-204, 1899-1902. 8°. Geological atlas of the United States. Fol. 49-71, 1898-1901. Monographs. Vol. XXXIX-XLI, 1900-02. 4°. Mineral resources of the United States. 1900, 1901. 8°. Map of Alaska, showing gold-bearing rocks. 1898. 8°. Preliminary report on the Cape Nome gold region, Alaska. 1900. 8°. Reconnaissances in the Cape Nome and Norton Bay regions, Alaska, in 1900. 8°. Geology and mineral resources of a portion of the Copper River district, Alaska. 1901. 8°. Additions to the Library. lix Washington. — United States National Museum. Annual report. 1897-99. 8°. Bulletin, tfo. XXXIX, N-Q, L-LII. 1899-1902. 8°. Proceedings. Vol. XXI-XXIV. 1899-1902. 8°. Special bulletin. American Hydroids. Pt. I. The Plumularidse by C. C. Nutting. 1900. 4°. United States Naval Observatory. Astronomical and meteorological observations. 1891-2. 4°. Report of the superintendent. 1899-1901. 8°. Smithsonian Institution, Bureau of Ethnology. Annual report. XVII. 1, 2, XVIII. 1, 2, XIX. 1, 2, 1895-98. 8°. Wilkes-Barre. — Wyoming Historical and Geological Society. Proceedings and collections. Vol. IV. 2, V-VII, 1899-1902. 8°. Worcester. — American Antiquarian Society. Proceedings. New series. Vol. XIII. 1, 2, XIV, XV. 1, 1899-1902. 8°. Amiens. — Sociele Linneenne du Nord de la France. Bulletin. No. 293-332, 1897-1900. 8°. Memoires. Tome X, 1899-1902. 8°. Amsterdam. — Kon. Akademie van Wetenscfiappen. Jaarboek. 1898-1901. 8°. Verhandelingen. Afdeel. Natuurkunde. Sectie I. Deel IV, VI. 6-7, VII, VIII. 1, 2. Sectie II. Deel VI. 3-8, VII, VIII, IX. 1-2. 1898- 1902. 8°. Verslagen van de gewone vergaderingen van de wis- en natuurkundige afdeeling. Deel VII-X, 1899-1902. S°. Proceedings. Section of sciences. Vol. I-IV, 1899-1902. 8°. Antwerpen.— Paedologisch Jaarboek. III-IV, 1902-3. 8°. Augsburg. — Naturhistorischer Vereinfiir Schwaben und Neuburg. Bericht. XXXIV, XXXV, 1900-02. 8°. Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science. Report. 8th meeting, Melbourne, 1901. S°. Auxkrre. — Societe des Sciences Historiques et Naturelles de V Yonne. Bulletin. Tome LII. 1, LIII, LIV, LV. 1, 1899-1901. 8°. Bamberg. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Bericht. XVII, XVIII, 1899-1901. 8°. Basel. — Naturforschende Oesellsch-aft. Verhandlungen. Theil XII. 2, 3, XIII, XIV, 1899-1902. 8°. Namenverzeichniss und Sachregister der Bde. VI-XII, 1875-1900. 8°. Batavia. — Kon. Natuurkundige Vereeniging in Nederlandsch-lndh '■'■. Natuurkundige tijdschrift. Deel LIX-LXI, 1900-02. 8°. Magnetical and Meteorological Observatory. Observations. Vol. XXI-XXIII, 1899-1901. 4°. Regenwaarnemingen in Nederlandsch-Indie. Jaarg. XX-XXII, 1898- 1900. 8°. Bergen. — Museum. Aarbog. 1899-1901, 1902, i. 8°. Account of the Crustacea of Norway. Bv G. O. Sars. Vol. III. 1-10, IV. 1-6, 1899-1902. 8°. Report on Norwegian marine investigations, 1895-97. 4°. Meeresfauna von Bergen. Heft I, 1901. 8°. Berlin.— Kon. Museum fiir Naturkunde. Mitteilungen aus der zoologischen Sammlung. Bd. I, II. 1, 2, 1898-1902. 8°. Bericht. 1899, 1900. 8°. lx Additions to the Library. Berlin. — Kbnigliche Sternwarte. Veroffentlichungen des kon. astronom. Rechen-Instituts. No. 11-20, 1900-02. 8°. Naturae novitates. Jahrg. XXI. 15-24, XXII, XXIII, XXIV, 1899-1902. 8°. Bologna. — R. Accademia delle Scienze delP Islituto di Bologna. Rendiconto. N. S., Vol. II, III, 1897-99. 8°. Bombay. — Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society. Journal. No. LV-LVII, and extra no., 1899-1902. 8°. Government Observatory. Magnetical and meteorological observations. 1897-99. 4°. Bonn. — Nalurhislorischer Verein der preussischen Rheinlande, Westfalens und des Reg.-Bezirks Osnabriick. Verhaudlungen. Jahrg. LVI-LVIII, 1899-1901. 8°. Sitzungsberichte der niederrheinischen Gesellschaft fiir Natur- und Heil- kunde. 1899-1901. 8°. Bordeaux. — Academie Rationale des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts. Actes. Annee LVIII-LXII, 1896-1900. 8°. Societe Linneenne. Actes. Tome LI1I-LVI, 1898-1901. 8°. -Societe des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles. Memoires. 5" ser. Tome V. 6 e se>. Tome I. 1899-1901. 8°. Proces-verbaux. Annee 1898-1901. 8°. Braunschweig. — Botanisches lnstitut des kon. Lyceum Hosianum. Arbeiten. 1, 1901. 4°. Bremen. — Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Abhandlungen. Bd. XVI. 2, 3, XVII. 1, 1899-1901. 8°. Meteorolorjisches Observalorium. Deutsches meteorologisches Jahrbuch. Jahrg. X-XII, 1899-1901. 4°. Breslau.— Schlesische Gesellschaft fiir vaterldndische Cultur. Jahres-Bericht. LXXVI-LXXIX, 1898-1901. 8°. Brisbane.— Queensland Branch of the Royal Geographical Society of Australasia. Proceedings and transactions. Vol. XIV, XV, 1898-1900. 8°. Queensland geographical journal. Vol. XVI, XVII, 1900-02. 8°. Queensland Museum. Annals. No. V, 1900. 8°. Brunn. — Naturforscher Verein. Verhandlungen. Bd. XXXVI-XXXIX, 1897-1900. 8°. Bericht der meteorologischeu Commission. XVI-XIX, 1896-99. S°. Bruxelles.— Academie Royale des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts de Belgiquc. Memoires. Tome LIV. 1-5, 1901-02. 4°. Memoires couronnes et memoires des savants etrangers. Tome LVII, LVIII, LIX. 1, 2, 1899-1901. 4°. Memoires couronnes et autres memoires. Tome LVIII-LX, 1S99-1902. 8°. Bulletins. Classe des sciences. 1899-1901, 1902, no. 1-5. 8°. Annuaire. Annee LXVI-LXVIII, 1900-02. 8°. Societe Entomologique de Belgique. Annales. Tome XLIII-XLV, 1899-1901. 8°. Memoires. VII, VIII, 1900-01. 8°. Societe Royale Beige de Gdographie. Bulletin. Annee XXIII. ?.-6, XXIV, XXV, XXVI. 1-4, 1899-1902. 8°. Table des matieres, vol. 1-25. 1892. 8°. Additions to the Library. lxi Bruxelles. — Societe Royale de Botanique. Bulletin. Tome XXXVII-XXX1X, 1899-1900. 8°. Societe Royale Malacologique de Belgique. Annales. Tome XXXI. 2, XXXII-XXXV, 189S-1900. 8°. Bucarest. — Institut Me'te'orologique de Ronmanie. Annales. Tome XIV, XV, 1898-99. 4°. Buletinul lunar. Anul IX, X, 1900-01. 4°. Lui Stefan C. Hepites. 1901. 4°. Socttte des Sciences. Bulletin. Annee VIII, IX, X. 1-4, 6, XI. 1-4, 1889-1902. 4°. Bupape9T. — Kon. ung. Reich sanstall filr Meteorologie und Erdmagnetismus. Jahrbiicher. Jahrg. XXVIII. 1, XXIX, XXX, 2, 1898-1900. 4°. Publicationen. Bd. II-IV, 1900-01. 4°. Beobachtungen angestellt am Astrophys. und Meteorol. Observatorium in 6-Gyalla. Bd. XVII-XXI. 1894-98. 8°. Buenos Aikes. — Sociedad Cientifica Argentina. Anales. Tomo XLVIII. 3-6, XLIX-LIII, LIV. 1-4, 1899-1902. 8°. Museo Nacional. Anales. Tomo VII, VIII. 1, 1902. 8°. Comunicaciones. Tomo I. 4-10, 1899-1901. 8°. Congreso Cientijico Latino Americano. Primera reunion. Vol. I-IV, 1898-99. 8°. Caen. — Societe Linne'enne de Normandie. Bulletin. 5 e ser. Vol. II-IV, 1898-1900. 8°. Calcutta. — Asiatic Society of Bengal. Journal. Vol. LXVIII-LXX, LXXI, pt. ii. 1, iii. 1, 1899-1902. 8°. Proceedings. 1899, no. 4-11, 1900, 1901, 1902, no. 1-5. 8°. The Kacmirayabdamrta, a Kacmlri grammar, by Icvara-Kaura. Ed. by G. A. Grierson. Pt. I, II, 1897-98. 8°. Dictionary of the Lepcha-language, compiled by the late Gen. G. Main- waring, revised and completed by A. Griinwedel. Berlin, 1898. 8°. Geological Survey of India. Pah«ontologia Iudica. Ser. IX, vol. II. 2. Ser. XV, vol. I. 2,111. 1,2. New ser., vol. I. 1-3. 1899-1901. 4°. Memoirs. Vol. XXVIII. 2, XXIX-XXXI, XXXII. 1, 2, XXXIII. 1, 2, XXXIV. 1, 1899-1902. 8°. General report. Jan. 1897-Apiil 1901. 8°. Manual of the economic geology of India. 2d ed. Pt. I. Corundum. 1898. 8°. Meteorological Department of the Government of India. Indian meteorological memoirs. Vol. VI. 5-7, X. 3, 4, XI. 1-3, XII. 1-4, 1899-1902. f°. Monthly weather review. 1899, May-Dec; 1900 ; 1901 ; 1903, Jan.-June. f°. Rainfall of India. 189S-1900. f°. Report on administration. 1898-1902. f°. Memorandum on the meteorological conditions prevailing in the Indian monsoon region in 1902. By John Murray. Simla, 1902. f°. Cambridge. — Philosophical Society. Transactions. Vol. XVIII, XIX. 1, 2, 1900-02. 4°. Proceedings. Vol. X. 3-7, XI. 1-6, 1899-1902. 8°. List of fellows, associates and honorary members, Jan. 1901. 8°. Catania. — Accademia Gioenia di Scienze Nalurali. Atti. Ser. IV. Vol. XII-XIV, 1899-1901. 4°. Bullettino mensile. Nuova serie. Fasc. 60-73, 1899-1902. 8°. e lxii Additions to the Library. Catania. — Societd degli Spettroscopisti Italiani. Memorie. Vol. XXVIII. 7-12, XXIX, XXX, X X X I. 1-10, 1889-1902. 4°. Chemnitz. — Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Bericht. XIV, 1896-99. 8°. Cherbourg. — Socie'te Natiouale des Sciences Nalurelles. Memoires. Tome XXXI, XXXII, 1898-1902. 8°. Christiania. — Kong. Norske Uulversitet. Norway : official publication for the Paris Exposition. 1900. 8°. Norwegisches meteorologisches In&tltut. Jahrbueh. 1898, 1899. 4°. Norwegian North- Atlantic Expedition, 1876-78. Publication XXV-XXVIII, 1899-1901. 4°. Videnskabs Selskabet. Forhandlinger. 1899-1901. 8°. Chur. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft Graubiindens. Jahresbericht. Neue Folge. Jahrg. XLI-XLV, 1898-1902. 8°. Cordoba. — Academia National de Ciencias. Boletin. Tomo XVI. 2-4, XVII. 1, 1900-02. 8°. Danzig. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Schriftcn. Neue Folge. Bd. X. 1-3, 1899-1901. 8°. Dijon. — Academie des Sciences, Arts et Belles-Lettres. Memoires. 4 e ser. Tome VII, 1899-1900. 8°. Dorpat. — Gelehrte Estnische. Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte. 1898-1900. 8°. Verhandlungen. Bd. XIX, XX, 1898-1900. 8°. Inhalts-Verzeiehniss zu Bd. I-XX. 1900. 8°. Naturforscher- Gesellschaft bei der Universitiit Dorpat. Archiv fur die Naturkunde Liv-, Ehst- und Kurlands. Ser. II. Bd. XII. 1, 1902. 8°. Sitzungsberichte. Bd. XII. 3, 3, 1900-01. 8°. Schriften. X, 1902. 8°. Dresden. — Natwwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft Isis. Sitzungsberichte und Abhandlungen. 1899-i901, 1902, i. 8°. Vereinfur Erdkunde. Jahresbericht. III-V, VIII, IX, XXVII, 1866-1901. 8°. F. von Bellingshausens Forschungsfahrten im Siidlichen Eismeer. Leip- zig, 1902. 8°. Dublin. — Royal Dublin Society. Economic proceedings. Vol. I. 1, 2, 1898-99. 8°. Scientific proceedings. New ser. Vol. IX. 1-4, 1898-1901. 8°. Scientific transactions. Ser. II. Vol. VII. 1-13, 1895-1901. 4°. Index to the scientific proceedings and transactions, 1877-1898. 8°. Royal Irish Academy. Transactions. Vol. XXXI. 8-14, XXXII A. 1, 2, 1900-02. 4°. Proceedings. Ser. III. Vol. V. 3-5, VI. 1, 3, 1899-1901. 8°. Trinity College Observatory. Astronomical observations and researches made at Dunsink. Pt. IX, 1900. 4°. Edinburgh. — Botanical Society. Transactions and proceedings. Vol. XXI. 4, 1900. 8°. Geological Society. Transactions. Vol. VIII. 1, 1901. 8°. Royal Observatory. Annals. Vol. I, 1902. 4°. Additions to the Library. ■ lxiii Edinburgh.— Royal Physical Society. Proceedings. Vol. XIV. 2-4, 1898-1901. 8°. Royal Society. Proceedings. Vol. XXII, 1898-9. 8°. Transactions. Vol. XL, pt. 1, no. 8, 1901. 4°. Emden. — Naturforschende 6esellscha.fi. Jataresbericht. LXXXIII-LXXXVI, 1899-1901. 8°. Erfurt. — Kbn. Akademie gemeinnutziger Wissenschaften. Jahrbucher. Neue Folge. Heft XXV-XXVIII, 1899-1902. 8°. Firenze. — Biblioteca Nazionale Centrale. Bollettino delle pubblicazioni Italiane ricevute per diritto di stampa. No. 329-360; n. s. no. 1-23; 1899-1902. 8°. R. Istituto di Studi Superiorl Pratici e di Perfezionamento. Pubblicazioni. Sezione di filosofia e fllologia. Sabbadini (R.) and Barozzi (L.). Studi sul Panormita e sul Valla. 1896. 8°. Casonova (E.). La carta nautiea di Conte di Ottomano Freducci. 1896. 8°. Marzi (D.). La quistioue della riforma del calendario nel quinto con- cilio Lateranense. 1896. 8°. Coli (E.). 11 paradiso terrestre Dantesco. 1897. 8°. Sezione di scienze fisiche e naturali. Oddi (R.) and Rossi (U.). Sul decorso delle vie afferenti del midollo spinale. 1891. 8°. Ristori(G.). Cheloniani fossili di Montebamboli e Casteani. 1895. 8°. Bottazzi (F.). Sullo sviluppo embrionale della funzione motoria negli organi e cellule muscolari. 1897. 8°. Contributi alia fisiologia del tessuto di cellule muscolari. Parte I-III. 1897. 8°. Sezione di medicina e chirurgia. Inverardi (G.). Rendiconto summario dell' Istituto Ostetrico-Gine- cologico di Firenze. 1892. 8°. Chiarugi (G.). Contribuzioni alio studio dello sviluppo dei nervi encefalici nei mammiferi. Parte I-IV. 1894-97. 8°. Rossi (U.). Sulla struttura dell' ovidutto del Oeotriton fuscus. 1895. 8°. Contributo alio studio della struttura, della maturazione e della distruzione delle uova degli Anfibi. 1895. 8°. Staderini (R.). Osservazioni comparative sullo sviluppo e sui carat- teri definitivi della cavita del quarto ventricolo al suo estremo caudale. 1896. 8°. Trambusti (A.). Ricerche citologiche sul midollo delle ossa nella difterite. 1896. 8°. Lustig (A.). Risultati delle ricerche fatte in India negli animali e nell' uomo intorno alia vaccinazione preventiva contro la peste bubbonica e alia sieroterapia. 1897. 8°. Fkvnkfurt a. M. — Deutsche malakozoologische Gesellschaft. Nachriehtsblatt. Jahrg. XXXI. 9-12, XXXII, XXXIII. 1,2, 5-12, XXXIV. 1-6, 9-12, 1899-1902. 8°. Senckenbergische naturforschende Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen. Bd. XX. 2, 3, XXI. 1-4, XXV. 1-3, XXVI. 1-4, XXVIII, 1897-1902. 4°. Bericht. 1899-1902. 8°. lxiv Additions to the Library. Frankfurt a. O.—Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein des Regierungsbezirks Frankfurt. Helios. Abhandlungen uudmouatliehe Mittheilungen. Jahrg. XVII-XIX, 1900-02. 8°. Soeietatum litterae. Jahrg. XIII, XIV, 1899-1900. 8°. Freiburg in B. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Berichte. Bd. XI. 2, 3, XII, 1900-02. 8°. Geneve. — Instilut National Genevois. Memoires. Tome XVIII, 1893-1900. 4°. Bulletin. Tome XXXV, 1900. 8°. Socie'le de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle. Memoires. Tome XXXIII. 2, XXXIV, 1899-1902. 4°. Genova. — Museo Oivico di Storia Natural;. Annali. Vol. XXXIX, XL, 1898-1901. 8°. Indice generale sistematico, vol. 1-40, 1901. 8°. Giessen. — Oberhessische Gesellschaft fiir Natur- und Heilkunde. Bericht. XXXII, XXXIII, 1897-1902. 8°. Glasgow. — Philosophical Socit ly. Proceedings. Vol. XXX-XXXIII, 1888-1902. 8°. Gorlitz. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen. Bd. XXIII, 1901. 8°. Goteborg. — Kon. Vetenskaps och Vittcrhets Samhtilh . Haudlingar. 4de folj. Haft. II-IV, 1899-1902. S°. Gottingen. — Kon. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Naehrichten. Phil. -hist. Klasse. 1899, ii-iv ; 1900; 1901; 1902, i-iv. 8°. Math.-phys. Klasse. 1893, ii, iii ; 1900; 1901 ; 1902. i-v. 8°. Geschaft, Mittheilungen. 1900; 1901 ; 1902, i. S°. Gustrow. — Verein der Freunde der Naturgeschichte in Mecklenburg. Archiv. Jahrg. LIII. 2, LIV, LV, LVI. 1, 1899-1902. S°. Habana. — Academia de Viencias Medicas, Fisicas y Naturales. Anales. No. 421-425, 1899-1900. 8°. Real Colegio de Belen. Observaciones magneticas y meteorologicas. 1876-80, 1898-1901. 4°. Halifax. — Nova Scotian Institute of Nat und Science. Proceedings and transactions. Vol. X. 1-3, 1899-1901. 8°. Department of Mines, Nova Scotia. Report. 1899-1900. 8°. Halle. — Kais. Leopoldiuisch- Carol inische deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher . Nova acta. Bd. LXXIX. 2, 3, 1901. 4°. Leopoldina. Heft XXX V-X XXVII, 1899-1901. 4°. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen. Bd. XXII, XXIII, 1900-01. 8°. Hamburg. — Deutsche Seewarte. Aus dem Archiv. Jahrg. XXII-XXIV, 1899-1901. 4°. Deutsches meteorologisches Jahrbuch, 1898-1900. 4°. Katalog der Bibliothek. Nachtrag III. 1901. 8°. Natur wissenschaftlicher Verein . Abhandlungen. Bd. XVI, 1900-01. 4°. Verhandlungen. III. Folge. VII-IX, 1899-1901. 8°. Hannover. — Naturhislorische Gesellschaft. Jahresberieht. XLVIII, XLIX, 1897-99. 8°. Harlem. — Muse'e Teyler. Archives. Serie II. Vol. VII. 1-5, VIII. 1-3, 1900-02. S°. Herdenking van het houderdvijftigjarig bestaan, op 7 Juni, 1902. 8°. Additions to the Library. lxv Harlem. — Societe Hollandaise des Sciences. Archives n^erlandaises des sciences exactes et naturelles. 2* se>. Tome IH-VI, VII. 1, 1899-1902. 8°. Le Havre. — Societe Oeologique de Normandie. Bulletin. Tome XVIII, XIX, 1896-1899. 8°. Helsingfors. — Societas Scientiarum Feunica. Acta. Tom. XXIV-XXVII, 1899-1900. 4°. Ofversigt af fdrhandlingar. XL-XLII, 1897-1900. 8°. Bidrag till kiinnedom af Finlands natur och folk. Haft. LVII-LX, 1898-1900. 8°. Hermannstadt. — Siebenbiirgischer Verein fur Naturwissenschaften. Verhandlungen unci Mittkeilungen. Jakrg. XLVII-LI, 1897-1901. 8°. Jassy. — University de Jassy. Annales scientifiques. Tome I. 2, 1900. 8°. Jena. — Medicinisch-naturwissenschaftliche Oesellschaft. Jenaisehe Zeitschrift fur Naturwissensehaft. Bd. XXXIII. 2-4, XXXV, XXXVI, XXXVII. 1, 2, 1899-1902. 8°. Kasan. — Observatoire Magnetique. Observations. Annexe 1894-97. 8°. Observatoire MdtSwologique. Bulletin. 1899-1901, 1902 Jan. -Mai. Societe Physico- Math e mat ique de V Uuiversile Imperiale. Bulletin. 2 e ser. Tome VIII. 4, IX, X, 1899-1901. 8°. Kiel. — Kon. Christian Albrechts-Vhiversitat. Schriften. 1898-99, 1899-1900, 1901-01. 8°. Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fur Schleswig-Hblstein . Schriften. Bd. XI. 2, XII. I, 1899-1901. 8°. Kiev. — Kievskie Obshchestvo Iestestvoispytatelei. Zapiski. Tom. XVI, XVII. 1, 1899-1901. 8°. Kjobenhavn. — Kon. Danske Videnskabemes Selskab. Oversigt over forhandlinger. 1899, iv-vi ; 1900; 1901; 1902, i- Hi. 8°. Naturhistorisk Forening. Videnskabelige meddelser. Aaret 1899-1901. 8°. Konigsberg. — Konigl. physikalischbkonornische Gesellschaft. Schriften. Jahrg. XL-XLII, 1899-1901. 4°. Krakow. — K. k. Sternwarte. Materyaly do klimatografii Galicyi. Rok 1898, 1S99, 1901. 8°. La Plata. — Museo. Revista. Tomo IX, X, 1899-1902. 8°. Anales. Seccion geologica y mineralogica. II, III, 1900-01. f°. Universidad. Facultad de ciencias fisico-matematicas. Publicaciones. No. I, 1901. 8°. Lausanne. — Societe Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletin. 3» ser. No. 132-144, 1899-1902. 8°. Leiden. — Nederlandsehe Dierkundige Vereeniging. Tijdschrift. Ser. II. Deel VI. 2-4, VII, 1S99-1902. 8°. Aauwinsten van die bibliotheek, 1 Aug. 1897—31 Dec. 1898. 8°. Sternwarte. Annaleu. Bd. VIII, 1902. 4°. Verslag. 1896-1900. 8°. Catalogus der bibliotheek. 4de supplement, 1892-1901. 8°. Leipzig.— Kon. Sachische Oesellschaft der Wissensch often. Berichte. Math. phys. Clas&e. Bd. LI, allgem. Th., naturwiss. Th., math. Th. 5, 6, LII, LIII, LIV. 1, 2, 1899-1902. 8°. Ixvi Additions to the Library. Leipzig. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte. Jahrg. XXII-XXV, 1895-98. 8°. Verein fur Erdkunde. Mittheilungen. 1899-1901. 8°. Wissenschaftliche Veroffentlichungen. Bd. IV, V, 1899-1901. 8° and f°. Zoologiseher Anzeiger. No. 597-610, 612-691, 1899-1902. 8°. Lemberg. — Sevcenko- Gesellschaft der Wissensch often. Chronik. 1900, 1901, 1902. i, ii. 8°. Liege. — Societe Royale des Sciences. Memoires. Ser. II. Tome XVIII-XX. Ser. III. Tome l-III. 1895- 1901. 8°. Lima. — Accidentia National de Medecina. Boletin. Afio II. 1, 1900. 8°. Lisboa. — Ministerio de Marinha e Ultramar. Album de estadistica graphica dos caminhos de ferro portuguezes das provincias ultramarinas. 1898. f°. Sociedade de Geograph ia. Boletim. Serie XVI. 12, XVII-XIX, XX. 7-10, 1898-1902. 8°. — Numero commemorativo do 25° annivcrsario da Sociedade. 1891. 8°. Llimas. — Observatorio Belloch. Observaciones meteorologicas. 1902, Enero-Junio. London. — Geological Society. Quarterly journal. Vol. LV. 4, LVI-L VIII, 1899-1901. 8°. Geological literature added to the library, 1898-1901. 8°. Linnean Society. . Journal. Zoology. No. 176-185, 1899-1902. 8°. Journal. Botany. No. 239-245, 1899-1902. 8°. Proceedings. Nov. 1898-June 1902. 8°. List. 1899-1902. 8°. Mathematical Society. Proceedings. No. 673-789, 1899-1902. 8°. —National Physical Laboratory. Report. 1901. 8°. Royal Microscopical Society. Journal. 1899. v, vi, 1900-1902. 8°. Royal Physical Society. Proceedings. Session 1899-1900. 8°. Royal Society. Philosophical transactions. Vol. CLXXXIX B, CXC A, B, CXCI A, B, CXCII A, B, OXCIII A, CXCIV A, 1897-1900. 4°. Proceedings. No. 419-467, 1899-1902. 8°. List of council and fellows. 1898-99. 4°. Year-book. 1902. 8°. Reports to the evolution committee. 1, 1902. 8°. Louvain.— La Cellule. Tome XVI. 2, XVII, XVIII, XIX. 1, 1899-1901. 8°. Lund. — Kongl. Ca.rolinska Universitet. Acta. Tom. XXXV, XXXVI, 1899-1900. 4°. Luxembourg. — Inslitut Royal, Grand-Ducal. Publications. Section des sciences naturelles et mathematiques. Tome XXV, XXVI, 1900-01. 8°. Lyon. — Acadtmie des Sciences, Belhs-Lettrcs et Arts. Mtimoires. Sciences et lettres. 3 e ser. Tome VI, 1901. 8°. Madras. — Government Observatory. Report. 1899-1901. 8°. Results of observations with the meridian circle. Vol. IX, 1899. 4°. Additions to the Library. lxvii Madrid. — Comisidn del Mapa Geologico de Espaiia. Boletin. Tomo XXV, XXVI, 1898-99. 8°. Explicacion del mapa geologico de Espafla. Por L. Mallada. Tomo IV, 1902. 8°. Observatorio. Observaciones metcorologicas. 1898-99. 8°. Manchester. — Literary and Philosophical Society. Memoirs and proceedings. Series IV. Vol. XLIII. 4, 5, XLIV-XLVI, XLVII, 1. 1899-1903. 8° Marburg. — Oesellschaft zur Beforderung der gesammlcn Natarwissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte. Jahrg. 1898-1901. 8°. Metz. — Acadimie. Memoires. 3« ser. Amide XXVI-XXVIII, 189(5-99. 8°. Mexico. — Asociacion de Ingenieros y Arquitectos. Anales. Tomo VIII, IX, 1899-19u0. 8°. Instiluto Geologico de Mexico. Boletin No. XII-XV, 1899-1901. 4°. Institute Medico Nacional. Anales. Tomo IV. 2-17, V. 1-5, 1899-1902. 4°. Datos para la materia medica Mexicana. Parte III. 1900. 8°. Observatorio Meteorologico Central. Boletin mensual. 1899, no. 5-12, 1900, 1901, no. 1-10. 4°. EI clima de la Repiiblica Mexicana en 1896. 16°. Iuforme sobre el eclipse total del sol de 28 Mayo de 1900. 2 v. 8°. Informes presentados a la Secretaria de Fomento, 1899-1901. 8°. Sociedad Cientiftca " Antonio Ahate." Memorias y revista. Tomo XII. 11, 12, XIII. 1-4, XIV-XVII, 1899-1902. 8°. Sociedad Mexicana de Historia Natural. La naturaleza. Ser. II. Tomo III. 3, 4, 1S99. 4°. Middelburg. — Zeeuwsch Genootschap der Wetenscliappen. Archief. Deel VIII, 1899-1901. 8°. Levensberichten van Zeeuwsche medici. Door A. A. Fokker en J. C. DeMan. 1900. 8°. Milano. — Real Istituto Lombardo di Scienze e Lettere. Rendiconto. Serie II. Vol. XXXII- XXXIV, 1899-1901. 8°. Reale Ossei-vatorio di Brer a. Pubblicazioni. XXXIX, XL. 3, XLI, 1899-1901. 4°. Riassunto delle osservazioni meteorologiche. 1899-1901. 4°. Societd Ilaliana di Scienze Naturali. Atti. Vol. XXXVII. 3, 4, XXXVIII-XL, XLI. 1-3, 1898-1902. 8°. Memorie. Tomo VI. 3, 1901. 4°. Modena. — Regia Accademia delle Scienze, Lettere ed Arti. Memorie. Serie III. Tomo I, II, 1898-1900. 4°. Societd dei Naturalisti. Memorie. Serie III. Vol. XVI. 3. Ser. IV. Tomo I, II. 1899-1901. 8°. Mont Blanc. — Observatoire Meteorologique. Annales. Tome IV, V, 1900-01. 4°. Montevideo. — Museo Nacional. Anales. Entrega XII-XXII. Tomo IV. 1. 1899-1902. 4°. Observatorio Meteorologico del Colegio Pio de Villa Colon. Boletin mensual. Aiio XI. 8-12, XII, XIII, 1899-1901. 4°. El aiio meterologico 1898-99, 1899-1900, 1900-01. lxviii Additions to the Library. Montpellier. — Academie des Sciences et Lettres. Memoires. Section des lettres. Ser. II. Tome H. 3, 8, III. IV. 1, 1899- 1900. 8°. Section des sciences. Ser. II. Tome II. 5-7, III. 1, 2, 1898-1902. 8°. Section de meMecine. Ser. II. Tome I. 2-4, 1898-1900. 4°. Catalogue de la bibliotheque. l r,r partie. 1901. 8 C . Montreal. — Natural History Society. Canadian record of science. Vol. II. 7, 8,111-VII, VIII. 1-7, 1887-1901. 8°. Moscou. — Obsc rvatoire Mete'orologiqxe de V University Impe'riale. Observations. 1899, 1900, 1901, Jan., Feb. Societe Imperiale des Naturalises. Bulletin. Annee 1898. ii-iv, 1899, 1900, 1901. i, ii, 1902. 1,2. 8°. Ml'nchen. — Ron. bayeriscJu Akademie der Wissenschajten. Sitzungsberichte. Philosoph.-philolog. und histor. Classe. 1898. ii, 1899- 1901, 1902. i, ii. Inhaltsverzeichniss, 1886-99. 8°. Mathemat.-physikal. Classe. 1898. iv, 1899-1901, 1902. i, ii. Inhalts- verzeiebniss, 1886-99. 8°. Simonsfeld (H.j. Wilhelm Heiurich Riehl als Kunsthistoiiker. Festrede . . . Munchen, 1898. 4°. Furtwangler (A.). Ueber Kunstsammlungen in alter und neuer Zeit. Festrede . . . Munchen, 1899. 4°. Qrff([£. v.). Ueber die Hiilfsmittel, Methoden und Rcsultate der inter- nationalen Erdmessung. Festrede . . . Munchen, 1899. 4°. Zittel (K. A. v.). Riickblick auf die Griindung und die Entwickelung der kon. bay Akademie der Wissenschaften im 19. Jahrhundert. Rede . . . Munchen, 1899. 4°. Ziele und Aufgaben der Akademien im 20. Jahrhundert. Rede . . . Munchen, 1900. 4°. Ranke (J.). Die akademische Komrnission fiir Erforschung der Urge- schichte und die Organization der urgeschichtlichen Forschung in Bay- ern durch Konig Ludwig I. Festrede . . . Munchen, 1900. 4°. Riggauer (H.). Ueber die Entwickelung der Numismatik und der numis- matiscben Sammlungen im 19. Jahrhundert. Festrede . . . Munchen, 1900. 4°. Lipps(T.). Psychologie, Wissenscliaftund Leben. Festrede . . . Munchen, 1901. 4°. Munster. — Westfdlischer Provincial- Verein fiir Wissenschaft und Kunst. Jahresbericht. XXVII, XX VII I, 1898-1900. 8°. Nancy. — Academie de Stanislas. Memoires. 5e ser. Tome XV IX IX, 1898-1902. 8°. Napoli. — R. Accademia delle Scienze Fisiche e Matematiche. Atti. Ser. II. Vol. IX, X, 1S99-1901. 4°. Rendiconto. Ser. III. Vol. V. 8-12, VI, VII, VIII. 1-7, 1899-1902. 4°. Heal Istituto d? Incoraggiameulo alle Scienze Naturali, etc. Atti. Ser. V. Vol. I, II, 1899-1901. 4°. Neuchatel. — Societe des Sciences Nialurelles. Bulletin. Tome XXVI, XXVII, 1S97-99. 8°. Table des matieres, Memoires t. I-IV, Bulletin t. 1-25. 1899. 8°. Newcastle-upon-Tyne. — North of England Institute <>/ Mining and Mechanical Engineers. » Transactions. Vol. XLVIII. 5-8, XLIX, L. 1-fi, LI. 1-i, LII. 1, 1899-1902. 8°. General and subject-matter indices, vol. 1-38, 1852-59. 8°. Subject-matter index of mining, mechanical and metallurgical literature for 1900. 8°. Annual report of the council. 1899-1900. 8°. Additions to the Library. lxix NurnberG. — Nalurhistorische Gesellschaft, Abhandlungen. Bd. XII-XIV, 1899-1902. 8°. Saecular-Feier, 1801-1901. Festschrift. 1901. 8°. Odessa. — Socie'te des Naturalistes de la Nouvelle Russie. Zapiski. Tom. XXII. 2, XXIII, XXIV. 1, 1898-1901. 4°. Matematicheskoe otdielenie. Tom. XVI, XIX, 1899. 8°. University Imperiale. Annales de 1'observatoire magnetique et meteorologique. Annee V-VII, 1898-1900. 4°. Revue meteorologique. Ser. II. Vol. V, 1901. 4°. Materiaux pour la climatologie du sud-ouest de la Russie. 1899. 4°. Passalsky (P.). Anomalies magnetiques dans le region de Krivoi-Rog. 1901. 4°. Ottawa. — Geological and Natural History Survey of Canada. Annual report. New series. Vol. X, XI, 1897-98. General index to reports of progress, 1866-1884. 8°. Preliminary report on the Klondike gold fields. 1900. 8°. Catalogue of Canadian birds. Pt. I. 1900. S°. Geological map of the Dominion of Canada. Western sheet No. 783. Relief map of Canada and the United States. 1900. Literary and Scientific Society. Transactions. No. I-III, 1897-1902. 8°. Meteorological Service of the Dominion of Canada. Report. 1896. Oxford. — Badcliffe Library. Catalogue of books added, 1899-1901. 8°. Radcliffe Observatory. Results of astronomical and meteorological observations. Vol. XLVIII, 1892-99. 8°. Palermo. — R. Accademia di Scienze, Lettere e Belle Arti. Atti. Ser. III. Vol. V, 1899. 4°. Bullettino. 1894-98. 4°. Societd di Scienze Naturali ed Economiche. Giornale. Vol. XXII, XXIII, 1899-1901. 4°. Parts. — Ecole Normale Siiperieure. Annales scientifiques. 3* ser. Tome XVI. 9-12, XVII-XIX, 1899-1902 4°. Ecole Poly technique. Journal. 2 e sen Cahier V-VII, 1901-02. 4°. Musee Guimet. Annales. Tome XXX. 1, 2, 1902. 4°. Bibliotheque des etudes. Tome VIII-X, XIII, 1899-1901. 8°. Revue de l'histoire des religions. Tome XXXIX-XLV, 1899-1902. 8°. Petit guide illustre. 4 e recension. 1900. 16°. Museum d? Histoire Naturelle. Bulletin. Annee 1899, no. 6-8, 1900, 1901, 1902, no. 1-6. 8°. Observatoire National. Rapport annuel. 1899-1901. 4°. Socie'te' Mathe'matique de France. Bulletin. Tome XXVII. 3, 4, XXVIII. 1, 2, 4, XXIX, XXX. 1, 1899-1902. 8°. Socie'te Zoologique de France. Bulletin. Tome XXIV-XXVI, 1899-1901. 8°. Memoires. Tome XII-XIV, 1899-1901. 8°. lxx Additions to the Library. Penzance. — Royal Geological Society of Cornwall. Transactions. Vol. XII. 5-7, 1900-02. 8°. Pisa. — Societd Toscana di Scienze Naturali. Memorie. Vol. XVII, XVIII, 1901-02. 8°. Process! verbal!. Vol. XI. pp. 158-177, XII, XIII. pp. 1-40, 1899-1902. 8°. PoONA. — Maharaja Takhtasinyji Observatory. Publication. Vol. I, 1902. 4°. Potsdam. — Astrophysikalisches Observatorium. Publicationen. Bd. XII, 1902. 4°. Photographisehe Himmelskarte. Bd. II, 1901. 4°. Prag. — Kon. bohmische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte der math.-naturwiss. Classe, 1899-1901. 8°. Jabresbericbt, 1899-1901. 8°. K. k. Sternwarte. Magnetische mid meteorologiscbe Beobachtungen. Jabrg. LX-LXII, 1899-1901. 4°. Quebec. — Literary and Historical Society. Transactions. No. XXII, XXIII, 1892-1900. 8°. Casgrain (P.-B.). La vie de Joseph-Francois Perrault. 1898. 8°. Regensburg. — Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein. Berichte. Heft VII, VIII, 1898-1900. 8°. Historischer Verein von Oberpfalz und Regensburg. Verbandlungen. Bd. LI-LIII, 1899-1901. 8°. Riga . — Naturforscher Verein. Correspondenzblatt. Jabrg. XLII-XLV, 1899-1902. 8°. Arbeiten. N. F. X, 1901. 8°. Rio de Janeiro. — Museu Nacional. Archivos. Vol. IX, X, 1896-99. 8°. La Rochelle. — SocUte des Sciences Naturelles de la Charentelvferieure. Annales. 1899-1901. 8°. Roma. — Accademia Pontifica de 1 Nuovi Lincei. Atti. Anno LII. 3-6, LIII-LV, 1899-1902. 4°. Reale Accademia del Lincei. Atti. Serie V. Rendiconti. Classe di scienze fisiche, niatematiche e naturali. Vol. VIII. ii. 4-12, IX-XI, 1899-1902. 4°. Rendiconto dell' adunanza solenne. 1900-1902. 4°. Reale Comitato Geologico d? Italia, Bollettino. Vol. XXX-XXXII, XXXIII. 1-3, 1899-1902. 8°. St. Gallen. — Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Bericht. Jabrg. 1897-1900. 8°. St. John. — New Brunswick Natural History Society. , Bulletin. No. XVIII-XX, 1^99-1902. 8°. S. Paolo. — Museu Paulista. Revista. Vol. IV, 1900. 8°. St. Petersburg. — Acad. Impe'riale des Sciences. Bulletin. 5e ser. Tome IX. 2-4, X-XII, XIII. i. 1-3, 1898-1900. 8°. Memoires. 8 e ser. Classe phys.-math. Tome VI. 11-13, VII-IX, X. 1, 2, 1898-1900. 8°. Classe hist.-pbil. Tome I, II, III. 2-6, IV. 1-7, 1895-1900. 8°. Versucb eines Worterbuches der Turk-Dialecte. Von W. Radloff. Lief. XI, 1898. 8°. Die alttiirkischen Inschriften der Mongolei. Von W. Radloff. 2. Folge, 1899. 4°. Bibliotheca Buddhica. Cikshamuecaya, a compendium of Buddhistic teaching compiled by Ciintideva. Ed. by C. Bendall. II. 1898. 8°. Additions to the Library. lxxi St. Petersburg.— Comiie Oeologique. Memoires. Vol. VII. 3, 4, VIII. 4, X. 5, XII. 3, XIII. 3, XV. 3, XVIII. 1, 2, 1899-1901. 4°. Bulletins. Vol. XVII. 6-10, XVIII, XIX, XX. 1-6, 1899-1901. 8°. Bibliotheque geologique de la Russie. 1897. 8°. Hortus Petropolitanus. Acta. Tom. XV. 2, XVI-XX, 1898-1901. 8°. Bulletin. Livr. 1, 1901. 8°. Istoricheski ocherk, 1873-1S9S. 8°. Imp. Puss. Oeograf. Obshtchestvo. Izviestiya, Tom. XXXV, XXXVI, XXXVII. 1-5, XXXVIII. 1, 1899- 1902. 8°. Otchet. God 1898-1901 . 8°. Observatoire Physique Central Nicolas. Annales. Annee 1897-1900. 4°. Russisch-Kaiserliche Miner ■aloglsche Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen. Ser. II. Bd. XXXVI-XXXIX, 1899-1902. 8°. Materialien zur Geologie Russlands. Bd. XIX, XX, 1899-1900. 8°. Universite Imperiale, Observatoire Astronomique. Mesures micrometiques d'etoiles doubles faites a St. Petersbourg et a Domkino. Sen V, 1S99. San Salvador. — Sociedad Juridica Salvadorena. El foro del porvenir. Aiio II. 7-12, 14, 1899-1900. Santiago. — Inslilulo de Hijiene. Revista Chilena de hijiene. Tomo V, 1899. 8°. Boletiit de hijiene i demograha. Afio II, 1899. 8°. SocUte Seientifique du Chili Actes. Tome IX. 4, 5, X, XI, XII. 1, 2, 1899-1901. 8°. Stockholm. — Entomologist Forening. Entomologisk tidskrift. Arg. XX-XXIII, 1899-1902. 8°. Kongl. Bibliotek. Sveriges offentliga bibliotek Stockholm, Upsala, Lund, Goteborg. Accessions-katalog. XIII-XIV, 1898-99. Register, 1886-95. 8°. Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademie. Handlingar. Ny foljd. Bd. XXXI-XXXIV, 1898-1901. 4°. Bihang till handlingar. Bd. XXIV-XXVI, 1898-1901. 8°. Ofversigt af forhandlingar. Bd. LV-LVII, 1898-1900. 8°. Meteorologiska jakttagelser. Bd. XXXV-XXXVII, 1893-95. 4°. Strassburg. — Kaiserliche Utiiverstals-Sternwarte. Annalen. Bd. II, 1899. 4°. Stuttgart. — Verein fur valerldndische Naturkunde in Wiirttemberg. Jahreshefte. Jahrg. LVI-LVIII, 1900-1902. 8°. Sydney. — Australian Museum. Memoir. l-III, IV. 1-7, 1889-1902. S°. Records. Vol. II, III. 6-8, IV. 1-7, 1892-1902. 8°. Report. 1899-1901. f°. Catalogue. No. IV. 1-4, VII, VIII, X. 1, XII, XIII, XIV. 1, XV. 1-3, XVI, XVII, 1874-1899. 8°. Special catalogue. No. I. 1, 2, 1901-02. 4°. Government Observatory. Results of meteorological observations, 1898. Results of rain, river and evaporation observations, 1898-99. 8°. Current papers by H. C. Russell. No. 5, 6, 1900-02. 8°. lxxii Additions to the Library. Sydney. — Linnean Society of New South Wales. Proceedings. Series II. Vol. XXIV. 2^, XXV, XXVI, XXVII. 1, 2, 1899-1902. 8°. Royal Society of New South Wales. Journal and proceedings. Vol. XXXII-XXXIV, 1898-1900. 8°. Tacubaya. — Observatorio Astronomico Nacional. Anuario. Alio XX-XXIII, 1900-03. 16°. Boletin. Tomo II. 0, 7, 1900-01. 4°. Throndhjem. — Kon. Norske Videnskabers Selskab. Skrifter. 1898-1901. 8°. Tiflis. — Physikalisches Observatoritim. Beobachtungen. 1897-98. 4°. Tokyo. — Imperial University of Japan. Journal of the College of science. Vol. XI. 4, XII. 4, XIII. 1, 2, 4, XV, XVI. 1-14, XVII. 1-10, 1S99-1901. 4°. Calendar. 1899-1900. 8°. Earthquake Investigation Committee. Publications. No. Ill, IV, 1900. 8°. Toluca.— Institute Cieiitiflco y literario u Porfirio Diaz." Boletin. Tomo V. 10, 1902. 8°. Torino. — Musei di Zoologia ed Anatomia Comparata. Bollettino. No. 354-415, 1899-1901. 8°. Toronto. — Canadian Institute. Transactions. Vol. VI, VII. 1, 2, 1899-1902. 8°. Proceedings. New ser. Vol. II. 2-5, 1899-1902. 8°. Toulouse. — Academie des Sciences, Inscriptions et Belles- Letlres. Memoires. 10* ser. Tome I, 1900. 8°. Bulletin. Tome II, III, 1898-1900. 8°. Faculte des Sciences. Annales. 2 e ser. Tome II, III, IV. 1, 2, 1900-02. 4°. Societe d'Mistorie Naturelle. Bulletin. Annee XXIX-XXXIV, XXXV. 1-7, 1895-1902. 8°. Salignac Feuelon (F. de). Origines et distribution geographiqiie de la faune d' Europe. 1901. 8°. Trieste. — Osservatorio Astronomico- Meteor ologico. Rapporto annuale. Vol. XIII-XVI, 1896-1902. 4°. Tromso. —Museum. Aarsberetning. 1897-1900. 8°. Aarshefter. XX-XXIV, 1897-1901. 8°. Upsala. — Kongl. Universitet. Arsskrift. 1897-1901. 8°. Bulletin of the Geological Institution. Vol. IV. 2, V. I, 1899-1900. 8°. Regia Societas Scientiarum. Nova acta. Ser. III. Vol. XVIII. 2, XIX, XX. 1, 1900-01. 4°. Utrecht. — Kon. Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Instituut. Nederlandsch meteorologisch jaarboek. Jahrg. XLIX-LI, 1897-99. 4°. Provinciaal Utrechtsch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen. Verslag van het verhandelde in de algemeene vergaderiug. 1899-1902. 8°. Aanteekeningen van het verhandelde in de sectie-vergaderingen. 1S99- 1900. 8°. Venezia. — Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti. Atti. Tomo LVI. 8-10, LVII-LX, LXI. 1-9, 1898-1902. 8°. Vicenza. — Accademia Olimpica. Atti. Vol. XXXI, XXXII, 1897-1900. S° Additions to the Library. lxxiii Wellington. — New Zealand Institute. Transactions and proceedings. Vol. XXXI-XXXIV, 1898-1902. 8°. Wien. — Kais. Akademie der Wissenschqftm. Sitzungsberichte. Mathemat.-naturwiss. Classe. Abth. I. Bd. CVII. 0-10, CVIII, CIX, CX. 1-7, 1898-1901. 8°. Mittheilungen der Erdbcben Commission. N. F. No. 1-8, 1901-02. 8°. Geschichte der Griindung und der Wirksamkeit der kais. Akad. der Wiss. wiihrend der ersten fiinfzig Jahre ihres Bestandes. 1S97. 8°. K. k. Central- Anstalt fur Meteorologie und Erdmagnetismus. Jahrbiicher. Neue Folge. Bd. XXXIV. 2, XXXV-XXXIX, 1895-1902. 4°. K. k. geologische Reichsanstalt. Abhandlungen. Bd. XVI. 1, XVII. 5, XIX. 1, 1900-02. 4°. Jahrbucb. Bd. XLVIII. 3, 4, XLIX, L, LI. 1, 2, LII. 1, 1898-1902. 8°. Verhandlungen. Jahrg. 1899-1901, 1902, no. 1-10. 8°. K. k. naturhixtorisches Ho/museum. Annalen. Bd. XIII- XVI, 1898-1901. 8°. K. k. zoologi.tch-botauische Gesell.ichaft. Verhandlungen. Bd. L, LI, LII. 1-5, 1900-02. 8°. Wiesbaden. — Nassauischer Verein fiir Naturkunde. Jahrbiicher. Jahrg. LII-LV, .1899-1902. 8°. Wurzburg. — PhysikaliscJi-mediciniscJie Gesellschqft. Sitzungsberichte. Jahrg. 1899-1901. 8°. Z urich. — Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Vierteljahrschrift. Jahrg. XLIV. 3, 4, XLV, XLVI, XLVII. 1,2, 1900- 02. 8°. Bashforth (F.). Second supplement to a revised account of the experiments made with the Bashforth chronograph. Cambridge, 1900. 8°. From the Author. Bollack (L.). Grammaire abrege de la langue bleue. Paris, 1899. 8°. From the Author. Brandstetter (R.). Tagalen und Madagassen. Eine sprachvergleichende Dar- stellung. Luzern, 1902. 8°. From the Author. Clayton (H. H.). The influence of rainfall on commerce and politics. New York, 1901. 8°. From the Author. Faribault (E. R.). The gold measures of Nova Scotia, together with other papers bearing upon Nova Scotia gold mines. Halifax. 8°. From E. Gilpin, Jr. Fraas (E.). Proganochelys Quenstedlii Baur. Ein neuer Fund des Keuperschild- krote aus dem Steubensandstein. Stuttgart, 1899. 8°. From the Author. Gerassimo (J. J.). Ueber den Eintluss des Kerns auf das Wachsthum der Zelle. Moskan, 1901. 8°. From the Author. Gerhard (W. P.). The safety of theater audiences and the stage personnel against danger from Are and panic. 1899. 8°. Needed improvements in theater sanitation, 1899. 8°. From the Author. Gilpin (Edwin, Jr.). The Minerals of Nova Scotia and Canada. Halifax, 1900. 8°. Minerals for the Paris Exhibition. [From Trans. Nova Scotian Inst, of Nat. Sci., vol. X.] 8°. Minerals of Nova Scotia. Halifax, 1901. 8°. From tin Author. Goodyear (W. H.). Architectural refinements in Italian churches. 1902. 8°. From the Author. \xxiv Additions to the Library. Gramme (Z.). Les hypotheses scientifiques emises par Zenobe Gramme en 1900. Paris, 1902. 8°. From Mine. Gramme. Heilprin (A.). A defence of the Panama route. Phil., 1902. 8°. From the Author. Herrera (A. L.). Sur limitation du protoplasma. Mexico, 1901. 4°. From the Author. Janet (C). Essai sur la constitution morphologique de la tete de l'insecte. Paris, 1879. 8°. . Habitations a bon marche dans les villes de moyenne importance. Limoges, 1900. S°. 12 entomological memoirs (extracts). From the Author. Kalecsinsky (A. v.). Ueber die ungarischen warmen und heissen Kochsalzseen als natiirliehe Warme-Accumulatoren. Budapest, 1901. 8°. From the Author. Parker (G. H.) Notes on the dispersal of Sagartia Lucice Verrill. Cambridge. 8°. From the Author. Riefler (S.). Das Nickelstahl-Compensationspendel D. R. P. 100870. Munchen, 1902. 8°. From the Author. Saint-Lager. Histoire de l'Abrotonum. Signification de la desinance ex de quel- ques noms de plantes. Paris, 1900. La perfldie des synonymes deVoilee a propos d'un astragale. Lyon, 1901. 8°. From the Author. Schiapparelli (G. V.). Osservazioni astronomiehe e fisiche sulla topografia e cos- tituzione del pianeta Marte. Roma, 1899. 4°. From the Author. Socolow (S.). Correlations regulieres supplementaires du systeme plan6taire. Moscow, 1901. 8°. From the Author. Todaro della Galia (A.). Istituzioni di diritto civile russo. Torino, 1894. 8°. Le consuetudini di Trapani secondo il libro rosso. Palermo, 1899. 8°. From the Author. Vautier-Dufour (A ). La tele-photographie. Lausanne, 1902. 8°. Communication sur la tele-photographie. Geneve, 1902. 8°. From the Author. The Ward-Coonley collection of meteorites. Chicago, 1900-01. 8°. [.— Observations on the Digestion of Proteids with Papain. By Lafayette B. Mendel and Frank P. Underbill. [From the Sheffield Laboratory of Physiological Chemistry, Yale University.] In his recent book on "The Soluble Ferments and Fermentation," J. R. Green writes: "It is uncertain whether pepsin is represented in the vegetable kingdom. All the proteolytic enzymes which have been fully investigated have been found capable of carrying the hydrolysis beyond the stage of peptone. The work of the earlier observers did not include a careful examination of the products of the decomposition, and hence for the present it remains uncertain whether or no some of the ferments belong to the peptic category." 1 In another connection the same author says : " On a review of all these vegetable proteolytic enzymes it will be seen that our knowledge is not at present sufficiently definite for us to say whether we have to do with one or many. Some of them may be peptic only, though it seems probable that they are all tryptic. Those which have been at all exhaustively examined undoubtedly carry the proteolysis to the stage of crystalline amides. We do not yet know, again, whethei there is one enzyme only, varying somewhat in its features according to the conditions of its secretion, or whether the different plants dis- cussed yield different varieties of trypsin. Bromelin and papain certainly show very little difference in their behaviour, and one is tempted to pronounce them identical. For the present, however, it is perhaps advisable to leave this question undecided."" The proteolytic enzyme obtained from the fruit and juices of the melon-tree Carica papaya and ordinarily termed papain (papayotin), 3 has usually been regarded as closely related in its action to the tryp- sin of the pancreas. 4 There are, however, very few r reliable observa- tions on record which permit one to draw a definite conclusion regard- ing the class to which the enzyme may properly be assigned. The 1 J. R. Green : The Soluble Ferments and Fermentation, 1899, p. 195. 2 Green: loc, cit. , p. 319. 3 Moncorvo employed the term "Cariein." (Jahresberieht fiir Thierchemie, 1880, x, p. 294.) Other names, such as "Caroid." "Papoid," are applied to commercial preparations of the enzyme. 4 Neumeister: Lehrbuch der physiologischen Chemie, 1897, pp. 141, 237. Moore : Schaefer's Text-book of Physiology, 1898, i, p. 403. Oppenheimer : Die Fermente und ihre Wirkungen, 1900, p. 135. (The references to the literature on papain and its action are here given.) Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XI. 1 October, 1901. 2 Mendel and Underhill — Papain-digestion, earlier investigators were content to note that the extracts of various parts of the plant, and preparations made from them, are able to dis- solve proteids like fibrin in the presence of antiseptics, e. g. thymol and hydrocyanic acid. It had long been" known that parts of the Carica papaya possess a vigorous action in softening meat and were used by the natives of tropical countries, when Wurtz ' began his more careful studies of the proteolytic enzyme present in the plant. He gave to it the name papain, and ascertained that it dissolved fibrin, raw meat, coagulated egg-white and gluten ; milk w T as clotted by it and the precipitated casein subsequently dissolved. He further found that a slightly purified enzyme mixture dissolved fibrin in acid, neutral and alkaline media. Regarding the products formed, Wurtz merely states in one case that 0.1 gram of his papain dissolved one hundred grams of moist fibrin in a neutral medium in the pres- ence of HCN in thirty-six hours; from the products formed a small quantity of a crystalline substance having the appearance of leucin was isolated." -No mention is made of tyrosin. Because of the readiness with which it acts in neutral fluids, Wurtz concluded that papain is closely related to trypsin. Somewhat later Martin 3 undertook a study of papain. He used a commercial preparation in most of his experiments, while in a few cases the dry juice of the unripe fruit was employed. The results of the digestive action of the commercial papain on fibrin and egg-albu- min solution were reported. Prussic acid was used to prevent putre- factive changes. A quantitative study of this enzyme preparation indicated that it was active in the highest degree in neutral and alkaline solutions (one-fourth per cent. Na„C0 3 ) ; in solutions of higher alkalinity (one-half or one per cent. Na 2 C0 3 ), the action, though well marked, was not so great. Acid prevented the action of the papain though in weakly acid solutions (0.05 per cent. HC1) some degree of digestion may have taken place. Martin also investigated the pro- ducts formed during the papain-digestion of fibrin in neutral and alkaline media. He observed the early formation of a "globulin- like" substance intermediate between the native proteid and the derived alkali-proteid usually formed in proteolysis. We shall have occasion to refer to this body later. It is not precipitated like alkali- proteid when the digestive fluids are neutralized, but separates out 1 Wurtz and Bouchut : Comptes rendus de l'Academie des Sciences, 1879, lxxxix, p. 425. Wurtz : ibid., 1880, xc, p. 1379 ; 1880, xci, p. 787. a Wurtz : Comptes rendus de l'Academie des Sciences, 1880, xc, p. 1379. 3 Martin : Journal of Physiology, 1884, v, p. 213 ; 1885, vi, p. 336. Mendel and Underhill — Papa'ln-digestion. 3 abundantly when these neutral fluids are heated. Its occurrence is too characteristic and the quantities formed are too large to be ascribed to traces of unprecipitated alkali-proteid. Peptones (in the older sense) were obtained by concentrating the filtrates from the globulin- like body and precipitating with a large excess of alcohol a substance which gave the biuret reaction and was readily diffusible. From the alcoholic solution, crystals of leucin were obtained. Martin experi- enced more difficulty, however, in showing the presence of tyrosin. No crystals could be obtained ; but when the alcoholic peptone- filtrate was dried, an extract could be prepared from it with absolute alcohol. This solution gave Millon's reaction and led Martin to con- clude the presence of tyrosin. In his own words "we have, then, in papain a proteolytic ferment acting almost exactly like trypsin : sim- ilar in the proneness of decomposition in solution, in its erosion of coagulated proteid: in the formation of an 'intermediate' body from the proteid ; and the formation of a perfect peptone, and of leucin and tyrosin." 1 Later Martin obtained impure crystals of tyrosin and leucin from the dried papaw juice, and also apparently identified them in small quantity among the products of the self -digestion of this material. The crude way in which the material at his disposal was prepared by no means excludes the possibility of previous decom- position through the agency of bacteria and the formation of bac- terial enz}^mes.' ! This might, at least, reasonably be assumed of a "yellow brown powder of sickly smell" obtained by drying, chiefly in the East Indies, the juice of the unripe fruit in the open air and under glass. Furthermore the quantity of leucin and tyrosin — if such they were — obtained in the digestions with large quantities of proteid, was extremely small when compared with the typical results of tryptic proteolysis ; and Martin himself has been far more cautious in drawing any final conclusion than have those who have subsequently quoted his investigations. For he says : " It is evident moreover that too general a deduction cannot at present be drawn as to the nature of the proteolytic change, as to whether the agent acts like animal pepsin or like trypsin." 3 In studying the literature of papain- proteolysis we have been surprised to find upon what scanty and meagre data some of the current statements on the subject are based ; and we have dwelt particularly upon these widely quoted observa- tions of Martin to illustrate this point. 1 Martin: loc. cit., 1884, v, p. 230. 2 Some commercial preparations have been reported to contain spores and dead forms of bacilli. (Dowdeswell : Practitioner, 1883, xxx, May.) 3 Martin : Journal of Physiology, 1885, vi, p. 360. 4 Mendel and Underhitt — Papa'in-dif/estion. In 1892, Chittenden 1 published the results of an extensive study of the digestive action of "Papoid," a therapeutic agent prepared from the various parts of the papaw plant, Carica papaya. The enzyme- like character of the preparation was clearly shown by the readiness with which it dissolved proteids like fresh and boiled fibrin, raw and cooked beef proteids and coagulated egg-white in neutral, alkaline and acid media, even in the presence of various antiseptic agents. While the attention of this investigator was directed particularly to the conditions under which the proteolysis proceeds best, he inci- dentally made several observations with reference to the products formed. With coagulated egg-albumin, a peculiar albumose-like body, a deuteroalbumose, a fairly large amount of peptone and some leucin and tyrosin were isolated. "With raw blood-fibrin and cooked beef-proteids similar results were obtained. 2 Particularly conspic- uous was a soluble albumose formed in the fibrin digestions. It was completely precipitable from a neutral solution by heat and partook of the general character of hetereoralbumose, being insoluble in water but completely insoluble in salt solutions as well as in dilute acids and alkalies. This substance recalls the " globulin-like" body described by Martin. While calling attention to the points of resemblance between the action of papoid and trypsin, Chittenden points out that the latter is ordinarily associated with an alkaline secretion, and as a proteolytic agent acts to advantage only in alka- line fluids. On the other hand, the action of papoid in neu- tral solutions is increased by the addition of a very small amount of hydrochloric acid. AVurtz 3 has also stated that the liquid juice of the papaw is neutral in reaction. Chittenden therefore merely con- cludes "that the power possessed by papoid of dissolving various forms of proteid matter is dependent upon an ordinary digestive action akin to, or identical with, that of digestive ferments in general, whether animal or vegetable. In a subsequent paper from this laboratory' it was demonstrated that not only are true albumoses (in Ktlhne's sense) formed by vari- ous commercial papain preparations acting in different media, but 1 Chittenden : Transactions of the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, 1892, ix, p. 298. 2 We learn from Professor Chittenden that the quantities of leucin and tyrosin found by him were small at the most. 3 Wurtz and Bouchut : Comptes rendus de l'Academie des Sciences, 1879, lxxxix, p. 42"). 4 Chittenden, Mendel and McDermott : American Journal of Physiology, 189S, i, p. 255. The references to the literature are given in this paper. Mendel and Underhill — Papdin-digestion. 5 — contrary to the statements of several writers — peptones, i. e., biuret-giving compounds not precipitable by ammonium sulphate or zinc sulphate, are formed in considerable amounts. The latter were separated from digestive mixtures and their physiological action was investigated. Previous to this Neumeister 1 onlv had directed attention to this point. His report is, however, very scanty, and the commercial preparation of " papayotin " which he used must have been rather inactive ; for although it dissolved coagulated egg- white in an alkaline mixture, it failed to digest fresh fibrin or to act in acid or neutral solutions. He arrived at no definite conclusion regarding the nature of the enzyme. The present investigation is the outcome of an attempt to isolate the end-products of the action of papain upon purified proteids. Relying upon such statements as have been introduced into the literature on this subject, we had expected to find a marked resem- blance in character between the products formed by trypsin and those resulting from papain proteolysis. Our experiments, on the contrary, soon indicated that pronounced differences exist. From the data accumulated we feel justified in reporting some additional features regarding the action of the papaw enzyme. We have not been fortunate enough to secure specimens of the fruit itself for study ; but the results obtained with four commercial preparations from different sources are fairly concordant and characteristic and give no occasion to suspect the extensive admixture of other enzymes. These preparations will be referred to below as Papain A, B, C, and D; they were bought under the names of "Papoid," " Caroid," "Papain (Lehn and Fink's)," and "Papain (Merck's)" respectively. Our observations will be considered under four chapters in the part following. I. The Influence of the Reaction on the Proteolytic Action of Papain. A survey of the literature on the action of papain shows that the observers have by no means been agreed regarding the conditions of reaction under which proteolysis proceeds favorably. Wurtz, the earliest careful investigator of this point, and Chittenden, who made the most exhaustive study (with "papoid"), both found the enzyme active in acid, alkaline and neutral media, as already indicated. Similar observations were made by Polak 2 with two papain prepara- d. . . 1 Neumeister: Zeitschrift fiir Biologie, 1890, xxvi, p. 82. 2 Polak : Jahresbericht fiir Thierchernie, 1882, xii, p. 254. 6 Mendel and Underhill — Papdin-digestion. tions in the digestion of various proteids. While nearly all writers have found that weakly alkaline fluids favor the action of papain, there has heen great diversity of experience regarding the influence of acid reaction. 1 Undoubtedly the conditions determining the character of the acid reaction, i. e., the presence or absence of free mineral acid, are of decisive influence and have been overlooked in this connection, as frequently elsewhere, in discussions regarding enzyme activity. 2 Our own experiments confirm the results obtained by the three writers above named in showing pronounced proteo- lytic activity in digestive mixtures with various reactions. Methods. The general course of these experiments has been to treat the proteid used with relatively concentrated solutions of the enzyme preparation under examination, enough sodium fluoride being dissolved in the mixture in every case to make the total strength of this antiseptic equivalent to at least one per cent. Pre- vious trials had demonstrated that this salt does not interfere seri- ously with the action of papain. 3 The digestions were carried on in an oven at 37° C. In the series of quantitative trials reported below ten grams of moist coagulated egg-white, finely comminuted, were used. To this, 50 c.c. of 0.2 per cent. HC1 were added for the acid digestions, 50 c.c. of 2 per cent. HNaC0 3 solution for the alkaline digestions, and 50 c.c. of water for the neutral media. Finally 1.5 grams of papain were digested with 125 c.c. of water and 50 c.c. of the filtrate were employed in each digestion. Each digestion mixture was thus made up as follows : 10 grains of moist proteid (2.025 grams of dry proteid), 100 c.c. of fluid containing 1 gram NaF. / 0.1 per cent. HC1, or papain and^ 1.0 " HNaC0 3 , or \ water. Control trials were simultaneously carried out with boiled papain solutions, and lastly the solvent action of the fluids used was ascer- tained. 4 After allowing the digestive action to proceed at 3T C C. 1 For the literature references on this point see Oppenheinier : Die Fermente und ilire Wirkungen, 1900, p. 136 ; also Pickardt : Ceutralblatt fur Physiologic 1900, xiv, p. 351. 2 Cf. Hanford : American Journal of Physiology, 1900, iv, p. 250. 3 Cf. Chittenden, Mendel and McDermott : American Journal of Physiology, 1898, i, p. 259. 4 The complete extent of digestive action is not always accurately represented in this way, since what is estimated as undigested residue may frequently be made up in part of transformation products, like antialbumid. resulting from the work of the enzyine. Mendel and Underhill — Papain- digestion. V with frequent agitation of the mixture for four hours, it was stopped by heating, and the undissolved residue filtered upon dried and weighed ash-free papers, then thoroughly washed with hot water and dried to constant weight at 105° C. From the figures thus obtained the percentage of proteid dissolved was calculated. The results are tabulated below. PAPAIN DIGESTION OF COAGULATED EGG-ALBUMIN. (The figures indicate the percentages of proteid dissolved.) Medium. Papa' in A. Papa in B. Papain D. Controls with- out Papain Solution. unboiled boiled unboiled boiled unboiled boiled 0.1 per cent HC1, 1.0 " HNaC0 3 , water, 8.7 24.0 16.6 2.3 8.7 0.8 14.5 54.0 41.7 2.9 1.2 4.0 40.6 66.7 72.7 5.4 2.1 6.1 6.0 4.2 2.4 In evidence of the statement already made regarding the activity of papain preparations in both alkaline and acid media, we might add many additional data. In numerous qualitative tests with vari- ous papain preparations acting on fibrin, casein, boiled and unboiled muscle tissue, in the presence of 2 per cent. NaF and in media acid with 0.1 per cent. IIC1, or alkaline with 1.0 per cent. HNaCO s or 0.5 per cent. Na a C0 3 , or in approximately neutral fluids, vigorous solvent action was always observed. In considering the relatively weak digestive action noted above in the case of the acid mixtures, it should be borne in mind that the strength of acid here recorded is rather large 1 and by a selection of more appropriate conditions the solvent power could doubtless have been considerably increased. II. Are Leucin, Ty rosin and Tryptophan formed by Papain? When trypsin acts upon ordinary proteids, leucin, tyrosin and tryptophan (proteinochromogen) are speedily formed in considerable quantities. These compounds do not arise in appreciable amounts in pepsin- IIC1 digestion under ordinary circumstances, although some recent experimental work leads to the conclusion that relatively simple bodies (including leucin) may occur in prolonged proteolysis with pepsin. Thus Lawrow 2 found large quantities of leucin formed by the self-digestion of 1 2 kilos of pigs' stomachs with 35 1 Cf. Chittenden: Transactions of the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences, 1892, ix, p. 307. 2 Lawrow : Zeitschrift fiir physiologisehe Chemie, 1899, xxvi, p. 513. 8 Mendel and Underhill — Papain-digestion. litres of 0.6 per cent. HO at 40°-45° C. for two months. Experi- ments of this type will scarcely appeal to one as offering reliable evidence regarding the work of the enzyme pepsin, especially as no control experiments to show the influence of such large excesses of free hydrochloric acid are presented. How vigorously dilute acids alone may act on proteids has been shown by Fr. Goldschmidt. 1 More important, however, are experiments like those of Pfaundler. 2 This investigator showed that while in prolonged pepsin-HCl diges- tion there arise products which no longer give the biuret reaction, leucin and tyrosin cannot be found ready formed. Tryptophan, in particular, has always been regarded as a typical product of tryptic enzymes, although Malfatti 3 has recently observed that it may be formed by extracts of the stomach. He gives no conclusive proof, however, that the action is due to the enzyme pepsin. Tyrosin has not been found among the products of pepsin-proteolysi>. Bertrand 4 and others have shown that extracts of Bussula delica and other species of fungi contain an oxidizing enzyme, which they named tyrosinase, and which brings about a black coloration when added to solutions containing tyrosin. The reaction is one of oxida- tion and may be observed with many genera. Harlay 5 has subse- quently asserted that this reaction is a delicate test for the presence of tyrosin and enables one to distinguish between the products of peptic and tryptic digestion. With peptic digestion mixtures the extracts of Bussula yield a red, then green color; tryptic products turn red, then black. Applying this test to the products of papain digestion, Harlav 6 has observed a resemblance in reaction to that obtained with the peptic digestion products. Although these obser- vations, published during the progress of our experiments, were made with extracts of a different member of the papaw family, viz., Carica hastifolia, they lend additional evidence to the results which we have obtained with the closely related specie-. 1 Gold schmidt : Uebev die Wirkung von Siiuren auf Ehveissstoffe. Inaugural- Dissertation, 1898, Strassburg. - Pfaundlar : Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, 1900, xxx, p. 99. 3 Malfatti : Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie. 1900, xxxi. p. 43. 4 Bertrand : Bulletin de la societe chimique, 1896 (3). xv, p. 793. Bourquelot : Bulletin de la societe inycologique de France, 1897. xiii. p. 65. Cf. also Green : The Soluble Ferments and Fermentations. 1899. pp. 299, 300. 5 Harlay : Journal de pharmacie, 1899 [vi] 5, p. £25. 8 Harlay : Abstract in Journal of the Chemical Society, 1900. Part I. July, p. 419. Mendel and Underhill — Papain-digestion. 9 We have searched for leucin, tyrosin and tryptophan among the products of papain digestion under a variety of conditions. In a very large number of experiments we have uniformly failed to detect them. They are therefore, in our opinion, not normal products of the proteolytic action of papain. Enzyme preparations from four different manufacturers were tested in solutions of differing reactions and on the following proteids : casein, fibrin, coagulated egg-albumin, muscle tissue (boiled and unboiled). Only in one series of experiments, viz., those with unboiled muscle tissue, did the products already referred to regularly appear. These cases will be considered in detail below. Methods. The digestions were carried out at 35°-38°C. in the presence of two per cent, sodium fluoride, or thymol, to avoid bac- terial decomposition. The reaction of the digestive mixtures varied as described on page 6. At the end of varying periods of time they were filtered and neutralized, when necessary; the fluids were then heated on the water-bath, and after the removal of the charac- teristic albumose-like body which usually separates out, they were concentrated to a small volume and set aside in a cool place to allow bodies like leucin and tyrosin to crystallize out. Finally the residues were extracted with warm alcohol to remove some of these latter compounds and eliminate the greater part of the soluble pro- teids. The alcoholic extracts were in turn concentrated, allowed to stand, and carefully examined under the microscope for crystals of leucin and tyrosin. Trytophan was searched for by the bromine- water test both in the original concentrated neutralized solution and in the final alcoholic extracts. The results of over sixty trials made with the four papain prepara- tions (more particularly with papain A, B and D) and with the pro- teids mentioned, were entirely negative so far as the appearance or detection of leucin, tyrosin or tryptophan was concerned. The observations were so concordant in this respect, that it is scarcely necessary to enumerate the variations in time of digestion, the reac- tion of the digestive media, the quantity of enzyme used and other details. Comparisons with control trials always indicated a vigorous digestion in every case. In some instances the digestion was allowed to continue at 35°C. for over a month without altering the results noted. Only with fresh muscle tissue were these tryptic end-products obtained. When hashed muscle (lean beefsteak), washed free from blood with water, was digested with papain in the presence of two per cent, sodium fluoride, the tryptophan reaction was repeatedly 10 Mendel and UnderJdll — Papdin-digestion. obtained in the acid digestions ; and frequently typical leucin crys- tals, less often characteristic tyrosin crystals, could be detected with the microscope. There was no difference in the three papain prepara- tions in this respect. The suspicion that the meat thus prepared long- after the death of the animal might be contaminated with bacterial enzymes, led to the use of dog's and rabbit's muscle removed from the freshly killed animal immediately after perfusion of the blood-vessels with isotonic sodium chloride solution to wash out the blood com- pletely. Precisely similar results were obtained with such material in the acid and neutral media. Finally trials were made with muscle tissue previously heated in boiling water. With the boiled muscle no leucin, tyrosin or tryptophan was ever obtained. These facts seem to indicate the existence of an enzyme in the muscle tissue which may assist in the proteolysis accomplished by papain on the fresh tissue and may cany the action to a stage where relatively simple products are formed. The self-digestion (autolysis) of muscle after exclusion of bacteria by the use of chloroform-water, Mas observed long ago by Salkowski. 1 He failed to find leucin and tyrosin among the products. More recently Jacoby 2 obtained large quantities of leucin, tyrosin and also tryptophan in the self-digestion of the liver. These observations indicate an explanation for the exceptional results obtained with fresh muscle tissue in our papain digestions, by refer- ring to the muscle itself the active agent in the production of trypto- phan, etc., in these cases — a conclusion which is supported by the uniformly negative results obtained with the heated tissue. III. The Nature of some Products of Papain Proteolysis. While the experiments just outlined indicate the marked difference between trypsiu-and papain-proteolysis so far as the end-product* formed under ordinary conditions are concerned, a closer study of the primary products has shown them to resemble in many respects the bodies obtained under similar conditions in pepsin-hydrochloric acid digestion. Our investigation in this direction has been confined to the proteid casein, since this is readily obtained in large quantities in a state of considerable purity. The products formed from casein by pepsin-hydrochloric acid have been investigated by Chittenden 3 and 1 Salkowski : Areliiv fur Physiologie, 1890, p. 554 ; Zeitsckrift fur klinische Medicin, 1890, xvii, Supplementband, p. ??. -' Jacoby : Zeitschrift fur physiologisclie Chernie, 1900, xxx, p. 162. 3 Chittenden : Studies from the laboratory of physiological chemistry, Yale University, 1887, ii, p. 15(3; 1889, iii, p. 66. Mendel and Underhill — Papa'in-digestion. 11 his pupils, and more recently by Fr. Alexander. 1 The latter employed the method of fractional precipitation introduced by E. P. Pick 2 for the albumoses. We have followed their scheme of analysis quite closely, and refer to the papers of the writers mentioned for the details of the method. The separation of the individual caseoses was made in the neutralized and somewhat concentrated digestion filtrates, after removal of the characteristic albumose-like substance which has already been referred to as precipitating when heat is applied. Instead of reproducing our protocols at length, we give an outline of one of several experiments with casein and then add a brief resume of the main results ascertained from all the trials. Experiment A. In this experiment li kilos of moist casein obtained from skimmed milk and purified by re-precipitating three times were treated with 2£ liters of 0.25 per cent. Na 2 C0 3 ,4 grams of papain A and strong alcoholic thymol solution. The mixture was kept at 38° C. for 11 days. Daring this inter- val portions had repeatedly been withdrawn and examined for leucin, tyrosin and tryptophan (as described on page 9) with negative results. Therefore 4 grams of papain were again added. After digesting for 7 days longer, during which time samples had again been withdrawn and examined for leucin, etc., with negative outcome, the material was filtered and neutralized with acetic acid, whereupon a very slight precipitate was obtained. The filtrates were then concentrated as already indicated, until they contained about ten per cent, of dissolved substance. On treatment of the carefully neutralized fluid with saturated ammonium sul- phate solution, Fraction I. , which began to be precipitated when a content of 2.6 c.c. of saturated ammonium sulphate solution in a total volume of 10 c.c. was reached, was completely separated when 6 c.c. of the sulphate solution were present. In a large portion of digestion material this fraction was then precipi- tated by mixing ten volumes of the digestive solution with nine volumes of ammonium sulphate solution (following Alexander), 3 and after standing, this frac- tion was filtered off completely. In this filtrate the lower limit of precipitation was found to be 5.1 c.c, and the upper limit at 6.7 c.c. of ammonium sulphate solution. Fraction II. was then separated from a larger quantity of the original material by adding one volume of it to three volumes of saturated ammonium sul- phate solution. For this filtrate obtained therefrom, lower and upper precipitation limits of 7.8 c.c, and about 9.5 c.c of ammonium sulphate solution respectively were ascertained. Fraction III. was therefore removed by saturating the remainder of the original digestion material with ammonium sulphate crystals and filter- ing after some hours. When the salt-saturated fluid thus obtained was further treated with ^ s n sulphuric acid (saturated with ammonium sulphate) a precip- itate, Fraction IV., separated. It was relatively large in quantity and was removed by adding one-half volume of the salt-saturated acid to the entire fluid. The filtrate still gave a strong biuret reaction, indicating the presence of pep- 1 Alexander : Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, 1898, xxv, p. 411. 2 Pick : Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, 1897, xxiv, p. 246. 3 Alexander : Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, 1898, xxv, p. 418. 12 Mt ndel and Underhill — Papa'in-digestion. tones. The latter were removed by precipitation with an equal volume of Lugol's solution saturated with ammonium sulphate. This peptone precipitate could always be divided into two fractions, one insoluble (V) and the other soluble | VI) in 95 per cent, alcohol. These portions both gave the biuret reaction. Experiment B. This was carried out under precisely the same conditions as Experiment A, except that 2.2 liters of 0.02 per cent. HC1 were added instead of the alkali. A total of 8 grams of papain A was added, and the digestion stopped after 28 days. No leucin, tyrosin or tryptophan were found. The results of the fractional analysis are given below. Experiment C. Alkaline digestion containing 300 grams of freshly precipi- tated casein, 1500 c.c. of 0.25 per cent. Na 2 C0 3 , 4 grams of papain B and thymol solution. Digestion at 38° C. for 26 days. Experiment D. Acid digestion like Experiment C except that 1500 c.c. of 0.02 per cent. HC1 were added in place of the alkali. Experiment E. Alkaline digestion like Experiment C, the enzyme used being papain C. Digestion at 38° C. for 26 days. Experiment F. Acid digestion like Experiment D, with papain C. Digested at 38° C. for 26 days. A summary of the results of the fractional precipitation of the digestion products according to the general plan outlined under Experiment A follows. The figures given indicate cubic centimetres of saturated sulphate solution in a total volume of ten cubic centimetres. FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS OF THE PAPAIN DIGESTION. Preparation Conditions of Experiment. Limits of Fraction I. Limits of Fraction II. Limits of Character of Fractionlll. Fraction IV. Character of Fraction V. Character ol Fraction VI Papain A -J Papain B -. Papain C •] A. alkaline B. acid C. alkaline D. acid E. alkaline F. acid 2.6—6.0 2.6-5.8 2.4 — ? '2.2 — ? 2.6—? 2.4—? 5.1—6.7 5.1—6.9 5.3—? 5.5 — \ 5.5—? 5.3—? 7.8—9.5 7.6—9.5 7.8—9.5 8.0—9.5 7.8—9.5 8.0—9.5 light heavy (< light very light heavy more than VI .i a a tt a a a a a light, more than VI light a it a more than ^ light Pepsin 1 Acid 2.6-4.4 5.2-7.2 8.2—9.5 The results obtained with different enzyme preparations and under varying conditions show a fairly close agreement with one another and a resemblance to those already published by Alexander for the gastric digestion of casein. He concluded that at least four caseoses and two casein-peptones are formed in the pepsin-hydrochloric acid proteolysis of casein. Our results indicate that similar products may arise through the action of papain, and they lend additional emphasis to the specific character of papain as an enzyme. 1 Alexander : Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie. 189s, xxv. p. 418. Mendel and Underhill — Papa'in-digestion. 13 IV. General Conclusions. The observations recorded in this paper indicate that papain belongs to a class of enzymes which differs somewhat in type from the two proteolytic enzymes that have received most careful investi- gation in the past, viz., pepsin and trypsin. While the products of the papain digestion of proteids resemble quite closely those of pep- sin so far as these have been examined in detail, the enzjnne differs from ordinary animal pepsin in that it acts readily in both neutral and alkaline media. On the other hand, although papain is com- parable with trypsin in exerting a solvent action in fluids of various reactions, the failure to form leucin, tyrosin and tryptophan in appreciable quantities — at least under conditions in which they are readily formed in large quantities by other tryptic enzymes — places it in a class of its own for the present. The failure of papain to conform exactly with any of the standards set in the past for proteolytic enzymes need not surprise us. The more carefully such enzymes — especially those from vegetable sources — are being examined with reference to their activities, the more varied are found to be the manifestations which characterize and distinguish them. We may refer, for example, to bromelin, the proteolytic enzyme of the pineapple (Ananassa sativa), which has been studied very thoroughly hj Chittenden. 1 Bromelin readily forms leucin and tyrosin in large quantities in both acid and neutral media, besides the characteristic proteoses and peptones. 2 This recalls the proteolytic enzyme of the yeast, discovered by Salkowskr and quite recently found by Halm and Geret 4 in the yeast juice expressed by Buchner's method. It acts with intense vigor, giving rise readily to leucin and t3ax>sin ; peptone is not obtained and albu- moses occur only in traces ; acid reaction is favorable, while alkalies retard digestion with it. The circumstance that the favorable reac- tion corresponds with the one best for pepsin, while the products formed resemble those resulting in trypsin proteolysis (the absence of peptones being unique), has led Halm and Geret to classify this yeast enzyme by itself and to give it a new name : yeast endotrypsin. 'Chittenden : Journal of Physiology, 1893, xv, p. 249. 2 In unpublished experiments by 0. H. Schell, Ph.B. and one of us, tryp- tophan and other end-products were found in addition to those already described. s Salkowski : Zeitschrift fur physiologische Chemie, 1889, xiii, p. 527. 4 Halm and Geret : Zeitschrift fur Biologie, 1900, xl, p. 117. 14 Mendel and Undevhill — Papain-digestion. Similarly the enzyme found by Green 1 in the germinating seeds of Z/upinus hirsutus acts in acid media, forming leucin and tyrosin ; but the primary products are also found. Related enzymes have been described by others. The proteolytic enzyme of the pitcher plant, Nepenthes, which Vines 2 has studied, seems to resemble pepsin most closely ; for it acts onby in acid fluids, forming large quantities of albumoses, small amounts of peptone and only traces of leucin, if any. Tyrosin has not been obtained. In writing of various vege- table enzymes, Vines says : "It is a remarkable fact that, whatever may be the reaction of the medium in which they can work, all these enzymes are essentially tryptic in their mode of action ; in fact it is not improbable that this may be a characteristic feature of all vege- table proteolytic enzymes whatsoever." 3 On the contraiy, Ave believe that the actual experiments of Vines, as well as the work recorded in this paper, make it more probable that plants, like animals, produce various kinds of proteolytic enzymes. 4 April, 1901. 1 Green : Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society, London, 1887, B, clxxviii, p. 39. 2 Vines : Annals of Botany, 1897, xi, p. 583 ; 1898, xii, p. 546. 3 Vines: loc. cit., 1898, xii, p. 555. 4 Cf. Pfeffer : Pflanzenphysiologie, 1897, i, p. 511-512. II. — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas from the Yale Expedition of 1901, with Notes on Pther Species. By A. E. Verrill. The following additions to the fauna of the Bermudas are due almost entirely to the large collections made in the spring of 1901, by Mr. A. H. Verrill, who was there from March 7th to May 9th, and the writer, who took part in the work from April 10th to May 9th. Dr. W. G. Van Name joined us during the latter part of the time, but he worked chiefly on the Tunieata, which are not included in this article. About 75 species of insects and 25 species of spiders were also obtained. Many of these were not before known from Bermuda, but they will be treated in subsequent articles. The numerous Isopoda and Amphipoda, and most of the Annelida, also remain to be studied, as well as many of the smaller shells, among which there are probably many additions to the fauna. There are also some additional land shells, Myriapoda, earthworms, etc. I have added notes on some of the rarer or less known species, of those previously recorded,* where such information seemed partic- ularly desirable, for the benefit of future students. That so many species of comparatively large and conspicuous marine animals could be added in a few weeks to the fauna of a locality, where so many previous collections have been made, may seem strange. This is due, however, partly to a very careful scru- tiny of the hiding places of those forms that depend upon conceal- ment for their safety, partly upon the fact that localities were visited where we did not collect in 1S98, in which certain species seem to be localized, and perhaps, in some cases, upon the earlier season of the year (March), w r hen some of the new forms came into shallow water to spawn. The illustrations are mostly from colored drawings, made from life, by Mr. A. H. Verrill. Others are from photographs made by him, either from living or freshly killed specimens. It is unfortu- nate that the colored figures could not now be reproduced in colors by the Academy, for in these groups of soft-bodied animals the colors are often highly characteristic, as well as beautiful. The marine invertebrate fauna of the Bermudas, now known, includes about 900 species. The known fishes are about 200. * Species previously recorded are in italic type. Those now first recorded (so far as known) are in black-face type. 16 A. E. VerriU— Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. CRUSTACEA. DECAPODA. Epialtus bituberculatus M. Edw. (?) var. Bermudensis Ver. Plate I. Figure 1. This form differs so decidedly from the several so-called varieties of E. bituberculatus figured by A. Milne-Edwards (Crust. Reg. Mex., p. 13*7, pi. xxvii) that it seems necessary to give it, at the least, a varietal name. Indeed, the differences are so great as to indicate a distinct species, but, unfortunately, we obtained only a single example. It resembles the E. Brazil iensis Dana, considered a variety by A. M. Edw., more than var. "JjiJtis St imp. From both it differs in having a much longer and differently shaped rostrum ; in the more transverse front edge of the carapax and the much deeper emargination on the sides ; the more prominent lateral tuber- cles ; the much longer legs and chelipeds ; and especially in the much longer and differently shaped chela?. The length of the rostrum to that of the rest of the carapax is as 1:1.62 ; the length of the carapax (without rostrum) to its breadth is as 1:1.30 ; the length of the chela? is equal to that of the carapax to base of rostrum ; the length of the chelae to the breadth is as 3:1, their distal portion being decidedly the larger. Total length of carapax and rostrum, 15.7 mm ; greatest breadth, 12.3 mm ; length of rostrum, 12 mm ; of chela?, 10.3 mm . The sides of the carapax are deeply concave in outline between the two tubercles ; the anterior tubercles are much the larger, but the posterior are a little more prominent and more acutely angular. their anterior edge being incurved. The rostrum is rather long with the outlines in front of the eyes distinctly incurved, but the tip is obtusely rounded ; there is a pair of distinct angular denticles in front of the eyes, back of which the outlines are nearly parallel. The front margins of the carapax are nearly transverse, sloping but little from the orbits to the antero-lateral tubercles, which are bluntly rounded. The color in life was brownish purple, becoming greenish ante- riorly and grayish on the legs ; on the posterior part of the carapax there is a large, broad T-shaped spot of cream-color. Chelipeds yel- lowish brown, the claws whitish. Flatts Inlet, cut out of a deep hole in a ledge, one specimen only. April, 1001 (A. II. V.). The E. bituberculatus i- recorded from Chili, Panama, Florida (var. affinis), Brazil, etc. A. K Verrill— Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 17 Pericera subparallela Stimp. Pericera subparallela Stimpson, Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist. N. York, vii, p. 182 [54], 1860, (St. Thomas.) A. Milne-Edw., Crust. Reg. Mex., p. 54, pi. xiii, figs. 3-3d, (Gaudaloupe.) A single specimen of this species, from Bermuda, was in the col- lection of 1898. It has been determined by Miss M. J. Rathbnn. Platypodia spectabilis (Herbst). Cancer lobatus Milne-Edw., Hist. Nat. Crust., i, p. 375. Attergatis lobatus Stimpson, Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist. N. York, 1860, p. 74. Lophactcea lobata A. Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Museum, Mem. I, p. 249, pi. xvi, fig. 3 ; Crust. Reg. Mexico, p. 242, Rankin, Annals N. York Acad., xii, p. 529. Plate I. Figure 2. Several specimens of this beautiful species were obtained under stones and among bright colored sponges. In life its colors are very bright, but imitative of sponges, etc. The carapax is bright orange- red with particolored, irregular, broad streaks, blotches, and angular or rounded ocellated spots of various sizes. These generally have a small, bright yellow center, surrounded by a wide white band, which is edged with bright blue and surrounded by a thin black line. The arrangement of the spots and blotches is variable. Sometimes small, round, ocellated spots, with the several colors distinct, occur on the lai-ge light blotches, either singly or in lines or groups ; others are scattered over the carapax. The chelipeds and legs are colored in the same way, but here the spots mostly take the form of half -bands, or angular patches at the joints. The tips of the claws are black. The larger patches of color are often unsymmetrically arranged on the carapax, which tends to obscure its outline and increases the imitative effect, Gardiosoma Guanhumi Latr. Great Land Crab. M.-Edw., Illust. ed. Cuvier, pi. xx, figs. 1-li. S. I. Smith, these Trans., ii, p. 143, pi. v, fig. 3, 1870. In addition to the locality for this large land crab on Coopti*- Island, mentioned in my former paper (vol. x, p. 573), we this year found its large holes in considerable numbers near the shore at Hungiy Bay, on the south side of the Main Island. As the holes are very deep and generally excavated among stones and the roots of trees, it is very difficult to dig them out, They are said to come out of their holes in the night, in summer. If so they might, per- haps, be captured by torchlight. Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XI. 2 October, 1901. 18 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. Cyclois Bairdii Stimpson. Cyclois Bairdii Stimpson, Notes on N. Amer. Crust., II, Annals Lye. Nat. Hist. New York, vol. vii, p. 237 [109], 18G0, (Cape St. Lucas.) M. J. Kathbun, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xxi, p. 610, 1898 ; Bull. Univer. Iowa, 1898, p. 290, (Bahamas.) Plate II. Figures 1, 2. In life the carapax is pale yellow or yellowish white with several rows of lemon-yellow spots and with rather numerous smaller spots of bright red or crimson, chiefly near the lateral margins and on the antero-lateral teeth. Chelipeds and legs brighter 3-ellow, handed and spotted with bright red. The chela? have a large crescent-shaped spot of red on the inner side at the joint, and the tips and dorsal spines are red ; two spots of red on the carpus. Ambulatory legs brighter yellow, with three or four bands of red and purple at the joints and with marginal lines of purple ; eye-stalks orange and yel- low. Two living specimens of this species, about two inches broad, were taken by A. H. Verrill, in shallow water on a sandy bottom, near "Waterloo," Castle Harbor, April, .1901. The cast shells, some of them of larger size, were also found on the north side of Long Bird Island, opposite the sand flats, in May. It was originally described from Cape St. Lucas, where it is abun- dant. Specimens from Panama (Capt. J. M. Dow) are in the Museum of Yale University. Miss M. J. Rathbun has recorded it from the West Indies. She considers our specimens identical (judg- ing from the photographs). Clibanarius Verrillii Rathbun. Amer. Journ. Science, xi, p. 328, April, 1901. Plate VIII. Figure 2, 3. A few small specimens that appear to belong to this species were taken this year, at Hungry Bay. The figure, here given, is from one of the original types. Albunea oxycephala Miers. Plate VIII. Figure 1. A large and perfect living specimen of this tine species was dug out of the sandy beach, between tides, near Hungry Hay, February, 1901, by Mr. T. G. Gosling, and presented to us. The photograph, here reproduced, was from this specimen. Xo other example was found. It is probably rare at this season of the year, but like Hippa, it may be more common in summer. Its color, in life, was A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 19 yellowish white, or about the color of the shell-sand in which it lives. Tozeuma Carolinensis Kingsley. Tozeuma Carolinensis Kingsley, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., 1878, pp. 90, 328, 1879, p. 413, pi. xiv, fig. 8 ; Amer. Naturalist, xxxiii, p. 715, fig. 8, 1899. A small, slender and delicate shrimp. Rostrum long, flat, and nar- row, its edge nearly straight above, without teeth, above or below but with a fine spinule at the base, back of the eyes ; at tip, which is subacute, there are fine spinules, and hair-like ones below. Chelipeds much shorter than the other legs, with a short swollen claw and a short, round carpus. Second pereipods much longer and more slender, with a small chela and a short carpus. Other legs long and slender, not chelate ; eye-stalks are short, swollen at base. Dredged in three fathoms, on a soft weedy bottom, in Castle Harbor, May, 1901. Thor Floridanus Kingsley. Thor Floridanus Kingsley, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1878, p. 95; op. cit., 1879, p. 421, pi. xiv, fig. 6; Arner. Naturalist, xxxiii, p. 718, fig. 20, 1899. A small, stout-bodied, smooth shrimp, with large conspicuous black eyes, on, stout stalks, and a short rostrum, not quite reaching the tips of the eyes, and having four or five acute denticles on the sloping upper edge ; but none below. The anterior feet ai'e stouter and shorter than the next pair, with small, rather short chelae. Those of the second pair are decidedly longer and filiform, with minute chela? and a very slender, 5-jointed carpus. The other legs are of about the same length, but stouter and subequal. The body and legs are translucent whitish with minute specks of orange-red ; eye-stalks, antennal scales, and outer maxillipeds tinged with orange in formalin (this color was not noted in the living specimens). Eggs rather large, not very numerous, orange in formalin. Dredged in " The Reach," in two to thi-ee fathoms, shell-sand and mud, May 5th, 1901. Two females with eggs. G-nathophyllum Americamim Guerin. Gnathophyllum Americanum Guerin, in La Sagra's Hist. I. Cuba, vol. vii, p. xx ; atlas, vol. viii, pi. ii, f. 14, 1857. Verrill, Arner. Journ. Sci., vol. xi, p. 328 (note), April, 1901 ; Pontonidce, sp., these Trans., x, p. 579. 20 A. E. Verrill — Addition* to the Fauna of the Bermudas. The carapax is smooth, curiously banded with black and yellow. In the egg-bearing female it is much swollen laterally. The first and second legs are chelate. The first leg is smaller and somewhat shorter ; its carpus is elongated and elavate, longer than the chela. The second leg is much shorter and rather larger, and its chela is strong but not much enlarged ; carpus shorter than chela (about one-half as long) ; hand much longer than claw. Other legs simple, slender, subequal, the last two rather longer. Rostrum short, ob- liquely truncated ; the tip is acute and reaches almost to the end of the ocular peduncle, or to the base of the eye ; basal part of the upper edge is short and straight, smooth ; it then slopes rapidly to the tip, with about five close teeth. Eye-peduncles project straight forward, and are of moderate length ; a spine is situated below and back of its base and above the base of the antenna. The edge of the carapax is cut away at the bases of the antennas and then extends forward. Abdomen is swollen and the edges overlap in an angle below it, so as to conceal the cluster of eggs. Color, in life, is conspicuous and characteristic. The carapax and abdomen are covered with many narrow, transverse bands of bright yellow and black of about equal width. The telson is pale yellow with basal and terminal spots of orange. Antennae purplish blue ; eye-stalks light yellow ; legs pale yellow, each with two dark blue bands edged with orange ; chelipeds with a single, blue carpal band, edged with orange ; chelae pale yellow. This curious species, of which only a few poor specimens have been previously recorded from Bermuda (Amer. Journ. Sci., xi, p. 328, 1901), was taken alive at Hungry Bay, April 5th, 1901, by A. H. Verrill, who made a colored sketch of it. This specimen is a female carrying a large cluster of eggs. STOMATOPODA. Pseudosquilla ciliata Miers. I'seurfosqitillii cilinta Miers. Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. V, vol. v, p. 108, pi. iii, figs. 7, 8, 1880. Brooks, Voy. Chall.. xvi, pp. 53-55. pi. xv, fig. 10, 1886. Eigelow, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., xvii, p. 499, 1894. Rankin, Annals N. York Acad. Sci., xii, p. 545, 1899. P. stylifera Von Martens (t. Miers). The color of this species is quite variable, like that of Gonodacty- lus chiragra, with which it is often associated. Frequently the colors are imitative of the sandy bottom, the back being variegated or specked with white on a gray <>r pale yellow ground; in other cases A. E. Yerrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 21 it is dull yellowish green or dark olive-green, but nearly always there is a pale median dorsal stripe of light gray or whitish, and usually a similar, but less distinct, stripe on each side. Frequently there are three pairs of blackish spots ; one pair on the thorax, one on the first abdominal segment, and another at the base of the telson. It was not uncommon, swimming near the bottom, in shallow water at Hungry Bay and at Long Bird Island. It was also found in cavi- ties in loose stones, below low-tide. Clusters of its eggs were found in such cavities, April 19th; they were greenish yellow and resemble those of G. chiragra, which were found at the same time. This species resembles the latter in form and appearance, but it is usually larger and swims more freety, so that most of our specimens were taken with a hand-net, while swimming. It was not taken by our party in 1898, for lack of information as to its habits. It can be distinguished at once from G. chiragra by its lacking the bulbous enlargement of the chelipeds. It has been recorded from various parts of the Indo-Pacific region, including the Hawaiian Is., and also from the West Indies. ARTHROSTRACA. Cyamus fascicularis V., sp. nov. Sperm -whale Louse. Plate VIII. Figure 4. Specimens of a slender-bodied Cyamus, which is probably a new species, were taken from the body of a young sperm whale, taken off Bermuda and brought to St. George's for exhibition, in April. This species is much more slender than those of the right whales and allied cetaceans. The two branchial segments are about as wide as the following ones, and bear fascicles of small, short, some- what unequal branchia?, scarcely longer than the segments. There are about 10 to 12 branchial filaments in each of the four groups. The first segment is consolidated with the 'head, which is narrow and rather long, with conspicuous eyes. Antenna? are about f the length of the head. First pair of legs small, beneath the second. The hands of the second pair are not much swollen, and have two strong denticles, besides a similar one at the distal angle of the carpus. The three posterior feet have a recurved denticle on the disl ;i 1 angle of the carpus. Color, yellowish white ; branchiae have small black spots. The specimens described are females. No males were taken. Length of body and head, 9 ,mn ; greatest breadth of body, 3.5 mi ". 22 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. Orchestia agilis Smith. Keport U. S. Fish Com. for 1871 and 1872, I, p. 555 [261], pi. iv, fig. 14, 1873. This abundant New England Amphipod occurs in equal abundance at Bermuda, under deca} r ing sea-weeds at high-tide mark, on all the shores. CIRRIPEDIA. Balanus declivis Darwin, var. cuspidatus, nov. Balanus declivis Darwin, Mon. Cirripedia, ii, p. 275. pi. vii, figs. 4o-4d, 1854. (West Indies.) Our specimens differ as a variety from the typical form described by Darwin, in having the summit of the rostrum divided into 4 or 6 acute denticles ; it is very convex and considerably incurved. The summit of the carina is bilobed by a narrow incision. The base is membranous and very obliquely placed, owing to the downward pro- longation of the rostrum, as in the type. Long Bird Island, on the flats, imbedded in a blackish, massive keratose sponge (Spongia, sp.), which often lives half buried in the calcareous sand at low tide, and which also harbors a small Alpheus and several isopod crustaceans. This is a very singular barnacle, remarkable for the peculiar oblique membranous base, and the pointed basal end of the rostrum, which are characters developed to suit its mode of life, imbedded up to its aperture in sponges. The type was from the West Indies, in sponges. Tetraclita porosa (Gm.) Darwin. Darwin, Mon. Cirripedia, ii, p. 330, pi. x, figs. 1-lm, 1854. This is the common, small, sessile barnacle found on the rocks between tides, with the general appearance of some species of Balanus. It can easily be distinguished by the 4 -parted shell. Catophragmus imbricatus Sowerby. Sowerby, Genera of Recent and Fossil Shells, Plate. Darwin, Mo nog. Cirrip., ii, p. 490, 1854. Plate VIII. Figures 8, 9. Several specimens of this interesting barnacle were found on littoral rocks. They are all young (about ."> to 8 mm in diameter) and agree well with the young one described by Darwin, from Antigua. The eight primary mural plates are pointed and surrounded and partially concealed by about three alternating whorls of smaller, pointed plates, rapidly decreasing in size exteriorly. The opercular A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermuda*. 23 scuta are strongly concentrically ribbed and have a deep, median radial sulcus. The base is calcareous, but thin. The color is pure white. MOLLUSCA. CEPHALOPODA. Loligo Pealei (Lesueur) Bv. Squid. Loligo Pealei Verrill, Annual Report U. S. Fish Corn, for 1879 [pp. 132-161], plates xxvi to xxxii, 1882 ; Verrill, these Trans., vol. v, 1879, pp. 308-340, pi. xxix, figs. 1-4, pi. xxxvii, figs. 1-3, pi. xxxix, fig. 4 ; pi. xl ; pi. xlv, figs. 3, 4. A single specimen of this species, about 6 inches long, was found floating and nearly dead at Long Bird Island, near the shore, April, 1901. Ommastreph.es Bartramii (Les.) D'Orb. Flying Squid. Sthenoteuthis Bartramii Verrill, these Trans., v, pp. 223,288, 1881; Annual Report IT. S. Fish Com. for 1879 [pp. 112-114], 1882. I was told by the fishermen that schools of the flying squid ( 0. Bartramii) are often seen, and that it is sometimes used for bait. In this connection, it is of much interest to record that among large numbers of the shells of Spirida Peronii, cast up on the beach at Elbow Bay, March 10th, several were found by A. H. Verrill with portions of the flesh still attached. Two of these were preserved in formalin, with the remnants of the animal. This proves that this species lives not far away from that shore, and it may be abundant just outside the reefs, in rather deep water. GASTROPODA. Tectibraxchiata. Dolabrifera ascifera (Rang) Morch. Aplysia (Dolabella) ascifera Rang, Hist. Nat. Aplys., p. 51, pi. iv, figs. 7-9. Dolabrifera ascifera Morch, Mai. Bl., xxii, p. 176. Sowerby, Conch. Icon., xvi, pi. i, figs. 6o, 6b. Pilsbry, Man. Conchology, xvi, pt. 63, p. 124, pi. xxxiv, figs. 17, 19, 20. 29 ; pi. lxv, figs. 10, 11. Berg., Verh. k. k. Zool. Bot, Gesellsch., Wien, xxii, 1872, p. 441, pi. v, figs. 25-29; pi. vi, figs. 1-10, anatomy. Plate II. Figures 6a, 6b. Plate III. Figure 2. Plate IV. Figure 12. A rather small, ovate, light-colored species, the body covered with small, low, rounded verrucse ; the head with small papillae. ■24: .I.E. Verrill — Additions to tht Fauna of the Bermudas. Body depressed, broadly rounded posteriorly ; foot broad, the edges t li in and undulated. Mantle-lobe over the gill-cavity is short, leaving an open ^inus at each end of the cavity. Tentacles and rhino- phores about equal in length and similarly folded, the tentacles broader or more expanded distally. Color of upper surface pale yellowish gray and brown, or light fawn-color, mottled with yellowish white ; head paler. Under side i if foot blue with white spots. Length, 60 mm , in life ; breadth, about 30 mm . The shell is narrow, oblong anteriorly, elongated, with a much produced beak, which is tapered but blunt. The sinus is slightly concave and about -^ the total length of the shell, ending in a very obtuse angle. The anterior and inner margins are nearly parallel, narrowing slightly anteriorly ; the anterior edges obliquely truncate, with rounded angles. Hungry Bay, April 5, 1901, under stones at extreme low-tide. Two specimens found together, as if breeding. (A. H. V.) Dolabrifera virens V., sp. nov. Plate II. Figures 4a, 4&, 5a, ob. Plate IV. Figure 11. Fig. 1. — Dolabrifera virens V. About -J natural size. A rather large, yellowish green species, covered with small, elon- gated, conical, acute or distally branched papilla?. Body broad-ovate, broader and well rounded posteriorly ; the whole upper surface of the body and head is covered with conical papillae, 1 to 2 mm long, part of which are acute at tip and part ai*e divided at the end into 2 to 4 small branches. Rhinophores shorter and much smaller than the tentacles, deeply folded and enlarged at the ends. Tenlacles very large, elongated, with broadly expanded ends, the edges undulated and thin. Mantle-lobe rather small, nearly semicircular, leaving a small open sinus at each end of the branchial cavity. Color above, in life, .lull yellowish green, with ill-defined blotches of pale brownish, and with white spots ; the papilla? are mostly lighter and more yellow ; margin pale bluish with white specks ; under A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 25 surface olive-green, spotted with white. Rhinophores green, with white spots and edges. Length, in life, up to 100 mm ; breadth, about 50 mm . The shell is firm, calcareous, rather oblong, with the beak produced and grooved or sometimes spoon-shaped, being concavely excavated ; the sinus is incurved and has the inner margin thickened ; anterior end obliquely truncated and angular ; a thin, high, median, vertical crest or keel runs about ^ of the length, on the inside. Left margin nearly straight or slightly incurved. The outer surface is faintly radially ribbed. The shell varies considerably in form in the several examples examined, and especially in the ratios of length to breadth, as shown in the 'two figures given. The beak may be acute or spoon- shaped ; in one it was wholly lacking, due apparently to injury and partial repair. In one specimen the shell was in two parts, having been broken before death and only slightly repaired. Hungry Bay, under stones at low tide, April 5, 1901, 5 specimens. (A. H. V.) Another specimen was taken in May by Mr. W. G. VanXame. Tethys (Aplysia) morio V., sp. now Plate III. Figures 5, 5a. A very large species, over a foot long, dark umber-brown or nearly black, without definite spots, but with black stripes on the head, and with very large broadly overlapping lateral flaps. Body thick and stout, swollen, very obtuse posteriorly. Head and neck thick and stout (but perhaps not seen fully extended). Lateral natatorial flaps very wide and overlapping about half their breadth, entirely free posteriorly, and extending to the end of the short foot. Rhinophores rather small and short, conical. Tentacles large and very broad, foliaceous, with thin expanded margins. Color of body and exterior of flaps very dark umber-brown or brownish black, with few obscure dusky blotches on the sides of foot and with a purplish tinge along the edges of the flaps. Head, above and on the sides, covered with a number of narrow, purplish black, longitudinal stripes. Length, in life, when not fully extended, 400 mm ; height, U5 ,um . The shell is very thin, transparent, pale yellow, oblong-ovate, obtusely rounded anteriorly, with the posterior sinus long and only slightly incurved ; beak rather prominent, scarcely incurved, with a reflexed membranous edge, which also extends along both posterior margins. In the formalin preparation there is no calcareous layer present. The surface is concentrically undulated and faintly longi- 26 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. tudinally grooved. Length to breadth as 3 : 2. Length, 60 mm ; breadth, 40 mm . No mantle-pore could be found, nor any distinct pore for the "opaline gland"; the latter probably discharges through many minute pores. A single specimen was found in Castle Harbor, March 21, cast upon the beach but still living and not damaged. (A. H. V.) This species resembles T. megaptera V., in the great size of its lateral flaps, but differs very decidedly in its colors and other char- acters. Tethys ( Aplysia) tarda V. , sp. nov. Plate III. Figures 4, 4«, 4fr. A rather small, short, thick species, with relatively narrow side- flaps and short rhinophores ; dusky yellowish brown, irregularly streaked with darker brown or blackish on the head and sides. Body ovate, obtuse posteriorly, the foot not produced. Head small, emarginate ; neck short and thick. Rhinophores short, sub- conical, tapered. Tentacles larger and rather longer, wide at base, deeply folded. Side-flaps unusually narrow, scarcely meeting over the back, and apparently not capable of being used for swimming, the edges undulated and free to the posterior ends, which extend nearly to the short tip of the foot. Branchial siphon elongated, expanded distally. Mantle over shell with a small, simple, nearly central pore, often with white streaks, or rows of white spots, radi- ating from it. General color usually is dark dusky brown or umber-brown. The ground-color is a dull, dark yellowish brown on the sides and head, but irregularly blotched, striped and streaked with dark, dusky brown or sepia. The streaks on the head mostly take the form of narrow lines, those on the sides of the body are broader and more irregular, and are united by transverse lines, so as to form a coarse, irregular reticulation. Edges of side-flaps and siphon bluish gray with a purplish tinge, or grayish white. Inner surface of flaps dark brown with dark gray blotches. Shell-mantle dark brown, irregularly spotted with grayish white, some of the spots usually arranged radially around the central pore. Siphon similar in color. Tenta- cles and rhinophores light brown, with transverse patches or lines of dark brown. Length, in life, 62 mm ; height, 30 mm . The shell is thin, translucent, pale yellow, ovate-elliptical, rather narrow, ratios as 3.2 : 2 ; the posterior end is produced, with the A. F. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 27 beak rather acute, not incurved, but with a small, narrow, reflexed terminal and marginal fold ; posterior sinus rather long, decidedly incurved, ending anteriorly in a broadly rounded angle ; the anterior half of the shell forms about half of a regular ellipse. In the forma- lin preparation there is a thin, white posterior calcareous layer, that has mostly fallen off. The surface is slightly undulated concentri- cally. Length, 32 mm ; breadth, 20 mra . Cony Island, buried in sand nearly out of sight, April 4 ; also at Long Bird Island, in shallow water, in May, buried in sand, with only the back slightly exposed. (A. H. V.) This species seems to live habitually nearly buried in sand. It is very sluggish and probably cannot swim freely, at least in confine- ment it made no effort to swim. Its back, as exposed, resembles in color a keratose sponge found in the same localities and partly buried in the sand. In color and form this species somewhat resembles T. Floridensis Pilsbry (Man. Conch., xvi, p. S2, pi. xxxvii, figs. 15-19), but the latter is described as having the side-flaps " ample," while in the present species they are unusually small. The shell of Floridensis is wide, and quite different in form, being nearly as broad as long, while in our species it is unusually narrow. In respect to the form of the shell, T. Braziliana D'Orb. is much like this, but it has large side-flaps, a tubular mantle-pore, a long neck, and other differential characters. Tethys dactylomela Rang. Verrill, these Trans., x, p. 545, 1900. Plate III. Figure 3. This was very common this year on the shores of Castle Harbor, breeding in April. Its eggs were laid in clusters of long thin, terete, yellow strings, attached by one end to weeds ; the eggs are very small and very numerous, in 6 to 8 rows. The colors were generally as ordinarily described, the ground-color varying from light yellow to dark olive-green. A few that were nearly albinos were seen, and one that was melanistic, the ground-color being so dark that the round black spots were barely visible. Placobranchopsis niveus V., sp. nov. Plate IV. Figure 10. A very small, nearly pure white species. Mantle broad-elliptical, slightly emarginate anteriorly, and with a distinct lateral branchial 28 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. sinus ; its surface is minutely papillose and rough. Head broad, with the angles somewhat produced into short, broad tentacles. Rhinophores stout, rather long, strongly folded, of nearly uniform breadth, obtuse. Foot wider than the mantle, and only slightly longer, the edges thin and undulated, the anterior angles a little pro- duced but obtuse. Gill plumose, attached for about half its length, white. The mantle contains spicules, but, as preserved in formalin, it is soft and rather thick. Color pale grayish white or translucent white, specked with flake- white, and w T ith a purplish gray visceral organ showing through on the back. Length, in life, lG mm . Harrington Sound, in shallow water, on the under side of a coral [Isophyllia dijisacea), April 9th ; also in Castle Harbor, low-tide, under stones, in May. Rvmcina inconspicua V., sp. nov. Plate III. Figure 6. A very small dark green and brown species. Head bilobed and emarginate in front with a pair of small, round black eyes near the front edge. Mantle oblong or subelliptical, evenly rounded poster- riorly. Foot wider than mantle, w r ith thin undulated margins, well rounded posteriorly. Gill small with fine filaments situated under the right mantle-border, near the posterior end. Color of mantle very dark green or greenish brown with a narrow orange border ; upper side of foot light green, specked with white and edged with a narrow orange or violet line. Length, 2 to 3 mm in life. Castle Harbor, at low-tide, under stones, in May. Several speci- mens. NlJDIBRANCHIATA. Elysia ornata (Swainson) Ver. Thallepus ornatus Swainson, Treatise Malac, pp. 250, 359, 1840, from a draw- ing, (West Indies. ) Dalabrifera (?) ornata Pilsbry, Man. Conchology, vol. xvi, p. 126. Plate IV. Figure 5. This beautiful species was originally imperfectly described, as indicate 1 above, from the "West Indies. The description was from a colored drawing only, and was so imperfect that the place of the species in the Mollusca has never been settled. The colors, as A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 29 described, are so characteristic and striking that there can be no doubt of its specific identity with our specimens. The body, in life, is usually yellowish olive-green, but it varies from light yellowish green to dark olive-green ; both surfaces of the flaps and the sides of the body are finely specked with black and flake-white dots, often appearing to be slightly raised above the sur- face. The side flaps are wide with thin flexible and usually undu- lated margins, which are elegantly bordered with a narrow bright orange band, outside of which the edge is marked by a black line. The folded rhinophores are large and long, with the posterior side orange and the edge black. There is often a white patch on the top of the head. Under side of foot paler green than the body. This interesting species was found pairing and spawning in con- siderable numbers on the shore of Castle Harbor in March, by A. H. Verrill. It occurred mostly on a curious bright green alga ( Caulerpa clavifera), on which it laid its eggs in a long coiled ribbon. According to the notes, the egg-band, when first laid, floated freely in the water, being attached only by the proximal end, but it was afterwards cleverly coiled up and attached for its whole length by the parent, before being left to its fate. The species became com- paratively rare in a few days, perhaps retiring into deeper water. Only a very few could be found at the same place after my arrival in April. The last specimens seen occurred April 17th. Elysia subornata V., sp. uov. Plate IV. Figure 4. Head large ; body elongated, acute behind ; neck long in exten- sion. Rhinophores large and long, folded and strongly expanded at the tip. Side flaps large, pointed posteriorly : their outer sur- faces and the sides of the body are covered with small scattered verrucas. Color of body and outside of flaps olive-green, finely mottled with grayish white. Close to the edge there is a very narrow orange- brown line ; the extreme edge is darker brown. Inner surface of flaps dark green with pale dendritic and inosculating vessels. Rhin- ophores marked distally with brown ; more proximally there is a gray patch ; base green specked with gray. Length, up to 25 mm in extension. Castle Harbor, under stones, iu May. Rare. This species is evidently closeh' allied to E. ornata, but the latter was very constant in its markings, in over 200 specimens examined, 30 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. and did not show, in any case, the distinctly, though minutely, papillose surface of this species, which also appeared later and with somewhat different habits. Elysia flava V., sp. nov, Plate IV. Figure 1. Body much elongated in extension ; head relatively small, hilobed in front. Rhinophores rather small, about as long as the breadth of the head, folded but not much expanded distally. Side flaps mod- erately wide, undulated, rounded anteriorly, narrow posteriorly, and extending nearly to tip of the pointed foot. Color of head, neck, rhinophores, back, and foot light yellow, with white specks on the back, and faint dull brown markings back of the head and on the sides of the neck. Outside of the flaps olive- green, specked with white and covered with very minute papilla? ; edges of flaps flake-white, with dendritic branches of white extend- ing inward. Inner surface of flaps are almost black, due to the very dark or blackish green, ai'borescently branched internal organs. Length, about 18 mm while living and in extension. Castle Harbor, at Waterloo, under stones at low-tide, April IV, 1901. Rare. Elysia picta V., sp. nov. Plate IV. Figure 2. A small, very brilliantly colored species. Body rather stout. Head large and neck rather long ; rhinophores long, clavate, and deeply folded ; their length is equal to twice the breadth of the head. Side-flaps large and broad, their edges thin and strongly undu- lated ; they extend posteriorly to the tip of the foot. Color of upper side of head, upper part of sides of neck, and whole of back and inner surface of flaps dark reddish brown, with a purplish spot between anterior ends of -flaps ; front of head bright red; a line of the same red runs back on each side of the neck and along the entire edge of the flaps to the end of the foot ; below this red border there is a band of bright blue ; middle of head and bases of rhinophores light yellow, and this color extends backward as a broad median stripe on the neck, thus forming a cross-shaped mark of yellow, which terminates posteriorly in a blue spot on the neck, and in a blue band on each rhinophore ; on the latter the blue is followed by a brown band, this by a wider red band, while the tip is brown. A blue spot centered with yellow surrounds the genital openings, on the right side of the neck. A. E. Verr ill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 31 O liter surface of lateral flaps olive-green below, becoming yellow- ish above, and nearly white next to the blue submarginal band ; its surface is thickly specked with yellowish white. Length, 16 mm ; length of rhinophores, 3.5 mm . Hungry Bay, April 5, 1901, under stones at low-tide ; two speci- mens, pairing. (A. H. V.) Very rare. This species can be recognized at once by its many brilliant colors, and especially by the marginal bands of red and blue, and by the yellow cross on the head and neck. It can swim freely by means of its large side-flaps. Elysia papillosa V., sp. nov. Plate IV. Figure 3. A small, grayish, distinctly papillose species. Body rather elon- gated in extension ; head large ; neck long ; rhinophores large ; strongly folded and wide at the tips. Side-flaps large, thin, usually with the edges deeply undulated. Whole surface of body, head, and outside of flaps thickly covered with small conical papillse. Color of head, neck, and outside of flaps grayish blue, paler ante- riorly, and spotted with darker gray on the outside of the flaps, and specked with flake-white over the whole surface. Inside of flaps darker ash-gray ; the edges bordered with white. Rhinophores are like the head, but with two indistinct transverse bands of orange- brown on the posterior side. Length, about 12 mm in extension. Hungry Bay, under stones, at a very low-tide, April 5, 1901. (A. H. V.) Rare. This species can swim freely by means of its ample lateral flaps. Lamellidoris aureopuncta V., sp. nov. Plate IV. Figure 9. A very small, nearly white species, with a row of small, round, yellow spots near each lateral edge of the mantle. . Body elliptical, obtuse at both ends. The foot is longer and wider than the mantle ; anteriorly it is subtruncate with obtuse angles, posteriorly it is rather obtuse and not much produced. The mantle is evenly convex, nearly smooth, but hardened by spicules. Rhinophores small, slender, acute, with many oblique plications and no distinct sheath. Gills or 7, simply pinnate, with fine branches, retractile. 32 A. E. Verritt — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. Color of mantle and foot and gills pale, translucent, yellowish white, with whiter specks, due to spicules ; near each lateral margin of the mantle there is a row usually of five small, round, golden yellow spots, to which the name refers. A greenish visceral organ often shows through on the hack. Rhinophores yellowish. Length, 10 mm ; breadth, 5 mm , in life. Harrington Sound, in shallow water, under corals, April 28, 1901. Lamellidoris ininiata V., sp. nov. Plate III. Figure 1. See figure 3, below. A small, bright red, finely papillose species. Head rounded, emarginate in front, with a pair of slender oral tentacles. Body elliptical, strongly convex. Foot thin, wider and much longer than the mantle, its anterior angles produced into folded lobes. Rhino- phores rather large, fusiform or subclavate ; thick and strongly plicated, basal part smooth ; tip naked, acute and white ; no evident sheaths. Gills about eight, rather large, simply pinnate, with fine filaments, retractile. Surface of mantle covered with minute, conical, pointed papillae. Color of mantle bright red or deep orange-red, with an obscure median brownish stripe ; gills and middle of rhinophores darker red, surrounded at base with grayish blue ; the rhinophores are tipped with white. Foot and head paler orange or pinkish. Length of foot, of largest, in extension, 10 mm ; of mantle, 7"5 min ; another was 6 mm long, 3-5 mm broad. Castle Harbor, under stones at low-tide, April 10th and 17th, 1901. Lam 1 11 id oris lactea Ver. These Trans., x, p. 548, 1900. Plate IV. Figures 8a, 8b. A few additional specimens of this rare species were obtained. In these the dorsal surface of the mantle and the sides below it- border were milk-white, spotted and specked with purplish gray or pale lavender, some of the spots near the middle being larger and roundish ; there was a tinge of orange around the bases of the gills and on the low thick sheaths of the rhinophores. The gills arc- rather long, simply pinnate ; about 7 to 9 were counted. The rhinophores are small, conical, dark gray. A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 33 Lamellidoris (?) olivacea V. Doris (?) olivacea Verrill, these Trans., x, p. 548, 1900. Plate IV. Figure 7. A larger and better specimen of this species was obtained this season. The central area of the back, in this example, is covered with small, conical, whitish or grayish papillae. The rhinophores are long, tapered, subacute, with an orange ring at base. The wide undulated mantle-border contains spicules. Chromodoris (?) roseopicta V. These Trans., x. p. 549, pi. lxvi, fig. 1, 1900. mbf it Fig. 2. — Chromodoris roseopicta V., gills in profile, enlarged. 2a. — The same, posterior view of gills. 3. — Lamellidoris miniata V . Head and front part of foot, enlarged. Larger and better specimens of this beautiful species were obtained this year ; they show that some of the characters of the type-speci- men were due to immaturity or imperfect expansion. In the best examples the mantle border is broad, strongly undu- lated, and projects beyond the margins of the foot. The back is everywhere covered with prominent rosy-tipped, rather blunt papilla? ; some of these, larger than the rest, form three rows of 5 or 6 along the back, and these are surrounded at base with bright yellow specks. The rhinophores, in expansion, are clavate-fusiforin, stout, subacute, plicated, bright red, striped with narrow lines of white spots. The gills are large and long, about 24; of these 12 or 14 are simple, long, tapered, pinnate plumes ; behind and within these there is, on each side, a gronp of 5 or 6 smaller divergent plumes, which arise in a subspiral manner from a common stem. The color, in general, is the same as in the type. Harrington Sound, Hungry Bay, Long Bird Island, etc., usually on the under side of a massive, brown keratose sponge (Spongia, sp.) Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XL 3 October, 1901. 34 A. K Verrlll — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. Scyllaea pelagica (Linne). A single large living specimen of this species was found at Long Bird Island, on the flats, in May. Its color was light orange, with a marginal band of deep orange, edged with white around the lateral lobes and along the upper lateral margins of the body ; sides of body were specked with flake-white, but without purple spots. Back of rhinophores deep orange ; edges white. Length, 55' : in m Facelina Goslingii V., sp. nov. Plate IV. Figure 6. Body, in life, when extended, elongated and rather slender, tapered to an acute point posteriorly. Head large, rounded, with a pair of very long, slender, tapered, acute tentacles. Rhinophores much smaller, not half as long, acute, with strong plications on the distal portion, naked near the base. Foot with the anterior angles prolonged into a pair of long, tapered, tentacle-like organs, more than half as long as the true tentacles and similarly colored. Dorsal papillae numerous, long, very slender, fusiform, acute, easily decidu- ous, arranged in numerous (about 10 to 12) double groups along eaph side, leaving a broad naked dorsal region. The anterior groups contain numerous crowded papilla?, in two or more transverse rows ; the posterior groups gradually diminish till the last contain very few papilla?. Color of back pale, translucent, grayish white, with a median stripe of white, edged with narrow red lines, and with a lateral stripe of orange on each side along the bases of the papilla?, which are white crossed by numerous bands of light rose-red or pink. Head white in front, tinged with pink around the mouth and with a median, usually Y-shaped streak of red on the front and extending between the tentacles, and an ocellated, round, blue spot at the upper base of each tentacle ; back of neck with a median blue streak. Tentacles and tentacular processes of foot white proximally, then with a light red band followed by a wide blue distal band. Rhinophores nearly white. Foot edged with blue anteriorly. The odontophore has but a single row of teeth ; these have broad, thick bases and taper rather rapidly to the acute, naked, somewhat incurved tips. There are about 10 to 12 acute serrations on each edge, the distal ones becoming very small. The cutting edges of the jaws are brown and chitons with a submarginal rib ; the two edges form nearly a right angle, when flattened by pressure. A. E. Verrill— Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 35 Length, in life, 35 to 45 mm . Taken in considerable numbers in the mangrove swamp at Hungry Bay, on a filamentous green alga, March 10th, 1901 (A. H. V.). In April (5th) both the alga and the mollusk had disappeared. This is a very handsome and active species. It is difficult to pre- serve entire, for it casts its papillae very readily when irritated in any way. It is named in honor of Mr. T. Goodwin Gosling, of Bermuda, who first discovered it. I have referred it to lacelina with some doubt, for its anatomy has not yet been fully studied. PROSOBRANCHIATA. Volva uniplicata (Sowerby). Ovulum uniplicatum Sowerby, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1848. p. 135. Volva uniplicata Tryon, Amer. Marine Conch., p. 93, pi. ix, fig. 93, 1873. The purple variety of this species was found adhering to a purple specimen of Gorgonia flabellum, from Castle Harbor reefs. PULMONATA. Among the Pulmonata, apparently not before recorded, are the following : Melampus bullimoides Mont. Shore of Hungry Bay. PBlaumeria heteroclita Mont. Shore near Hungry Bay, under stones. Also an undetermined, small, strongly depressed, smooth, helicoid shell, 8 to 10 mm in diameter; the aperture is simple, lunate; lip acute ; umbilicus open and deep, but not very large. Hamilton, in gardens. BIVALVIA. Cardium medium Linne. A single dead specimen of this West Indian species was found in the cavities of a stone fished up from about 100 feet deep, off the outer reefs. ECHINODERMA. Only one species, so far as positively determined, was added to the Echinoderma this year. This was an interesting simple-armed astrophytid {Astroporpa affinis), which was found clinging to a Verrucella from off the outer reefs. Several other species of special interest were obtained, which we did not collect in 1898. 36 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. OPHIUROIDEA. Astroporpa affinis Lutken. Lutken, Addit, ad Hist. Opliiur., II, p. 154, pi. v, figs 5a, 5b, 1859. Four specimens of this rare species were found clinging to the branches of a large gorgonian ( Verrucella grandis V.), brought up from about 100 feet, off the outer reefs, on a fisherman's hook. The color, as dried, after a few days, is light yellowish or grayish-brown on the raised annulations of the arms and ribs, and darker brown on the annular grooves. ASTERIOIDEA. Lnidia clathrata (Say). Asterias clathrata Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. PMlad., v, p. 141, 18*25. Luiclia clpaler beneath. Length, 75 to 100 mm . It occurred in considerable numbers, but it has not yet been studied with care. The terrestrial nemertean (Tetr astern ma agricola W. Suhm) was found common in April, near Hungry Bay, under stones and burrow- ing in the soil like an earthworm. They were from 2 to 4 inches A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 47 long, when extended, but they are said to grow to the length of 6 inches. They are quite active and can be kept alive for a long time in jars of moist earth. They occurred not only near the shore, but on the uplands where the soil was almost dry. The larger ones, in life, were dark grayish brown or slate-color along the back, but the smaller ones were nearly white. ANTHOZOA. ACTINARIA. Cerianthus natans V., sp. nov. Plate IX. Figure 6. Body in extension Avhen swimming, rather long, bulbous or clavate near the base and enlarged rapidly close to the disk. Outer tenta- cles about 38, subequal, tapered, not very long, thin, length usually less than one-half the diameter of the disk ; they appear to form two or three rows. Inner or oral tentacles much smaller and more slender, about 24, apparently forming two series, owing to their alternate positions. Color of body orange-brown, tinged with yellow. Outer tentacles reddish brown, crossed by five or six bands of white ; disk yellowish around bases of tentacles with a brown spot in front of the base of each ; central part of disk bluish graj*. Oral tentacles nearly white; mouth yellow, with lines of red running in from between the oral tentacles. Length, in life 110 mm ; diameter of column, 10 to 22 mm ; of disk and tentacles, 45 mm , length of outer tentacles, about 10 mm . Cony Island, floating free among alga?, March 26, 1901. (A. H. V.) This species, when kept in confinement, could swim about actively by expelling water from the pore in the bulbous base. Only one example was taken. The tentacles are much shorter than usual in this group. Epicystis osculifera (Lesneur) Yer. Verrill, these Trans., x, p. 556, 1900. Plate VII. Figure 1. Numerous specimens of this elegant actinian were obtained, some of them of large size. These render it still more probable that this form is distinct from E. crucifera, for it seems to have a character- istic pattern of colors. 48 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermuda*. The column is usually streaked with light red and pale pink, much as in crucifera, but the tentacles are longitudinally striped with green and white, one of the green stripes on the outside and two on the inside being dark green, while the lateral ones are light green ; there is often an inner median streak or spot of yellow or orange ; the bases are surrounded by dark green lines which run in on the disk as radial lines. The disk is generally lined or striped radially with green and white, variegated with orange and dark green spots. The lips are bright yellow, edged with green. The suckers are bright red and form short rows on the upper part. There are usually only 6 or 12 of the primary and secondary ten- tacles that have more or less evident transverse raised ridges on the inner face of the tentacles. One of these usually occupies the inner end of each of the six infoldings of the disk. It is sometimes 150 mm or more in diameter. Hungry Bay ; Castle Harbor ; Harrington Sound. It lives between stones and in crevices of rocks and corals. Lebrunia Dance (D. & M.) Ver. Verrill, Amer. Journ. Sci., vii, p. 46, fig. 15, 1899. These Trans., x, p. 555, pi. lxvii, fig. 3 ; pi. lix, fig. 1, 1900. Plate VI. Figure 1. A number of large specimens of this species were obtained. They varied considerably in color, but none were distinctly green like those obtained in 1898. The column, tentacles, and disk were generally light yellowish brown or fawn-color. The branchioe were usually darker brown, often light umber-brown or chocolate-brown. The tentacles often had pale tips. The gills in extension were usually much longer than the tentacles ; they were much branched arborescently, but they had few or no distinct rounded acrorhagi. In this last character and in color they differed decidedly from the I 898 specimens, described and figured by me in 1900, and agreed nearly with L. neglecta, as described by McMurrich, from the Bahamas. Phellia simplex V., sp. nov. Column slender, elongated, often vermiform, changeable, covered with a closely adherent, brownish or dirty epidermis, except close to each end. Tentacles about 24 ; inner ones slender, tapered but little, longer and larger than the outer ones, and equal to the diameter of the disk ; outer ones small. A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 49 Color of disk usually buff, with white radii ; tentacles translucent buff with a broad proximal patch of flake-white, beyond which there are two or three transverse bands of dark reddish brown. The lowest of these bands is W-shaped ; the others are simple annula- tions. Length, in life, 18 to 24 mm ; diameter, 4 to 5 mm . Long Bird Island, under stones at low-tide, April 19th ; also at Waterloo, Castle Harbor. This species has the aspect of an Edtcardsia, but its basal disk is well developed. Phellia rufa Ver. These Trans., x, p. 557, pi. lxviii, fig. 2, 1900. Plate VI. Figure 5. Numerous fine specimens of this species were found under stones in several localities, but it was particularly abundant and large at Waterloo, Castle Harbor, where the tidal streams from the adjacent caves flow out of the stony shores between tides. At the latter locality specimens very much larger than the types were obtained. Some of these, in life, were 75 to 100 ram long, and 20 to 36 mm in diameter of body, with a correspondingly increased number of tentacles, which were often 96 to 120 ; the inner 12 are often erect and decidedly the largest The form of the bodjr is very changeable. In nearly all cases the column is a deep brownish red or dull salmon-brown, and the tough epidermis, which adheres very closely and extends nearly to the tentacles, is wrinkled in contraction. The disk and tentacles vary much in color, but are nearly always hand- somely variegated with red, salmon-brown, or purplish brown, and flake-white. The tentacles are generally banded with flake-white and often they have two or three W-shaped bands of dark purplish brown or reddish brown. The disk has radial stripes or spots of the same brown colors, alternating with white, or the brown spots may be V-shaped. Aiptasia tagetes (D. & M.) Andres. Plate VI. Figure 6. Verrill, these Trans., x, p. 557, pi. lxvii, fig. 2, 1900. This species was found very common in 1901, and numerous marked variations in its colors were observed. Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XL 4 October, 1901. 50 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the fauna of the Bermudas. The most prolific locality was the mangrove swamp at " Fairy Lands," where it occurred in great numbers, in April, attached to the fallen and floating mangrove leaves and twigs. At this place numerous color-varieties occurred. Many of the specimens had one or both of the directive tentacles longer than the rest and partially or wholly flake-white ; a band of white also crossed the disk in line with these tentacles. The other tentacles and disk were variously spotted and barred with flake-white ; most commonly the ground- color of the tentacles was pale umber-brown or greenish, crossed by two to five unequal half bands and crescents of flake-white, on the inside. One nearly albino specimen occurred at Waterloo. This had a pale flesh-colored, translucent column, with white specks above. The long, slender, acute tentacles were pale yellowish, crossed on the inside, mostly near the middle, with 8-12 crescent-shaped, flake- white spots and intermediate specks ; disk pale, with radial flake-white specks and spots. Anemonia elegans V., sp. nov. Plate VI. Figure 4. Column smooth, in ordinary expansion short, cylindrical, expanded at the base and summit; basal disk large, with undulated edges. Tentacles not retractile, numerous, in three or four rows, the inner ones much the longer, about equal to the diameter of the disk, slender, but little tapered, obtuse. Disk usually depressed with the mouth raised, but it is very changeable. Color of column pale, brownish yellow or light fawn-color, some- times light orange ; tentacles light yellow or pale orange-yellow, with light purple or pink tips, edged below with whitish, and with a red basal line on each side and behind the base, and a triangular spot of whitish on the inner base in some cases ; lips light red or scarlet ; inside of mouth darker red, with two whitish gouidial grooves ; disk yellowish, with narrow radial red or brown lines. Height of column, in life, 12 to 15 mm ; diameter, 10 to I2 mm ; length of longest tentacles, 10 to 12 mm . Cony Island, March 26, 1901 (A. H. V.). Castle Harbor, under stones at low-tide, in May. Rare. In color this resembles some varieties of Condylactis passifora, but it has much more numerous and smaller tentacles than the young of that species of similar size. A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 51 Actinia melanaster V., sp. nov. Plate VI. Figures 2, 3. Column in life rather short and broad, nearly cylindrical, expanded at base, but probably capable of much greater elongation. Tenta- cles numerous (about 76), retractile, very unequal, forming three or more rows, the inner 24 much the largest and longest, tapered, acute, arising well in from the edge of the disk ; outer ones not half as long and much smaller. Two gonidial grooves ; lips raised. Color of column, in life, dark reddish brown ; disk with a large, dark brown, stellate central area, with about 24 tapered radii, which run out between the bases of the inner tentacles, and with narrow^ pale radial lines ; outer portion of disk, between the brown radii, and inner bases of tentacles light yellow. Tentacles, except at base, dark reddish brown, with a central lighter reddish brown stripe. Mouth red, the lips edged with bluish white. Specimens preserved in formalin have the following characters : Tentacles about 96, long, tapered, acute, strongly sulcated in for- malin preparations, length of inner ones about half the diameter of the disk. They are not very unequal; the inner 24 are, however, larger and longer than the rest and set in considerably from the border of the disk, and rather swollen near the base. They form five cycles or more, and seem to stand in three or four rows. More or less of the outer ones are imperfectly developed and short. Below the tentacles there is a distinct fosse and a marginal fold. On the latter there is a circle of about 24 larger acrorhagi, alternating with smaller ones. The larger ones are prominent, verruciform, and slightly lobulate on the outer or lower side, but apparently not perforated. The column below the margin, as preserved, is strongly vermiculate and sulcate, with about 96 sulci, alternately larger and smaller. The ridges between the sulci are crossed irregularly and closely by strong ti-ansverse and oblique or zigzag wrinkles, giving them a vermicu- late appearance. No distinct suckers could be seen. Mouth has two strong gonidial grooves and numerous lateral folds. Diameter of disk as preserved, 25 mm ; height of column, 20 min ; length of tentacles, 10-15 mm . Diameter of the column in life, 20 to 30 mm ; its length, 40 to 60 mra ; diameter of disk and tentacles, 40 to 5<) mm . Several specimens of this species were found at the entrance of Flagg's Inlet, deeply buried in crevices of the ledges, from which they could not be extracted except by cutting away the rock. (A.*H. V.) 52 A. E Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. Condylactis passiflora (Duch. and Mich.). Duchass. and Michelotti, Corall. Antilles, Supl., p. 3.1, pi. v, fig. 7. Verrill, these Trans., x, p. 555, 1900. Some additional color-varieties of this very common species were observed this year. The most remarkable one was a large specimen, over a foot in diameter when expanded, found at " Sans Souci," in the interstices of a sea-wall. In this the column was light red, as usual, but the tentacles were pea-green with bright blue tips, instead of the usual pink, magenta, or violet tips. The tentacles, as seen expanded, were large and swollen, three to four inches long, with enlarged, obtuse or swollen tips. Some pale or nearly albino specimens were also observed. The tips of the tentacles frequently lack the bright colors.* Palythoa grandiflora Ver. Verrill, these Trans., x, p. 564, pi. lxviii, fig. 6, 1901. Plate VII. Figure 2. Very extensive colonies of this species, several feet across, were found between tides, at Waterloo, in the course of the tidal streams. These were nearly uniform in color. The disk was generally orange- brown or dark yellowish brown, with paler radii and tentacles. A small portion of one of these groups was photographed while living and expanded, and this photograph is here reproduced. GORGONIACEA. Eunicea atra V., sp. nov. Plate IX. Figures 4, 5. A black, rather large, much-branched species with the branches dichotomously divided, subparallel, often crooked, and very vari- able in size on the same specimen. The edges of the large calicles are only a little raised, and generally have a small, acute, angular lower lip, which may be obsolete. Most of the branches arise from near the base ; many are rather long and cylindrical ; others are more or less clavate, some are tapered and not more than two-thirds as large as the average. The calicles are variable in size and form ; the larger ones are usually elliptical and rather close together. Height, 12 to 16 inches (300 to 400 nim ); breadth of the clusters of branches, about the same; diameter of branches, 10 to [2 mm ; of calicles, 0.5 to 1.5 mm . A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 53 When living the color is black, and when first taken from the sea the water, mixed with mucus, that drips from the branches is almost ink-black and imparts a black stain to one's clothes and hands. This black coloring matter gives a black color to a large quantity of alcohol or formalin solution. When dried the coral is black or dark umber. The polyps are yellowish brown, large and long in expansion. They contract rather slowly, but completely. The spicules of the ccenenchyma (pi. ix) are mostly rather large and variable in form; the most characteristic are moderately stout, roughly warted spindles, sometimes with a side-lobe or branch ; others are short thick spindles ; with, these are many others of smaller size. This species was taken in about eight feet of water at " The Reach," where there is a rather strong tidal current. The size and form of the calicles and slight development of their lower lip will distinguish this from the allied species. Verrucella grandis V., sp. nov. Plate IX. Figures 1, 2, 3. This is a large, dichotomously branched, arborescent, yellow species, that grows at least five feet high. The trunk is 12 to 16 ram in diameter, and the axis is round, very hard, calcareous, light brownish yellow. The ccenenchyma is rather thin, but hard, deep ocher-yellow, or inclining to orange-yellow. It forks repeatedly, so that there are numerous long and rather slender terminal branches, 12 to 18 inches long (300 to 450 mm ) and 2 to 4 mm in diameter. The branches are somewhat flattened and occasionally squarish, with a sulcation along each side. The verruca?, on the trunk and larger branches, are low and broadly rounded, about 1 to l-5 mm in diameter, crowded in 3 or 4 rows on each side ; on the branchlets they are mostly in two alternating rows on each side and are more elevated ; their wider bases are in contact ; summit rounded. The spicules of the ccenenchyma (figure 3) are orange-colored, and small ; the most abundant are short, strongly warted, double spindles ; with these are many short forms, not much longer than broad, with papillose ends ; several other smaller forms also occur. A single large specimen, five feet high, was brought up from the depth of about 100 feet, outside the North Reefs, on a fisherman's hook, May, 1901. 54 . 1. A'. Verrili — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. POLYZOA. The following additional species of bryozoa have been noticed in the collections made this year. The nomenclature followed is that of Smitt, (Florida Bryozoa, L872). See also Amathia GoodeiYer., described last spring (Amer. Journ. Science, xi, p. 329, Apr., 1901), but not figured. Idmonea Atlantica Forbes. Smitt. Florida Bryozoa, p. 6, pi. ii. fig. 7. Off the North Reefs, 16 fathoms. Mollia patellaria (Moll, as Eschara). Mollia patellaria Smitt. op. cit., p. 12, pi. ii. fig. 72. Off the North Reefs, It; fathoms. Porina subsulcata Smitt. Op. tit., p. 28, pi. vi. figs. 136-140. With the preceding. Porina plagiopora (Bask). Lepralia plagiopora Busk, Crag Polyzoa, p. 44, pi. iv, fig. 5. Porina plagiopora Smitt, op. cit., p. 30. pi. vi, figs. 134. 135. With the preceding. Anarthropora minuscula Smitt. 1807. Op. cit.. p. 31. pi. vi. fig. 141. With the preceding. Gemellipora glabra Smitt. Op. cit., p. 37, pi. xi. figs. 207-210. With the preceding. Hippothoa mucronata Smitt. Op. cit.. p. 45, pi. viii, fig. 169. On under side of corals, shallow water. Lepralia edax Busk. Celle\ ora edax Busk. Crag Polyzoa. p. 59, pi. ix. fig. 6, pi. xxii. fig. 3. / pralia edax Smitt, op. cit.. p. 68, pi. xi, figs. 220-225. On under side of corals, shallow water. Cellepora avicularis. Smitt, op. cit., p. 53. pi. ix, figs. 193-198. Off North Reefs, on VerruceUa, 16 fathoms. A. E. Verrlll — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 55 ENTEROPNEUSTA. Balanoglossus, sp. A species of Balanoglossus was found this year burrowing in the sand-flats on the north side of Long Bird Island. It was about 150 mm in length. Its color was ocher-yellow to dull orange-brown. Its structure has not yet been studied with care. No species of this group has hitherto been reported from the Bermudas. LEPTOCARDIA. Branchiostoma Caribceum Sund. Lancelet. Sundevall, Olfers, Vet. Akad. Forhandl., xii, 1853. Andrews, Synopsis Studies Biol. Lab., Johns Hopkins Univ., v, 4, p. 240, 1893. Jord. and Everm., Fishes Amer., i, p. 3, 1896. Hitherto no locality for this Amphioxus has been known at Ber- muda except on the west side of the inlet at the Flatts, where it was first discovered by Mr. Goode, in 1876. This year we dredged it on Figure 4. — Lancelet {Branchiostoma Caribceum). *]%• a bottom of hard shell-sand and mud, in Castle Harbor, about one- half a mile north of Castle Island, in 15 to 20 feet of water. This is also one of the localities for Strombus gigas. Another similar locality, near Tucker's Island, in Great Sound, where Strombus todon lanceolatus Linne, Syst. Nat., ed. x, p. 277, 1758. Eques balteatus Cnvier, Reg. Anim., ed. 2, ii, pi. xxix, fig. 2, 1829. Eques lanceolatus Gunther, Catal. Fishes, ii, p. 279, 1860. Jordan and Everin., Fishes N. Amer., ii, p. 1489, 1898. Figure 5. — Ribbon Fish. Eques lanceolatus. £. One specimen, retaining its characteristic color-marks, was found among the dead fishes cast on the beach near Hamilton early in March, 1901. (A. H. V.) Eupomacentrus fuscus (Cuv. and Val.) J. and Ever. Maria Molly. Br<>\vii Cock-eye Pilot. Potnacentrus fuscus Cuv. and Val., Hist. Nat. Pois., v, p. 432, 1830. Eupomacentrus fuscus Jord. and Everm., Fishes N. Amer., ii, p. 1552, 1898. Everm. and Marsh, Fishes of Porto Rico, p. 224, pi. xxvii, colored, 1900. Common in the mangrove swamp at Hungry Bay, April, 1901. (A. H. V.) Scomberomorus maculatus (Mitch.). Spanish Mackerel. Carita. Scomber maculatus Mitchell, Trans. Lit. and Phil. Soc. N. York, i. p. 420. 1815. Scomberomorus maculatus Jordan and Ever., Fishes N. Am., i, p. 874, iv, pi. cxxxiv, fig. 368. Everm. and Marsh, Fishes Porto Rico, p. 123. pi, vi (colored), 1900. I was told by some of the inhabitants that this species is occa- sionally taken, but I saw no specimens. A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 5 7 Lycodontis funebris (Ranz.) J. and Ever. Green Moray. Black Moray. Gymnothorasc funebris Ranzani, Nov. Com. Ac. Sci. Bonon., iv, p. 76. 1840, Brazil. Lycodontis funebris J. and Ever., Fishes N. Amer., i, p. 396, 1896. Ever. and Marsh, op. cit., p. 77, 1900. One specimen of this species was found among the dead fishes on the shore, early in March. I have seen two large living speci- mens in the New York Aquarium, brought from Bermuda by Prof. C. E. Bristol and party, in 1899. REPTILES. Anolis principalis (Linne). Blue-tailed Lizard. American Chameleon. Anolis Carolinensis Dum. and Bibron. Plate I. Figure 5. A single specimen of this small lizard was recently found in a jar containing a mixed lot of marine invertebrates collected by Mr. G. Brown Goode, at Bermuda, in 1876. The only label was " Bermuda," in Mr. Goode's handwriting. As the specimens in the jar had never been assorted and all the other things were common Bermudian species, Ave must infer that the locality label is correct. But since there is no special note in respect to the lizard, it is quite possible that Mr. Goode knew that it had been carried to Bermuda, in captivity. It is possible, however, that he did not distinguish it from the young of the common Ber- muda species and for that reason made no special note of it. No other example has occurred, so far as I know, but that proves very little, for no systematic search for reptiles has been made by any one in Bermuda. Mr. Samuel Garman has compared this specimen with those taken in the southern United States and Cuba, and finds no differences whatever. It is quite possible that it has recently been introduced into Ber- muda, either accidentally or intentionally, and that it has become locally naturalized there, in small numbers, like several foreign birds. This lizard was first mentioned by me in the Amer. Journ. Sci., xi, p. 330, April, 1901. 58 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. BIRDS. A list of 17 species of birds that have been recently added to the fauna has been published by Mr. A. H. Verrill.* Of these, five species are recent successful introductions by com- merce, either intentional or accidental. These are the American Goldfinch, the European Goldfinch, the European Tree-Sparrow, the Wheatear, and the Mockingbird, all of which are now resident and breed. The others (12) are rare migrants that probably do not breed there, though it is possible that the Red-billed Tropic Bird, * Amer. Journ. Sci., xii, p. 64, for July (issued June 22d to 28th), 1901. He has also printed a more detailed article in " The Osprey," v, pp. 83-85, for June, 1901. with figures of the three following species and of the Tropic Bird, photo- graphed from life. In these articles he has described the Bermuda Cardinal Bird and the Blue Bird as new subspecies, peculiar to Bermuda. The Cardinal Bird is named Cardinalis cardinalis Somersii ; the Blue Bird, Sialia sialis Ber- mudensis; the Ground Dove, Columbigallina passerina Bahamensis. Outram Bangs and Thos. S. Bradlee have also published a paper on the Birds of Bermuda in " The Auk " for July, 1901, pp. 249-257, in which new names are ariven to some of these birds and others. They name the Ground Dove, Columbigallina bermudiana ; the White-eyed Vireo, Vireo bermudianus ; the Catbird, Galeoscoptes bermudianus ; the Cardinal, Cardinalis bermudianus. Mr. Verrill's article appears to bave been published a few days earlier than the latter. To me it seems quite useless to regard these very sligbtly differentiated forms as distinct "species." The differences noted, especially in the Ground Dove, Catbird, and Vireo, are trivial and scarcely sufficient to constitute varieties. To consider them as "subspecies" is certainly a sufficient strain on the much- stretched meaning of the term "subspecies." I should, therefore, call them mere local varieties, scarcely differentiated. In respect to the Ground Dove, there are reasons for believing that it was intro- duced to Bermuda from the Bahamas, since the settlement of the islands, like many other things. None of the earlier writers mentioned it in the lists of birds that they gave. This would hardly have been the case had it been present, for it is exceedingly tame and familiar. A. K. Fisher, Bird Lore, Oct., 1901, p. 178, states that the original Motacilla sialis lAaaS, ed. x, p. 187, was from Bermuda. This is not true. He gave it as from "Bermudis & America calidore." He also quotes Catesby, Hist. Caro- lina, etc., p. 47, pi. 47, 1731. Catesby says that he had seen it in "Carolina, Virginia, Maryland, and the Bermudas." But he states in his preface that his birds were mostly drawn in Carolina and Georgia, where he spent several years in drawing them. A few were drawn in the Bahamas, where he spent about a year, mostly on the fishes and plants. He does not say that he made any drawings in Bermuda, where he probably made a mere passing visit. The Bluebird does not occur in the Bahamas. His figure clearly represents the com- mon North American variety. A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 59 of which a few were seen, may breed in small numbers with the common species. I may add that the European Starling has been taken several times, and may have become naturalized, but if so it is still rare. MAMMALS. Phoca vetulina ? (Linne*). Cornrnon Harbor Seal. A seal, apparently of this species, has been taken at Bermuda. A skin is still preserved in the local collection made by the late Mr. Bartram, at St. Georges. It may, however, be the young of the West Indian seal. Orca gladiator Gray=Orca orca (Linne). Killer. Figure 6.— Killer. I was told by fishermen that this species is occasionally seen in Bermuda waters. Grampus griseus Cuvier. Grampus. This species is also found in Bermuda waters, according to the local whalers. Delphinus delphis (Linne). Dolphin. This common oceanic dolphin also occurs in the waters around the Bermudas and should be considered as belonging to its fauna. Probably several other related cetaceans occur, more or less fre- quently, in the vicinity of the islands. While we were at Bermuda, in April, 1901, a small sperm whale, about 30 feet long, was captured and brought to St. Georges, where it was put on exhibition for a few da} r s. Sperm whales are not rare in the waters a few miles from Ber- muda, but they are far less common than they were former^. The Biscay Right Whale (Babvna cisarctica Cope = i?. Bis- cayensis Gervais) is now very rare in these waters, where it was once common. 60 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Plate I. Figure 1. — Epialtus bituberculatus, var. BermudensisY., new var. Photog. from llfe r xlf. Figure 2. — Platypodia spectabilis (Herbst). Photog. from life, x 1^-. Figure 3. — Pagurias insignis (Saussure) Benedict — Petrocheiras insignis, vol. x. p. 578. Figure 4. — Calcinus sulcatus Edw. Photog. from life. Natural size. Figure 5. — Anolis principalis (L.). Dorsal view of head and neck of a Bermuda speci- men. Photog. from nature, x 3. Figures 6a, b. — Holothuria Rathbuni Lamp. Photog. of two living specimens. £. Figure 7. — The same. Tentacles expanded. Drawn from life, x 1J. Plate II. Figure 1. — Cyclois Bairdii Stimp. Photog. from life, x 1J. Figure 2. — The same. Front view. Photog. from life. About natural size. Figure 3. — Ophiolepis paucispina M. and Tr. See vol. x, p. 585. Enlarged. Figures 4a, 4&. — Dolabrifera virens V., sp. nov. Dorsal and ventral sides of the shell. Photog. from nature. Natural size. Figures 5a, 5b. — The same. Shell of another specimen. Dorsal and ventral sides. Natural size. Figures 6a, &b. — Dolabrifera ascifera. Shell, dorsal and ventral sides. Photog. from nature. Natural size. Plate III. Figure 1. — Lamellidoris miniata V., sp. nov. Type. From life, x 3. Figure 2. — Dolabrifera ascifera. Dorsal side. From life. f. Figure 3. — Tethys (Aplysia) dactylornela Rang. Dorsal side. Photog. from living specimen. \. Figure 4. — Telhys (Aplysia) tarda V., sp. nov. Type. From life. Natural size. Figure 4a. — The same. Shell. Dorsal side. |. Figure 46. — The same. Shell. Ventral side. f. Figure 5. — Tethys (Aplysia) morio V., sp. nov. Type. From life. \. Figure 5a. —The same. Shell. Dorsal side. f-. Figure 6. — Runcina inconspicua V., sp. nov. Type. Dorsal side. From life. x 16. Plate IV. Figure 1. — Elysia flava V., sp. nov. Type. Dorsal side. From life, x 2k Figure 2. — Elysia picta Y., sp. nov. Type. Two specimens. From life, x 2£. Figure 3. — Elysia papillosa V., sp. nov. Type. Side view. From life, x 3i. Figure 4. — Elysia subornata Ver.. sp. nov. Type. From nature, x If. Figure 5. — Elysia ornata (Swain) Ver. Dorsal view, with side-flaps expanded. From life, f uatural size. Figure 6. — Facelina Goslingii V., sp. nov. Type. From life. $. Figure 7. — Lamellidoris f olivacea Ver. Dorsal view. From life, x 3. Figures 8a, b. — Lamellidoris lactea V., sp. nov. Type. Dorsal and side views, x 3. A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. 61 Figure^). — Lamellidoris aureopunctata V., sp. nov. Type. Side view. From life. x3. Figure 10. — Pleurobranchopsis niveus V., sp. nov. Type. Side view. From life, xlf. Figure 11. — Dolabrifera virens V., sp. nov. Type. "Dorsal side. Photog. from a liv- ing specimen, f . Figure 12. — Dolabrifera ascifera. Dorsal side. Photog. from life. Natural size. Plate V. Figure 1. — Discocelis cyclojjs V.. sp. nov. Type. Drawn from life, x 2. Figure 2. — Trigonoporus microps V., sp. nov. Type. Drawn from life, x 2. Figure 3. — Discocelis binoculata V., sp. nov. Type. Drawn from life, x 2. Figure 4. — The same. Type. Drawn from life, x 2. Figure 5. — Pseucloceros bicolor V., sp. nov. Type. Drawn from life, x If. Figure 6. — Pseudoceros aureolineato V., sp. nov. Type. Drawn from life, x If. Figure 7. — Thysanozoon griseum V., sp. nov. Type. Drawn from life. Natural size. Figure 8.—Leploplana lactoalba Ver., var. tincta V. Drawn from life, x 1^. Figure 9. — Thalassemia Baronii Greef. Photog. from a colored drawing from life. Natural size. Figure 10. — Golfingia elongata Yer., vol. x, p. 670. Type. Photog. from nature, x 2. Plate VI. Figure 1. — Lebrunia Dance (D. & M.) Ver. Side view. Photog. of a living speci- men, i. Figure 2. — Actinia melanasler V., sp. nov. Type. From life. Natural size. Figure 3. — The same. Photog. of a living specimen. £ . Figure 4. — Anemonia elegans V., sp. nov. Type. Specimen with the stomodasum protruded from the mouth, x 1J. Figure 5. — Pliellia rufa Ver. From life. £ Figure 6. — Aiptasia tagetes (D. and M.) Andres. Photograph from life of two speci- mens attached to floating mangrove leaves. Abont f natural size. Plate VII. Figure 1. — Epicystis osculifera (Les.) Ver. Photog. from a living specimen. \. Figure 2. — Palythoa grandiflora Ver. Photog. of a living group in expansion. Nat- ural size. Plate VIII. Figure 1. — Albunea oxyophthalma Miers. (See errata.) Photog. from a preserved specimen, •§-. Figure 2. — Clibanarius Verrillii Rathbun, 1901. Type. Photog. from nature. Left side, x H. Figure 3. — The same. Another specimen. Dorsal, x 1|. Figure 4. — Cyamns fascicular is V '., sp. nov. Type. Photog. from nature, x 4. Figure 5. — Fallacia protoclwna Schmarda. Photog. from a living specimen. J . Figure 6. — Pectinaria regalis Ver., sp. nov. Type, with tube. Photog. from a pre- served specimen. Side view. J. Figure 7. — The same. Another specimen, f. Figures 8, 9. — Catophragmus imbricatus Sowerby. Two specimens. Photog. from nature, x 2\. 62 A. E. Verrill — Additions to the Fauna of the Bermudas. Plate IX. Figure la. — Verrucella grandisV., sp. nov. Part of a terminal branch of the type. Front view, x 1^. Figure 16. — Part of a large branch. Front view. Photog. from nature, x 1$. Figure 2. — The same. Part of one of the larger branches, seen edgewise, x 1 i. Figure 3. — The same. Spicules, various forms. Camera'drawings. x 170. Figure 4a, b. — Eunicea aira V., sp. nov. Type. Distal portions of two branches from one specimen. About § natural size. Figure 5. — The same specimen. Group of spicules of various kinds. From camera drawings, x 17. Figure 6. — Cerianthus natans V., sp. nov. Type. Side view. From life. \. Figure 7. — Polycarpa multiphiala Ver. One of the gonads. Much enlarged. See vol. x, p. 591. Figure 8. — Styela ■partita (Stimp.), from the New England coast. See vol. x, p. 588. Gonads much enlarged. [All the figures on the above plates are from photographs and drawings by Mr. A. Hyatt Verrill.] ERRATA. Page 17, line 1. For Pericera subparallela, read Macrocoeloma subparallelum Miers. Page 18, line 8 from bottom. For Albunea oxycephala, read Albunea oxyophthalma Miers. Page 35, line 21. For Blaumeria, read Blauneria. Page 35, line 22. The undetermined helicoid shell may be Helicina lucida (Drap.) of southern Europe. III. — Variations and Nomenclature of Bermudian, West Indian and Brazilian Reef Corals, with notes on various Indo-Pacific Corals. By A. E. Verrill. The following observations on a few of the common reef corals of the West Indian fauna are some of the results of my studies of the reef corals continued during the past forty years. During this period I have examined nearly all of the important collections of corals in the United States, including the types of Dana and others.* I have also had opportunities to study, in life, and to collect large series of several of the species here discussed. The nomenclature of many of the corals is still unsettled. This is due largely to the natural difficulties of the subject. Perhaps there is no other group in which it is more difficult to determine the true characters of the genera and species and the actual limits of their variations. These difficulties cannot be overcome except by long and careful studies of large series of specimens of all ages and forms, grown under many diverse conditions. Good series of but few species can be found in most museums, even at the present time. Formerly, when most of the species were first described, series of specimens were generally unknown, and most of the species were described from a single specimen, or from very few, and these were often so beach-worn as to be nearly worthless for such a purpose. In addition to these natural difficulties, the early literature is very unsatisfactory, for numerous species were often confounded under a single name, and a genus was often equivalent to one or several families, or even to the whole order. In subdividing the old groups, later writers did not always take sufficient pains to follow the ordinary rules of zoological nomencla- ture, even in some cases when there could have been no reasonable doubt of the identity of the species and genera of the early writers. * Among the collections studied by me are those of the Museum of Compara- tive Zoology, which I labelled and catalogued many years ago; those of the U. S. Nat. Museum, including most of Dana's types ; those of the Museum of Yale University, also including many types of Dana and others ; those of the Ameri- can Museum, New York City; those of Professor Ward of Eochester, N. Y., now in the Field Columbian Museum of Chicago ; of the Peabody Acad. Science, Salem, Mass. ; of the Boston Society of Natural History, and many others. 04 A. K VerriU — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. The diagnoses of the Linnsean species are very poor and imperfect, and have led to much confusion. The longer descriptions of Pallas (I7c>0) are excellent for that period. In this article I have treated many of those genera and species that are among the most confused, but have not attempted to discuss all such cases, even among West Indian corals. Mr. Vaughan (op. cit., 1901) has referred to the very poor charac- ter of the works of Duchassaing and Michelotti on the West Indian corals, which have led to much confusion and have very much retarded the elucidation of the synonymy. My own opinion of their works are entirely harmonious with Mr. Vaughan's. Fortu- nately Mr. Vaughan has been able to study the types of these authors that are in the Museum of Turin, and therefore he has been able to rectify many of their mistakes. In such cases I can but follow his determinations of their species, for I have not seen the types. I have, however, formerly studied a collection of corals sent to the Museum of Comparative Zoology by Duchassaing, as examples of their species. But I found that in very many cases the specimens sent did not at all resemble the species described under the same names, and concluded that Mr. Duchassaing himself was unable to identify their species. Mr. Vaughan has also recently studied some of the types of Ehrenberg and of Edwards and Haime, and has thus been able to correct several errors. That the nomenclature adopted by Dana, Edwards and Haime, and other standard authors is not in accordance with the strict rules of priority in zoological nomenclature, has been well known to me and others for many years.* Personally, however, I should have preferred to have left the current names undisturbed, considering that long usage gives sanction to many slight irregularities of this kind, in the earlier writings, and I have hitherto avoided making many changes in current names for such strictly technical reasons. * I do not share the opinion expressed by Mr. Vaughan (op. cit., p. 4) that M.-Edw. and Haime were influenced by unworthy motives, or autocratic ideas. Nor would I accuse them of changing names ''arbitrarily" or "through ignor- ance." They did not hold precisely the same views of the rales of nomenclature that Mr. Vaughan follows, bnt they were in accord with the best usage of their period and country. Their great works are monuments of long, laborious, and faithful study, continued for over twelve years, and embracing all known corals. That they made a few mistakes is natural. We are all liable to do that. No one is infallible. I find it necessary to change 12 out of the 28 names of corals in Mr. Vaughan's revised list, p. 8. A. M Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. 65 But several recent writers, especially Mr. Gregory and Mr. Vaughan, have seen fit to make several radical innovations of this kind, changing the long current names of various genera and species to make them comply with more rigid modern rules of priority. In a number of cases, however, they have been unfortunate in choosing or adopting the new names, so that their nomenclature has, in such instances, no more permanent foundations than the older ones they displaced, as will be shown later. Therefore, I have thought it desirable to look more deeply into this subject, and to go as nearly as possible to the root of the matter, and so have made several necessary changes that otherwise I should have chosen to have left untouched. The changes in the application of the names Mceandrina, Mwan- dra, Manicina, Madrepora, Acropora, Favites, etc., are among the more notable instances of this kind. However, if they must be made, the sooner the better. MADREPORARIA. Family Meeandridae Ver., nom. now Mceandrinidce Verrill, Cornm. Essex lust., v, p. 32, 1866. This family is intended to include all those meandriniform genera in which the zooids remain more or less united in series, and when living do not in expansion raise the disk above the calicinal walls or collines, and the astreiform corals that increase by fission. The coral may have the calicinal centers scarcely distinct, along the bottom of more or less elongated calicinal grooves, and the tenta- cles not in circles around the mouths (subfamily Mwandrinai). Or they may be perfectly distinct and marked by the radiating arrange- ment of the septa, as well as by the aggregations of the columella, and the tentacles forming circles, (Trachyphyllince, Favitince). The septa are rather finely dentate or serrulate and have a paliform lobe, with an emargination above it which marks the situation of the tentacles and border of the disk. The increase is chiefly by contin- uous incomplete fission, but in many cases exothecal budding also occurs (see pp. 6R, 71 ). Most of the corals in this family are massive and some grow to great size. Nearly all are tropical reef-builders. The new name of the family is due to the necessary transfer of the name Mceandrina to the family Eusmillidw, (see p. 66, note). Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XI. 5 October, 1901. 66 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian lleef Corals. Subfamily Maeandrinse Ver., nom. nov. Maeandriform corals with indistinct calicinal centers and confluent zooids. Tentacles mostly in parallel rows. Maeandra Okeu (emended.) Type, M. labyrinthiformis (L.). " Brain Corals." Mycedium (pars) Browne, Civil and Nat. Hist. Jamaica, 1756 ; ed. 2, 1789, (non Oken). Mceandra (pars) Oken, Lehrb. Nativrg., p. 70, 1815. Meandrina (pars) Lam., ii, p. 244, 1816, (not of 1801.) Mceandra (pars) + Manicina (pars) Ehrenberg, Corall. Both. Meeres, pp. 99, 101, 1834. Meandrina + Manicina (pars) Dana, Zooph. Expl. Exp., 1846. flfceandrina + Cceloria + Manicina + Diploria + Leptoria (pars) Edw. and Haime, Hist. Nat. Corall., ii, pp. 388-401, 1857. Platygyra + Diploria + Manicina Vatighan, Fossil Corals of Curacao, etc., Samml. Geol. Reichs-Mus. , Leiden, Ser. 2, ii, i, pp. 45, 48, 1901. A study of large series of various species of the above so-called genera, during many years, has convinced me that they should all he reunited into one genus, which would thus correspond more nearly with the genus Meandrina Lam. (1816) and to Meandrina of Dana + Manicina, pars. If it be necessary to restrict Meandrina* (Lam., 1801) to the type meandrites (L.) =.pectinata Lam., as claimed by Vaughan and others, the next generic name, in order of publication, would be Mceandra of Oken, 1815, in which the first species (areola=Manicina areolata, authors), as well as the second and fourth, belongs to this group. Ehrenberg, also, definitely adopted this name nearly in the sense used here. Vaughan arbitrarily chooses to assume that M. mean- drites should be considered the type of Mceandra, and therefore places that name as a synonym of Meandrina. This is not logical and is contrary to his method of reasoning in other similar cases (e. g. Favites Link, on p. 22). * In establishing the genus Meandrina in 1801 (Syst. An., p. 372) Lamarck named but one species, M. pectiyiata=:Madrepora meandrites L. ; Ellis and Sol., which may properly be the type, though he added many other species in 1816. M.-Edw. and Haime referred to these facts (Corall., ii. p. 389), but preferred to take for the type M. filograna, on the ground that denticulated septa was given by Lamarck (1801) as a character of the genus. It is certainly a legitimate question for doubt, whether the characters given to a genus are not of more importance than the particular species cited as an example by the older writers, who did not usually give them as " types'' in the modern sense. A. E. Verrlll — Bernindian and West Indian Reef Corals. 67 As a matter of fact, one of the meandrites- groxnp was included by Oken in this genus by mere accident, it being erroneously referred to as a variety of a true Mceandra (31. labyrinthiformis (L.) = Diploria), while the four other species are of the Diploria and Coelorla groups. Moreover, he founded, in the same work, a new genus (Pectlnla) for the meandr •lies- group. This of itself would show that he did not intend to include meandrites in Mceandra. The fact that a copied figure of meandrites was given, as an example, has no special significance in this case, for the publisher of such general works, rather than the author, is in many cases responsible for the selection of the illustrations, which, as is well known, are often misleading. It would be far more consistent and correct to take either the first species (31. areola=areolata), or else the second species mentioned, for the type of Mceandra. Meandrites had already been eliminated by Lamarck, as Vaughan himself admits, when he named it as the type of Meandrina, in 1801. But Ehrenberg (1834), in adopting the genus Mceandra, used it in nearly the sense now proposed, though he eliminated Oken's first species, referring it erroneously to his new genus Manicina, which, as understood by him, included Plerogyra and also Colpophyllia E. and H. (See note, p. 85.) Platygyra was used by Ehrenberg as a subgenus of 3Iceandra. It included Coelorla, Diploria, and Leptorla E. and H., or the whole of his Mceandra except Dendrogyra. Therefore it is a synonym of Mceandra proper. These eliminations of two of Oken's species clearly leave, as the real available type, M. labyrinthiformis (Linne) = Diploria cerebri- formis E. and H., which is var. a. of Oken's second species. There- fore, should others still prefer to consider the latter the type of a special genus, on account of its usually double ridges, it should be called Mmandra labyrinthiformis (L.) Oken, but for those who do not thus restrict the Linnoean name it should be Mceandra Implicata (Ellis and Sol.), or else 31. cerebrlformls. The forms Stokesi (E. and H.) and geographica Whitf., are mere growth-variations in the forms of the ridges and grooves. The characters that have been used by authors to separate Mceandrlna E. and H., Diploria, Coelorla, and Manicina are due only to slightly different modes of growth. These several forms do not show any structural differences, such as should characterize genera. Young examples of Diploria can scarcely be distinguished from Manicina, of similar age, even by the forms of the grooves 68 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. and ridges. Many large specimens of typical Diploria have both single and double ridges on their different parts, or even side by side, and the same is true of Manicina. The calicles may form long series, more or less winding, or they may be short, or even circum- scribed, equally in Diploria, Coeloria, and Mmandrina E. and H., and these variations are often seen on a single specimen of either group. They all form radial infoldings or collines at the margins, when young. Resorption of parts of the collines is frequent. In Diploria and Manicina E. and H, and probably in the other groups, the ends or other parts of the growing ridges often expand and give rise to new zooids, and thus form new actinal grooves by extracalicinal budding. Therefore the intervening ridges in such cases are necessarily simple for a time. See pi. x, figs. 1-3. The genus Mceandra, as restricted above, would include the fol- lowing four common West Indian species, two of which are found at the Bermudas.* Besides these there are two or three other rare West Indian species that are not well known. One of these (M. varia), which was described by Dana as Astrcea varia, is remarkable for having a large part of its surface covered with circumscribed polygonal calicles like those of Goniastrma, to which genus it has usually been referred. But simple or multiple circumscribed calicles also occur, more or less frequently, in all the other species, and they are often due to extracalicinal budding and subsequent division. There is a large specimen of M. clioosa in the Museum of Yale University which has a large part of its surface covered with simple angular calicles, while in other parts they are long and meandriniform, as usual. The same is true of some of the East Indian species of the Coeloria-gvo\\\). In the Indo-Pacific region, including the Red Sea,f there are a considerable number of nominal species of Mmandra, most of which have been referred to Coeloria and Leptoria. * Nelson (Trans. Geol. Soc. London, v, p. 112) records the occurrence of M. areolata as a fossil in the older beach rock. Probably his specimens are the same that Mr. Vaughan has recently identified as Mycetophyllia Lamarvkana (in coll. Geol. Soc). Neither of these species has been found living at the Bermudas, hut the older "beach rock " there contains also several West Indian shells that no longer exist in the Bermudas, indicating a period of warmer climate than at present. This rock may be post-glacial in age. It is overlaid by several forest or red-clay beds with much aeolian limestone interstratified. f See Klunzinger, C. B., Die Korallthiere des Bothen Meeres. Madreporaria. Berlin, 1879. In this excellent work there are good descriptions and photo- graphic figures of five species and four varieties of Coeloria and of one species of Leptoria. A. E. Verritt — Bermvdian and West Indian Beef Corals. 69 Among those of the section Coeloria are the following : 31. dcedalca (Ellis). E. Indies. 31. dcedalina (D.). = Astrcea deformis, pars, Dana, (non Lam.) Fiji Is. 31. spongiosa (Dana). West Indies (?). PI. xii, fig. 3. 31. pachychila Ehr. = C. labyrinthiformis E. & H., non Linne. M. lamellina (Ehr., p. 99) +31. leptochila, Ehr.,= C. Bottai and C. Forshcdana E. and H. = C. Arabica Klz. Red Sea. 31. laticollis E. and H., (Corall., ii, p. 415, pi. D4, fig. 4, as Cceloria). 31. Sinensis (E. and H., Corall., ii, p. 410, as Cceloria). China. 31. stricta (E. and PL, op. cit., p. 417). E. Indies. 31. astrwiformis (E. and H, op. cit., p. 417). Red Sea. 31. Esperi (E. and IL, op. cit., p. 417). Red Sea. 31. leptoticha (Klz., as Coeloria). Red Sea. 31. laxa Ver., sp. nov. This has broad, distant, and very thin septa, with the edges sparingly and very irregularly toothed, and with the summits broad and rounded or subtruncate. Walls very thin. Valleys deep, mostly sinuous. Columella but little developed. Depth of calicinal valleys, about 7 mm ; width about 5 to 8 mm . Kings- mills Islands. 31. elegans, 31. deltoides, 31. Australiensis (all Rehb.), Australia. The following have been referred to Leptoria by Edw. and Haime, on account of the somewhat lamellose columella :* 31. gracilis (Dana). Fiji Is. ; 31. tenuis (Dana). Tonga Is. The following are, apparently, more closely related to the typical West Indian species : 31. rustica (Dana). Wakes Island. 31. valida (Dana). Locality unknown. 31. rudis Verrill=: 31. phrygia Dana, non Ellis and Sol. 31. delicatxda (Ortman, 1888). Samoa. The following species were referred to Diploria : — 31. crassior (E. and H., Corall., ii, p. 403). China Sea. 31. spinulosa (E. and H., op. cit., p. 404). China Sea. He proposes C. Arabica Klz. to include M. leptochila and M. lamellina Ehr., + C. Forskcelana, C. Bottai, and C. subdentata Edw. and Haime, as varieties. This shows that the Eed Sea species are quite as variable as the West Indian. However, it seems to me undesirable to give a new name (Arabica) to this revised and extended species. It would be better to extend the sense of M. lamellina (Ehr.) so as to include all these forms. * The structure of the columella is not essentially different in the two follow- ing species (types examined) from that of typical Ma>anclra, especially that of labyrinthiformis when the latter is poorly developed. It is not a continuous plate, but consists of small, irregular, interrupted laminae. 70 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. Mseandra labyrinthiformis (L.) V. Brain Stone. Brain Coral. Madrepora labyrinthiformis (pa>-s) Linne, Syst. Nat., ed. x, p. 794, 1758. Madrepora meandrites, var. y, Pallas, Elench. Zooph., p. 292, 293, 1766. Madrepora implicata Ellis and Solander, p. 164, 1786. Grnelin, op. cit., p. 3763. Madrepora labyrinthiformis Esper, Ptlanzenth., p. 74, pi. iii, 1789. Htceandra meandrites (}Kirs), including as var. a, labyrinthiformis (Linne"), Oken, Lehrb. Naturg. Zool., i, p. 70, 1815. Meandrina cerebriformis Lamarck, Hist. Nat. Anim. s. Vert., p. 246, 1816. Mceandra (Platygyra) cerebriformis, vars. a and b, Ehrenberg, Corall. Rothen Meeres, Abhandl. Kgl. Akad. Wiss. BerL, p. 324 [100], 1834. Meandrina cerebriformis, p. 263, pi. xiv, fig. 2 ; + Meandrina truncata, p. 264, pi. xiv, figs. 1, la, Dana, Zooph. U. States Expl. Exped., 1846. Diploria cerebriformis Milne-Edwards and Hainie, Compt.-rend., xxvii, p. 493, 1848. Diploria cerebriformis ;+ Diploria Stokesi, pi. D4, fig. 3 ; + Diploria truncata Milne-Edwards and Hainie, Hist. Nat. Corall., ii, pp. 402, 403, 405, 1857. ? Moeandrina labyrinthiformis Pourtales, Florida Reefs, Corals, pi. ix, figs. 10-12, 1880. Diploria, cerebriformis Pourtales, 111. Cat. Mus. Comp. Zool., No. iv, Mem. ii. p. 75, 1871 ; Verrill, these Trans., x, p. 552, 1900. Diploria geographica Whitfield, Bull. Amer. Mus., N. York, xiv, p. 223, pi. xxxiii, xxxiv, 1901. (Types examined.) Diploria labyrinthiformis Vaughan, Samml. Geol. Reichs-Mus., ii, p. 45, 1901 (non Cceloria labyrinthiformis Edw. and Haime). Plate X. Figures 1-3. This species can usually be distinguished from the allied forms by the generally double ridges between the actinal grooves and by the presence on these ridges of a more or less wide intermural furrow, but the furrow may be lacking or obsolete, and the wall may be simple and solid on parts of many specimens. While living, the color of the soft parts is usually dull orange- yellow, but it varies from light ocher-yellow to brownish orange. The structure and appearance of the tentacles, month, and disk are like those of M. cerebrum and 31. clivosa. This is the most abundant of the reef-corals at the Bermudas. When it grows under very favorable conditions it forms large, evenly hemispherical or dome-shaped masses, which are sometimes 5 or 6 feet in diameter, and nearly as high. Perfect specimens of this form, from 8 inches to 2 feet in diametei", are much sought after by collectors, and are, therefore, common in museums. Much larger numbers of specimens on the reefs take on irregular, broad, thick encrusting forms, due to less favorable conditions, injuries, and especially to crowding and coalescence. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. 71 A very extensive series of this species was collected, in 1S98 and 1901, in order to study its variations. Over 300 specimens of all sizes from less than half an inch up to over five feet in diameter -were studied by me. The variations are very great in several directions : — as in the modes of growth ; breadth and depth of the actinal grooves ; and especially in the breadth of the intervening ridges and of the inter- mural or exothecal groove at their summits. The length, direction, and arrangement of the grooves and ridges vary in every possible way, often presenting the most diverse arrangements on different parts of a single large specimen, especially if it has grown in a more or less crowded or restricted position. These common variations include those forms that have been named Dlploria Stolcesi Edw. and Haime, but which differ in no way from the typical forms, except in having unusually wide ridges, surmounted by a deep intermural groove, which often expands, especially at the end of a ridge, to the breadth of 10 to 15 mm . Extracalicinal budding frequently occurs in these wide intermural grooves. In life, many of these grooves show a distinct mouth, or a series of mouths, with rows of tentacles, before any marked changes occur in the underlying coral. But soon the bottom of the groove receives deposits of columellar tissues, and then paliform lobes and septa rapidly appear. Thus after a short period of growth, these grooves become true actinal grooves formed over the exothecal tissues of the walls, by true budding. They often become as deep and well formed as the other furrows before they break through, at one or more places, and thus become connected with the older grooves. Some of them, both long series and single calicles, may remain isolated for a long time in some specimens. As a matter of course, actinal grooves formed in this way must be separated for some time by simple walls only. This accounts for many of the cases where simple ridges are found mixed with double ones on the same specimen (pi. x, fig. 1). A single ridge may also, on this account, be double for a part of its length and single in other parts, or it may divide into two simple ones, in certain places.* * Probably some of the confusion in respect to the synonymy of this species is due to the fact that this mode of growth has not been recognized by authors, and therefore specimens of this species with simple ridges have been referred to different species and to a different genus {Mceandrina), for such specimens have all the characters of Mceandrina, as contrasted with Diploria. (See p. 67.) It is not improbable that the figures of M. labyrinthiformis Pourtales (op. cit., Florida Reefs, pi. ix. figs. 10-12, 1880) were drawn from a specimen of this kind 72 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. This mode of increase, by exothecal budding, seems to occur most freely in young specimens 2 to 3 inches in diameter, though not exclusively so. In such specimens the ridges are often all or nearly all broad and deeply grooved, or just ready to divide (plate x, figure 3). Others, scarcely larger, may be found in which all or nearly all the ridges are narrow and single, without grooves, the divisions having already taken place (pi. x, fig. 2). Specimens in both these stages, and in various intermediate conditions, were collected by me in Bermuda, both in 1898 and 1901. The stage in which broad and deeply grooved ridges occur has been named as a distinct species (Diplopia StoJeesi) by Edwards and Haime. Some later writers have called it a "young stage"; others have called it a variety. It appears, from the facts just stated, that is is only a phase of growth, which may occur at various stages of development. M. truncata Dana seems to have been based on a phase following the division of the ridges and before the new grooves had developed on their summits. Such specimens are not rare. See pi. x, fig. 2. Large specimens occur in which one part will show the Slokesi arrangement, while another part will be of the typical form ; and still other parts will present simple or nearly simple solid ridges of the truncata phase. See pi. x, fig. 1 . Many oblong specimens show, especially on the sides, many long and nearly parallel, subradial, or nearly transverse ridges and grooves, while on other parts they present the ordinary convoluted arrangement. The gyri are often in places more or less angular or zigzag, especi- ally on the median or more crowded portions, thus showing that the form recently described and figured by Whitfield as D. geographical is only a form of growth, not of varietal value. Many of the larger hemispherical and oblong examples consist of two, three, or more originally separate masses that have come in contact by growth and crowding, and have then grafted them- selves together completely. The planes of union are usually shown only by a thin line of epitheeal tissue. Some of these double speci- mens are as evenly and regularly hemispherical as the simple ones. and not from M. cerebrum, as Vaughan supposed. The types from which the original plates of that Report were drawn were not separately preserved nor in any way indicated by labels. While I had charge of tlie coral-collections of the Mus. of Comp. Zoology (1860-1864), I tried in vain to identify the specimens that had previously been figured on those plates, which were then unpublished. Therefore any question of synonymy must be settled by the plates themselves. Fortunately they are very accurate. * Bull. Amer. Mus., xiv, p. 223, 1901. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 73 The characters of the septa and costse are also variable, though more reliable than the form of the ridges. The septa are not very crowded, though more so than in 31. cerebrum. Smaller, thin ones alternate with the larger and usually extend down below the pali- form lobe. The larger septa are rather broad, generally with the inner edge perpendicular, and often sometimes broader above, usually with the summit broadly rounded and continued into promi- nent costre which have rather regular conical or spiniform serrations on their edges. The paliforrn lobe is generally well developed and roughly serrulate; the inner edge of the septa bears numerous, small, close, irregular, elongated teeth, many of which are rough or forked at the tip ; those toward the summit are longer, directed strongly obliquely upward and frequently incurved ; those on the l'ounded summit are usually more regular and divergent. The sides of the larger septa are covered with rather few and scattered conical grains, — much fewer and smaller than in 31. cerebrum. The columella is variable, but usually well developed, composed of curled lamellose processes, and thickened at the centers. Some- times it is larger and nearly solid or subvesicular. In transverse section the walls vary in breadth, but are usually thick and solid. In those specimens that have thin and simple walls at the surface, a section made an inch or so from the surface usually shows most of the walls as thick as usual (about 3 to 5 mm ). The septa in section are thin and sparingly spinulose laterally, quite unlike those of 31. cerebrum in similar sections. The actinal grooves vary considerably in breadth and depth, but they are always decidedly narrower and shallower than those of typical 31. cerebrum, and have a more square-cut appearance. The breadth from wall to wall, at top, is generally 5 to 10 mm ; of the open valley, septal edge to septal edge, 4 to 6 mm ; depth, mostly 4 to 6 mm . Number of septa to a centimeter, usually 14 to 16. One variety (compacta) has unusually shallow and narrow valleys (3-5 mi wide), with crowded septa. This species is the largest and most important of the Bermu- dian reef corals. It occurs abundantly on the inner reefs of Great Sound, Castle Harbor, etc., often close to the shores and in water only two feet deep at low-tide, and mostly in less than twenty feet. It is still more abundant on the outer reefs. It does not occur in Harrington Sound, probably owing to a slightly diminished salin- ity of the water, due to its nearly land-locked condition. It may form masses 6 to 8 feet in diameter and height. It is found on the Florida reefs and throughout the West Indies. 74 A. U. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Meeandra cerebrum (Ellis and Sol.) V. Brain Coral. Brain Stone. Madrepora cerebrum Ellis aiul Sol., Nat. Hist. Zooph., p. 163, 1786. Gmeliu, in Linne, Syst Nat., ed. xiii, vi, p. 3763, 1798. Madrepora labyrinthica Ellis and Solander, Nat. Hist. Zooph., p. 160, pi. xlvi. figs. 3, 4, 1786 (not of Pallas, which is .1/. meandrites Linne", ed. x.) Meandrina labyrinthica (pars) Lamarck, Hist. Nat. Anim. sans Vert., ii, p. 246, 1816 (non Mad. labyrinthica Pallas). Meandrina sinuosa LeSueur, Mem. Mus. d'Hist. Nat. Paris, vi, p. 278, pi. xv. fig. 4, and f varieties viridis, p. 279, pi. xv, fig. 5; ? appressa, p. 280, pi. xv, fig. 6; f rubra, p. 280, pi. xv, fig. 7; t vineola, p. 280, pi. xv, fig. 8, 1820 (non M adrepor a sinuosa Ell. and Sol. =-.Mussa or Isophyllia; nee Meandrina sinuosa Quoy and Gaimard). .'.' Meandrina dedalea Les. , op. cit., p. 281, pi. xvi, fig. 9, 1820. M. labyrinthica Les., op. cit., pi. xvi, fig. 10, 1820. Meandrina labyrinthica Lamouronx, Exp. Meth. Gen. Polyp , p. 54, pi. xlvi, figs. 3, 4 (reprint from plate of Ellis and Solander), 1821 (non Pallas). Meeandra (Platygyra) labyrinthica (pars) Ehrenberg, Cor. Rothen Meeres, Abh. k. Akad. Wiss. Berl. for 1832, p. 323 [99], 1834. (Includes 5 species. mostly of Cceloria, t. Vaughan, from types.) Meandrina labyrinthica, p. 256, pi. xiv, fig. 1 ; 4- M. slrigosa, p. 257, pi. xiv, fig. 4a, Dana, Zooph. U. States Expl. Exp., 1840. Mceandrina heterogyra, p. 392; + Jf. sinuosissima ; + M. serrata, p. 393 ; + ili". crassa, p. 394, + Cceloria strigosa, p. 418, Milne-Edwards and Haime, Hist. Nat. Corall., t. ii, 1857 (teste Vaughan, from types). See also .1/. sinuosa Les. and varieties, described on p. 389, foot note. Leptoria fragilis Duchassaing and Michelotti, Mem. Corall. Ant., p. 351, 1861 (teste Vaughan, from type). Mceandrina strigosa Pourtales, Flor. Reefs, Corals, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., vii, pi. ix, figs. 6-9, 1880. Mceandrina strigosa, pp. 10, 92; + M. sinuosissima, pp. 10, 91 ; + M. labyrinf- thica, pp. 10, 12, 91 ; + ?M. sinuosa, p. 12, Quelch, Reef Corals, Chall. Exp., vol. xvi, 1886. Mtea nd ri na filograna [pars) Gregory, op. cit., p. 265 (non Esper). Platygyra viridis Vaughan, Samml. Geol. Reichs-Mus. , ii, p. 51, 1901 (after var. viridis Les.) Platygyra sinuosa Vaughan, op. cit., p. 56, 1901. Matandrina labyrinthica Whitfield, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., N. York, xiv, p. 221, pi. xxxi, xxxii, 1901. (Abnormal, type studied.) Plate X. Figure 4. Plate XII. Figure 4. Plate XIV. Figures 4, 5. This species usually forms evenly convex, thick, encrusting masses, or when well grown, large even hemispheres, sometimes a yard or more in diameter, with intricately convoluted gyri. Its actinal grooves are usually wider and more open than in the preceding species, while the mural ridges are generally high, narrow, solid, and rather thin in sections, and they usually appear acute at the crest, owing partly to the fact that the septa are generally narrowed A. E. Verrill — Sermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 75 toward the summit ; but also because the wall itself is generally (but not always) reduced to a thin solid lamina, which, as seen from above, runs as a zigzag line from septum to septum. The larger septa usually alternate with small very thin ones, most of which do not extend half way to the paliform lobes, thus leaving wide inter- septal spaces below. The large septa are usually thin and rather narrow, with the inner edge rapidly sloping or nearly perpendicular to the well marked paliform lobe, so that the actinal grooves are generally deep and often more than twice as wide as the ridges, the width decreasing gradually to the level of the paliform lobes. The summits of the septa are only slightly prominent above the thin wall, and may be evenly but obtusely rounded, or they may have a gothic form, narrowing rather abruptly, giving a rather acute form to the ridges. Their inner edges are strongly and usually rather regularly serrulate, the teeth are often angular and sharp like saw- teeth, but are frequent^ more elongated and uneven, some of them having minutely forked or lacerate tips; the teeth are directed obliquely upward, but are seldom incurved, as is so often the case in the preceding species. The paliform lobes are a little thickened and roughly serrulate on the sides and edges. The sides of the septa are almost always very roughly spinulose or hispid, being thickly covered with small, acute, spiniform grains, much more numerous and conspicuous than in the allied species. This is usually a good diagnostic character, and is available even in worn specimens, for these lateral septal sj)inules are conspicuous on the thin septa in transverse sections. The columella varies considerably ; it is usually well developed and composed of numerous, small, thin, contorted laminae, sharply spinulose laterally, and united into a nearly continu- ous but uneven series, with thickenings at irregular intervals. In some cases the columella is much less developed and composed of few lamina?. The gyri in large specimens are long and intricately convoluted in every direction, but in smaller examples they may be more or less radial, or parallel for long distances, especially on the sides. In some specimens, though rarely, short gyri occur, and in some instances isolated, round or elliptical, ^Ls-^rcea-like calicles may be found, due to intermural budding, but these are much less com- mon than in labyrinthiformis and clivosa. PI. xiv, fig. 4. Double mural ridges are rarely seen, but they sometimes occur, especially near the margins of the smaller specimens. In sections the coral is rather cellular ; the walls are relative thin and nearly solid, being seldom more than 1-5 to 2 mm thick, while the 76 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. septa are alternately thicker and thinner, and show numerous lateral Bpinules, as mentioned above. See pi. x, fig. 4. This species can usually be easily recognized by its evenly convex surface and the long convoluted simple, often gothic ridges, with the crest of the wall, thin, solid, and often in a zigzag line; by its rather open grooves, generally wider than the ridges, and usually showing rather open interseptal spaces and thin unequal septa ; and especially by the strongly spinulose lateral surfaces of the septa. The width and depth of the actinal groove- varies considerably, but is almost always greater than in labyrinthiformis. The breadth from wall to wall is generally 8 to 14 mn ', rarely as little as 6 mm ; open space between septal edges, near summit, mostly o' to lo"' m ; depth of grooves mostly 6 to l()"' m , usually about S""". Number of septa to a centimeter, usually about 24 to i'S, when the smaller one- are developed. The color of this species, in life, so far as observed by me at the Bermudas, is dull yellow, ocher-yellow, or brownish yellow. It appears not to have the orange-yellow color, so general in labyrinth- iformis. In the Bahamas it is more variable in color. I think it very improbable that all the various color-varieties, named by Lesueur from the color alone, pertain to this spec - But in any ease they cannot be determined from color alone, for the color of such corals is variable and uncertain. Therefore M. viridis of Lesueur rests on no valid characters. This species is not abundant in the Bermudas. It is sometimes, though rather rarely, found on the inner reefs, associated with the preceding species, but it occurs more commonly on the extreme outer reefs. Most of the larger specimens that I have seen were from the vicinitv of the North Rocks, where it becomes one to two feet or more in diameter. It is common in the West Indies and on the Florida Reefs, where it grows to a large size. I have seen specimens over a yard across. At least two forms of simple ridged Hfceandrce occur on the outer reefs of the Bermudas. AVhether they represent more than varieties of the above species may be doubtful, for no one has yet obtained a sufficiently large series of them for study. Those that I have seen appear to me to belong to two species, for they differ decidedly as to the form and denticulation of the septa and in other ways. The more common form seems to be the abundant West Indian and Florida specie-, named above. I am not prepared to admit that all the described 'West Indian A. E. Verrill — Bermv.dbm edges somewhat resembling a Merulina. In this condition the septa are more loosely arranged and obliquely inclined ; the collines become small, narrow, and sharply triangular, close to the edge, and the valleys become shallow and fiat, most of them having short, rudimentary collines dividing them into two. Detached fragments of this form might easily be mistaken for a distinct species. Colon, Yale Museum, coll. F. II. Bradley. Maeandra varia (Dana) Ver. Astrcea {Fissicella) varia Dana, Zooph. U. States Expl. Exp., p. 236, pi. xii, figs. 13a, 136, 1846. Prionastrcea f varia Edw. and Haime, Hist. Nat. Corall., ii. p. 524, 1857. Goniastra>a varia Verrill, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., i, p. 48, 1864. Of this rare species, supposed to be West Indian, I have seen only few specimens and have none at hand for figuring. Dana's type I have not seen. He does not state where it was placed. However, Dana's description and figures indicate that this is a Mceandra with mostly circumscribed, Goniastrcea-\ik.e calicles, much as in the next, but with a more cellular structure. Meandrina spongiosa Dana is entirely unlike this species, to which Dana thought it might be united as a variety. 80 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. The type of the former is in the Museum of Yale University. It is one of the Cceloria-gronip, with larger, open, mostly polygonal calicles, rather few septa, and with a very cellular texture, as seen in sections. Its origin is very uncertain. I do not think it probable that it came from the West Indies, as Dana supposed. No recent collector has found it in American waters, so far as I know. See pi. xiv, fig. 3. Maeandra Agassizii (Edw. and Hainie). Astrcva reticularis Dana, Zooph., p. 237, pi. xii, figs. 9-9c (non Lam.) = Prion - astroeaf Agassizii Edw. and Hainie, Hist. Corall., ii, p. 524, 1857. Plate XIV. Figures 1, la. This rare species when well grown forms compact, even, hemi- spherical masses, a foot or more in diameter. Such a mass, from the Bahamas, in the Museum of Yale University, is ten inches across and about six thick. A large part of the calicles are simple, astrseiforrn, angular, often hexagonal or pentagonal, like those of a Goniastrwa, separated by narrow rather acute walls. But in many places, espe- cially toward the borders, they form more or less elongated, ma?an- driniform grooves, which often become branched and convoluted, as in typical Mceandra. Some of these actinal grooves become one to two inches long (25 to 50 mm ); 2.5 to 4 mm wide; they are separated by regular ridges, similar to those of 31. cllvosa, but smaller and more regular. The msendriniform grooves are often mixed with astraeiform calicles, and all intermediate forms may occur on one specimen. The ridges are rather high, rounded or with a gothic profile, and have a simple, solid wall; they are about 2 to 3 mm wide. The septa are numerous, very thin, close, pretty regular, about 25-30 to a centime- ter, and they project but little above the wall. The edge is finely serrulate and there is a small but distinct paliform lobe. The columella is well developed, spongy, composed of small convoluted lamina?, as in most other species of the genus. On those parts where most of the calicles are simple and regular, they are mostly from 4 to 7 mm in diameter ; double ones are from 12-14 mm long. This species has not been found at the Bermudas and probably not on the Florida Reefs. Most specimens that I have seen have been from the Bahamas, where it seems to be rare. It is generally mistaken for a Gonlastrwa, which it often closelv resembles, but it is closely related to 31. cllvosa. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 81 Maeandra areolata (Linne"). Madrepora areolata (pars) Linne - , Syst., ed. x, p. 795, 1758. Pallas, Elench . Zooph., p. 295, 1760; \ Ellis and Sol., Nat. Hist. Zoophytes, p. 161, pi. xlvii, figs. 4, 5, 1786. Madrepora areola (pars) Linne, Sys. Nat. ed. xii, p. 1274, 1767. Esper. Pfianz., i, pp. 76, 84, pi. v, figs. 1-4, young, worn ; and Madrepora mean- <>rites (pars), pi. iv, figs. 1, 2, adult, 1788. Mceandra areola Oken, Lehr. Naturg., i, p. 70, 1815. Meandrina areolata Lam., Hist. Anim., ed. i, vol. ii, p. 247, 1816 (non Linne, ed. x). ? Lamouroux, Expos. Method., p. 55, pi. xlvii, fig. 5, 1821 (reprint of plate of Ellis and Sol.). Ma n id na hispida + Manicina praerupta + t Manicina manica Ehrenberg, Corall. Rothen Meeres, p. 336, 337 [102, 103] 1834 (non M. areolata, p. 103). Manicina areolata Dana, Zooph. U. S. Expl. Exp., p. 191, pi. ix, fig. 3, 1846. Edw. and Haime, Corall., ii, p. 397, 1857. Verrill, Bull Mus. Comp. Zool., i, p. 48, 1864. Pourtales, Florida Reefs, Corals, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., vii, pi. v, figs. 1-22, pi. vi, figs. 1-7, 1880. Manicina ? dilatata + M. prcerupta + M. hispida Dana. Zooph. Expl. Exped., pp. 191-193, pi. ix, fig. 3, 1846. Manicina strigilis + M. hispida + M. Danai+M. Valenciennesi Edw. and Haime, Hist. Corall., ii, pp. 399-401, 1857. Plate XI. Figures 1, 2. Plate XII. Figures 1, 2, 3. This very common Florida and West Indian species does not occur at the Bermudas.* It varies greatly in form and in the height, breadth, and form of the actinal grooves and intervening ridges. These are generally more or less regular infoldings while the coral is young, but in large specimens they become forked and more or less convoluted, finally assuming, in old specimens, the meandriniform arrangement. The actinal grooves are, however, always much wider, deeper, and more open than in either of the three preceding species. The septa are generally strongly granulated or subhispid on the sides and roughly denticulated on the edges, with a broad basal paliform lobe. It is pedicellate when young, but usually becomes free when old. Some of the nominal species, quoted in the synonymy, were based on beach-worn specimens, which look very unlike fresh ones. The name Madrepora areolata was first applied by Linne (Syst., ed. x, p. 795, 1758) chiefly to the East Indian coral now generally known as Trachyphyllia amara?itnnilLdw. and Haime. Ehrenberg's Manicina areolata was probably the same or a related species ( T. - The fossils mentioned by Nelson as belonging to this species were probably Mycetophyllia (see p. 68, note). Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XI. 6 October, 1901. 82 A. E. Verrill — Bermuclian and West Indian Reef Corals. Geoffroyi E. and H.). The former should he called Trachyphyllia amaranthus* (Mtill.). Linne evidently had the East Indian species in view when he established the species M. areolata, for he quoted a recognizable figure of it (Rumphius, Amb., 6, p. 244, pi. 87, fig. 1), and gave " 0- Asiatico " as its habitat. His diagnosis is so indefinite that it would apply to either species. This name should properly have been restricted to the East Indian coral, but in view of the whole history of the name, and especially in consequence of the early application of the name, amaranthus, by Midler, 1775, to the oriental species, the name areolata should continue to be used for the American coral. Linne, however, quoted Petiver, Pterigraphia Americana, pi. xx, fig. 16, 171:.', which undoubtedly refers to the American species. In the ed. xii, p. 1274, he arbitrarily changed the name to areola, keeping the same diagnosis, with slight changes. Pallas (1766, p. 275) added the American species to that of Linne, and quoted references to both in earlier books, though his diagnosis applies best to the East Indian species. Esper's name {areola) was applied mainly to the West Indian species, which he figured. His additional figure on pi. iv, figs. 1. -j, erroneously referred by him to meandrites, represents an old speci- men with more or less convoluted grooves, such as are of frequent occurrence in favorable situations. It is represented with wide grooves ; serrulate septa ; and narrow subacute ridges, double in some places. Dana's M. dilatata was based on a figure in Ellis and Solander, pi. xlvii, fig. 4. He apparently had no specimen. The figure is not determinable with certainty. It looks like a young Trachyphyllia amaranthus. But it might have been made from a poor drawing of a beach-worn, young J/, areolata. Hence I place 31. dilatata here as a doubtful synonym. In either case the name is useless The most important variations in this species are those that are due to the number and closeness of the septa; the amount of * According to Bruggniarm (Abhand. naturwiss. Yereins. Bremen. ls;,s. 549) the naniH Madrepora amaranthus was given to this coral by Ph. L. S. Miiller in 1775 (German ed. Linne, Syst. Nat., vi, ii, p. 682, which I have not seen), and he proposed to call it Trachyphyllia amarantus. But it seems more desirable to follow Miiller's spelling and call it T. amaranthus (Mull.).' "Sea amaranth'' was its ancient vernacular name. The specific name amarantum, as it was given by Dana, was based on a mistake in spelling. Rumphius called it Amar- anfhvs srt.rcits. A. E. VerriU — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. 83 columella ; and the solidity or vesicular character of the collines. Some of these forms are, perhaps, worthy of varietal names : Var. hispida (Ehr. ) = M. prcerupta Dana (non Ehr.). The type of Dana's M. prcerupta is in the Yale Museum. It is a variety of M. areolata, with the collines mostly solid, narrower than usual, and partly sinuous. Septa rather narrow, thickened at base, emarginate, hispid laterally, roughly serrulate ; columella largely developed, finely lamellose. The collines are thin and simple in some places, but double in others. The valleys are mostly broad and open, 12 to 20 rara wide, usually about 15 mm ; collines mostly 4 to 6 mm wide. PI. xii, fig. 2, type of Dana. Florida Reefs. Var. confertlfolia V, nov. Plate XI. Figure 2. Form as usual. Collines generally wide, double, truncate or sili- cate, sometimes simple, rather compact. Septa numerous and crowded, alternately wider and narrower, about 11 to 12 wider ones to a centimeter, not very hispid laterally, finely and pretty regularly serrulate, usually wide and rounded distally, and with a broad basal paliform lobe. External costse numerous, pretty evenly spinulose. Columella usually well developed, spongy or finely lamellose. Cali- cinal valleys wide and open, mostly about 20 mm wide, sometimes 25 mm ; collines mostly 10 to 12 mm broad. Florida Reefs. Yale Museum. Var. laxifolia V., nov. Plate XII. Figure 1. Form as usual, but generally with lobulate margins. Valleys usually narrower than in the preceding variety, rather deep, often with perpendicular walls. Collines short at first, but branched and sinuous when older, mostly narrow, generally double, often becom- ing simple when older, usually with very cellular exotheca. Septa fewer than usual, and less crowded, about eight or nine wider ones to a centimeter, with small ones alternating, so openly placed that the interseptal spaces appear unusually wide and conspicuous, rather wide and rounded distally, moderately hispid laterally, pretty evenly and sharply serrulate, but the large, rounded paliform lobe is often lacerate-toothed. Columella well developed, finely lamellose. Ex- terior costae prominent, sublarnellar, sharply serrulate. Valleys mostly 10 to 13 mm wide ; collines 5 to 12 mm wide. Florida Reefs and St. Thomas. Yale Museum. 84 A. F. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. Var. columellaris V., nov. Form as usual. Septa numerous, crowded, much thickened toward the base and very strongly hispid laterally, edges roughly serrulate and lacerate. Columella highly developed, broad, trabecular or finely lamellose, the lamellae often largely coalescent and rough on the surface. Valleys usually wide and open. Collines either single or double, often sulcate. This is near var. hispida (Ehr.), in the hispid character of the septa. Florida Reefs. Yale Museum. Var. angusta of Dana, p. 196, I have not seen. It may have been based on a young example of M. labyrinthiformis. Maeandra conferta Ver. Favia conferta Verrill, these Trans., vol. i, p. 355, 1868. Favia conferta (pars) Vaughan, op. cit., pp. 39, 40, 1901. Plate XIII. Figure 6. Although this species has the aspect of a Favia, near F. fragum, when the calicles are mostly simple and elliptical, other specimens, and often even different parts of the same specimen, have more or less elongated, narrow cells or valleys, with several indistinct actinal centers, nearly as in M. Agassizii and parts of M. clivosa. These short valleys are often curved, or bent a little in sigmoid shape, but are not sinuous. They are then separated by small, narrow, solid collines. It is evidently closely related to 31. va'ria, but has much narrower calicles and valleys, and still more of the valleys are circumscribed. The septa are thinner and more numerous, rather regularly serrulate. Brazil, at Pernambuco, Bahia, the Abrolhos Reefs, etc. Yale Mus., coll. Hartt; Rathbun. Vaughan (op. cit., 1901) thinks that this species is not distinct from Favia gravida Ver. It seems that they must be referred to distinct genera. (See p. 91.) I have figured one of the types. Subfamily Trachyphyilinse Ver., nov. Moeandriform corals that have distinct calicinal centers and radiat- ing septa. (See p. 65.) Manicina versus Colpophyllia. Type M, gyrosa Ehr. Podasteria (provisional name) Ehr., p. 101, 1834. If we consider 31. areolata (L.) as congeneric with Mieandra, as above explained (p. 67), the name Manicina must either be dropped altogether for a genus, or else applied to some other type. By the A. E Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. 85 process of elimination, the last subdivision of Manicina Ehr. to receive a name was the group named Gyrosmilia in 1851. This was based on M. interrupta, the second species under Manicina in Ehrenberg's list,* pp. 101-103. But Gyrosmilia is generally regarded as inseparable from Plerogyra E. and H., 1848 (Euphyllia, pars, Dana, 1846). It is doubtful whether Plerogyra can be kept as a genus distinct from Euphyllia, from which it differs chiefly in the loose union of the walls. On p. 102, under M. gyrosa, Ehrenberg states that gyrosa does not agree with the generic characters, and proposes for it a provi- sional generic name (Podasteria). This might take the place of Colpophyllia\ according to strict rules of priority, but he gives no definition of the generic characters, nor does he refer to it his fissa (sp. 6) and mmandrites (sp. 7), though they are probably all forms of the same species (gyrosa). It seems best, therefore, to restrict the name Manicina, if it is to be retained for a genus, to the group named Colpophyllia E. and H., with M. gyrosa as the type. Podasteria and Colpophyllia would thus become strict synonyms of it. It is doubtful whether more than one species is known, most, if not all, of the sevei'al named species being mere forms of gyrosa. This would surely produce the least disturbance in the current nomenclature. The only alternative would be to restore it to the second and third species = Plerogyra + Gyrosmilia E. and H. But in case these should be united to Euphyllia D. (1846), as is likely, the name would again lapse or else come back to Colpophyllia. Another view may, possibly, be reasonably held. Manicina (E. and H.) by some may be thought worthy of recognition as a section or subgenus of Mceandra, with M. (Manicina) areolata as the type. But I know of no structural characters by which such a group can be distinguished. * The 1st species is a Mussa (E. and H.) ; the 2d is type of Gyrosmilia, 1851 = Plerogyra E. and H., 1848 ; 3d is Plerogyra ; 4, 6, 7 are Colpophyllia E. and H., 1848 —Podasteria Ehr., 1834 ; 5th is Maiandrina, (revis. ) = Pectinia Oken ; 8, 9, 10 are Maiandra, restr., Oken; 12 is Tridacophyllia Blainv., 1830. The 11th, M. areolata Ehr. (non L.), is doubtful. Edw. and H. refer it to Trachyphyllia Geoffroyi, but the description in Ehr. does not apply to a Trachyphyllia, for it implies true sulcated collines, " truncatis, passim fissis.'' , It is indeterminable from the description. f Ehrenberg's three species, Nos. 4, 6, 7, all belong to Manicina (Podasteria) gyrosa (or Colpophyllia gyrosa E. and H.), according to Vaughan, who has recently examined the types of Ehrenberg, in Berlin. 86 A. K Verritt — Berm ml ian and West Indian Reef Corals. The principal distinctions between areolata and Colpophyllia is the presence of well defined calicinal centers and radial septa in the latter, while in the former they are indistinct, as in Mceandra y and the absence of a columella in Col/wphylli". Callogyra V., gen. nov. Coral pedicelled ; calicles large and with very distinct centers in deep valleys, mostly united in short series. Collines large, with simple or double walls united by exotheca. Septa with paliform lobes ; edges finely serrulate. Columella trabecular. Outer surface naked, covered with spinulose costae. Eudotheca not abundant, deep within the interseptal spaces. This genus is like a Trachyphyttia with coalesced walls, and might, indeed, be considered a section of that genus if intermediate condi- tions were known. It bears about the same relations to that genus that Symphyllia does to Mussa, or Plerogyra to Euphyllia. In form, the type resembles the Manicina areolata of authors, but differs widely from it in its large, distinct calicles, and finely and evenly serrulate septa. It also has a general resemblance to Mean- drina ( Pectin ia) Rraziliensis, but the latter has entire septa and the calicinal centers are not distinct. It is also nearly allied to Manicina, emended = Colpophyllia E. and H., but the latter forms more massive and cellular corals, with- out a columella, and has different exterior costae, and less distinct calicles. Callogyra forniosa V., sp. nov. Plate XXIY. Figures 1, 2. The coral is narrowly pedicelled, glomerate, elliptical, with lobed margins and with high radial collines, more or less forked and curved, much as in Isophyllim and young Mceandrce. Between the collines are large marginal calicles, which render the margin lobu- late ; two large calicles occupy the central valley. The valleys are deep and rather wide, the central ones with perpendicular walls. The calicinal centers are very distinct and occupied by a loose trabec- ular columella. The collines are simple in some places, with a thin wall, but in most places they are double with two thin walls near together : their summits are obtusely rounded. The septa are thin with wide interspaces ; their breadth is moder- ate; lengths very different, corresponding to the five cycles to which A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 87 they generally belong, the smallest being quite short. The larger ones have wide but slightly marked paliform lobes and are broadly rounded at the summits; their surfaces are finely granulate, and costulate close to the border ; their edges are very finely and regu- larly denticulated. The under side is covered with elevated, lamellate, radial costo?, which are sharply and closely dentate on their edges, the teeth being small and spiniform. Length of the coral, 1b mm ; breadth, 60 ram ; width of the valleys mostly 13 to 25 mm ; depth, 10-18 mm . The type is from an unknown locality, but was supposed to be West Indian. It belongs to the American Museum, New York. From its affinities with Trachyphyllia, I think its origin is more likely Indo-Pacific. There is a smaller worn specimen in the Museum of Yale University, locality unknown. Subfamily Favitinse Ver., nom. riov. This subfamily is intended to include all the astreiform corals that normally or chiefly increase by fission or by intracalicinal budding, for these two methods intergrade completely and often coexist on the same coral. It is thus nearly equivalent to Fissicella of Dana. Paliform lobes or teeth are generally present. This group is very closely related to Mazandrinm. The principal difference consists in the more complete fission of the zooids and the rapid and usually complete isolation of the calicles, which may be either circular or angular. Perhaps it would have been thought better by many to have con- sidered the group a distinct family near Mceandridce, under the name Favitidce. But the study of such species as Favia gravida and F. frag urn, in comparison with Mceandra conferta, M. Agassi::/'/, and M. clivosa, var. dispar, shows that the two groups nearly inter- grade. The occasionally isolated calicles of Mceandra are structurally identical with those of Favia. Perhaps the two groups are not even of subfamily rank. I have used Favites as the typical genus from which to form the family name, because the ultimate fate of Astrea and Favia is still uncertain. (See p. 89.) 88 A. F. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Favia Oken, 1815, restricted by Edw. and Haime, 1857. Star Corals. Astrea (1st section) Lamarck, Syst. Aniin. s. Vert., p. 371, 1801 ; (pars) Hist. Anim., ii, p. 60, 1816. Favites (pars) Link, Beschr. Nat.-Samml., Univ. Eostock, iii, p. 162, 1807. Favia (pars) Oken, Lehrb. Naturg., i, p. 67, 1815. Astrea, subgenus Fissicella (pars) Dana, Zooph., p. 220, 1846. Parastrea Edw. and Haime, Cornpt. -rendus, xxvii, p. 495, 1848; Ann. Sci. Nat., xii, 1850. Favia Edw. and Haime, Hist. Nat. Corall., ii, p. 426, 1857; Verrill, these Trans., i, pp. 353-355, 1868. Astrea Verrill, Coinm. Essex Inst., v, p. 33, 1865; Verrill, in Dana. Coral Islands, pp. 380, 388, 1874. Astra>a Quelch, .Reef Corals, Chall. Exped., xvi, 1886. The name of this large genus has been much in question for a long time. This is due to several reasons. When Astrea was first proposed by Lamarck (1801) he gave it two sections with a single sj)ecies as an example of each. His first section had A, rotulosa as its type. The second section had A. galaxea (=radians) as the type. Properly the name should have been retained for the former, as the more typical and first named. But Oken, 1815, made two divisions similar to, but not the same as those of Lamarck, and applied the name Favia to the group more like the first of Lamarck's sections, and Astrea to the second. Blainville, in 1830, named the latter Siderastrma. But under Favia Oken named three species, which belong to three modern genera, viz : 1. F. ananas=F fragum ; 2. F caver- nosa= Orbicello cavernosa ; 3. F. favites or favosa =? Prionastm a abdita E. and H.=Favites Link. The true relations of A. rotulosa Ellis and Sol., Lamarck's first type of Astrea, are still doubtful. It was referred to Favia by Edw. and Haime, perhaps erroneously. Their species, thus named, may very likely be different. It has much larger calicles, more numerous septa, and they place it in the section with feeble pali. The general appearance of the original figure is more like an Orbicello or Plesiastrcea. It has a circle of very distinct, prominent pali, in which it agrees with Plesiastrcea. The calicles are regular and cir- cular and the septa are few and very prominent. I have never seen a perfect specimen of it. A few beach-worn West Indian corals that I have seen may belong to it, but they are not positively deter- minable. A. F. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 89' It may be an East Indian coral of the Flesiastrma-g?o\\\). In that case Astrea, if retained, should be restricted to this, as the original type, and thus it would be distinct from Favia. The name Favites was given by Link, 1807, to a genus nearly equivalent to Astrea Lam. and Favia Oken, of which it could be con- sidered a synonym. It included four genera. Vaughan (op. cit., 1901, p. 21) proposed to restore the name for a part (the favosa- group) of Link's genus, and thus use it in place of Prionastroea. It might have been substituted, equally as well, for Favia (in the usual sense) for the latter was practically synonymous. But Vaughan is justifiable in considering favosa=abdita as the proper type.* There is an additional reason why Astrea is rejected by some writers, as by Vaughan (op. cit., 1901, pp. 60, 61). Bolten used the name Astrcea for a group of gastropod shells in 1798. His genus was not properly defined and has never come into use. It included species usually referred to Turbo (L.) and A'< n<>- phora. Whether it should be restored for any of these shells is very doubtful. Bolten's work was a mere catalogue, not a scientific work in any legitimate sense, and it is extremely rare. Still his names are recognized by many inalacologists. The difference in the original spelling of the two names would, perhaps, be a sufficient reason for retaining both, if not otherwise invalid. It seems to me necessaiy to wait for the re-examination of the true Astrea rotulosa before the status of Astrea can be settled. However, it would evidently lead to less confusion to reject Astrea altogether, on the ground of its prior use by Bolten, than to use it for Siderustraat, as some have done, for the latter does not belong to the group Astroiidm, but is a fungian coral. Astrea is said to have been used by Gmelin, 1789 (see L. Agassiz, Nomencl. Zool., and Gregory, op. cit., p. 278). The latter cites it as on p. 3767, under 31. astroites. But the name is used there only as a part of a polynomial name quoted from Browne (Hist. Jamaica, 1756, p. 392), with other descriptive quotations, and in no sense as a generic term. Browne gave several species of Astrea, but he used the term only as a part of his polynomial descriptive names. * Favites Link (pars)=Fissicella (pars) Dana= Prionastrma Edw. and H. + Metastrcea E. and H. For a review of the principal species see p. 92. 9u A. E. Verrill— Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Favia fragum (Esper) Edw. and Haime. Madrepora ananas (pars) Pallas, Elench. Zooph., p. 321, 1766 (not of Linne, Syst. Nat., ed. x, 1758, p. 797, which was a palaeozoic fossil (Acervularia) , from Gothland. Madrepora ananas {pars) Linne", Syst. Nat., ed. xii, i, p. 1275, (not of ed. x,) 1767. Madrepora ananas Ellis and Solander, Nat. Hist. Zooph., p. 168, pi. xlvii, fig. 6, 1786. Madrepora fragum Esper, Pflanzenth., Fortsetz., i, p. 79, pi. lxiv, figs. 1. 'J. 1797 (non Madrepora ananas Esper, Pflanzenth., pp. 128-131. pi. xix, which is a Dichoccenia.) Favia ananas (2>ars) Oken, Lehrbnch Naturgesch. , Zool., i, p. 67, 1815. Astrea ananas Lamarck, Hist. Nat. Anim. s. Vert., ii, p. 260, 1816. Astrea ananas LeSueur, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, vi, p. 285, pi. xvi, fig. 12, 1820. Astrea ananas Lamouroux, Exp. Meth. Gen. Polyp., p. 59, pi. xlvii, fig. 6, (after Ellis and Sol.) Favia ananas and Favia fragum Milne-Edwards and Haime, Hist. Nat. Corall.. ii, pp. 435-439, 1857. Favia incerta, p. 351 [75], pi. x, figs. 13, 14 ; + Favia eoarctata, p. 352 [76], pi. x, figs. 17, 18 ; + Favia ananas, p. 352, Duchassaing and Michelotti, Mem. Corall. Ant., 1861 (t. Vaughan, from types). Favia ananas Verrill, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., i, p. 48, 1864. Favia fragum Verrill, these Trans., i, p. 355, 1868. Astrcea ananas and A. eoarctata Quelch, Narrative Chall. Exp. Zool., i, pt. i, foot-note, p. 146, 1885. Astrcea eoarctata, pp. 9, 12, 98; +Astrma incerta; + Astrcea ananas, p. 12. 98 ; + Astrcea fragum, pp. 13, 98, 99, Quelch, Reef Corals, Chall. Exp. Zool., xvi, 1886. Favis ananas Gregory, Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, li, p. 260, 1895. Favia fragum Vaughan, Samml. Geol. Reichs-Mus., Leiden, ii, p. 24, 1901. Plate XIII. Figures 1, 2. The name ananas, as applied to this species, dates from Pallas, 1766, who described it very well indeed. But the name, as used previously by Linne (Syst., ed. x, p. 797) was particularly applied to a Gothland fossil coral of the genus Acervularia. So it should, with- out doubt, be dropped for this living species, to which it has been so long applied. However, this name has also been applied, by the earlier writers, to other existing species, so that its synonymy is complex. Fortunately the early name fragum is available and has, apparently, not often been applied to other species, so that its use for this one can hardly lead to any confusion. My own experience, based on a study of large numbers of specimens, living and dead, is in accord with that of Mr. Vaughan, as to the necessity of uniting the several forms described by Duch. and Mich, and by Quelch as A. E. Verrill — JBermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 91 distinct species. The differences noticed are due to slight variations in growth, and especially to the greater or lesser crowding of the calicles. Sometimes the intervening spaces are very narrow; in other specimens, and more commonly, they are rather wide. The calicles may be circular, angular, or elliptical. The extreme forms occur asso- ciated together in tide-pools at the Bermudas, but intermediate specimens also occur in the same places. In life, the soft parts a^ree in color and structure. My figures (pi. xiii, figs. 1, 2) are from jjhotographs of two Ber- muda specimens, found together. They show nearly the extreme forms of variation. The color of the soft pai'ts, in life, is light yellow. This coral is common on the Florida Reefs, and throughout the West Indies in shallow water. It is also abundant at the Azores. (t. Quelch.) It never becomes large. Favia gravida Ver. Far in gravida Verrill, these Trans., i, p. 354, 1868. Fa via conferta (pars) Vaughan, op. cit. , pp. 39, 40, 1901 (non Verrill). Plate XIII. Figure 3. This Brazilian species is nearly allied to F. fragum of the West Indies. I do not think it is so closely related to M. conferta as Vaughan supposes, for he has united the two forms under the latter. (See p. 84.) I have never found mseandriniform calicles or valleys as in the latter, and the septa, columella, and sections of the Avails are different. I have here figured one of the types. Abrolhos Reefs, Bahia and Pernambuco, coll. C. F. Hartt ; R. Rathbun. Favia leptophylla Ver. Favia leptophylla Verrill, these Trans., i, p. 353, 1868. Plate XIII. Figures 4, 5. This species is very unlike any of those forms related to F. fragum. It has double walls and vesicular exotheca between the calicles. The proper walls are thin, continuous; those of adjacent calicles are separated by a loose, vesicular structure, with thin dis- sepiments. The septa are rather few, very thin with rather promi- nent summits. This species produces some intermural buds, but it increases mainly by fission. The photographs here reproduced are from the original type, now in the Museum of Yale University. Abrolhos Reefs,- Brazil, coll. C. F. Hartt. 92 A. F. V&rrill — Bermiulian and West Indian Reef Corals. Favites Link, 1807, restricted. Favites Link (pars), op. cit., p. 162, 1807. Favia (pars) Oken, Lehrb. Natnrg., i, p. 67, 1815. Fissicella (pars) Dana, Zooph., p. 220, 1846. Prionastrcea Edw. and Haime, Cornptes-rend., xxvii, p. 495, 1848. Prionastraea and Metastvcea Edw. and Haime, Hist. Corall., ii, pp. 513 and 525, 1857. Calicles usually angular or polygonal, separated by nearly solid walls, which often contain a single series of cellules, more distinct toward the base. The division of the calicles is generally exeentric, or near the margin, by unequal fission or intracalicinal budding, but it may also be by median fission, where the calicles become crowded, or in the central parts. Septa rather numerous, denticulated, the larger teeth usually proximal. Columella developed more or less, spongy or trabecular. Pali usually distinctly developed. The history of the name of this genus has been discussed on page 89. This large genus appears to be absent from the West Indian fauna. The American species, hitherto referred to it, belong in other groups, so far as I have seen them. Among the better known Indo-Pacific species are the following, most of which I have studied personally : — Favites favites (Pallas, not M. favosa L., ed. x, which was a fossil) = P. abdita (Lam.) E. and H. East Indies ; Singapore. F.profandicella (E. and H.). F. crassior (E. and H.). F magnified (Bv. ; E. and H.) (?ion Dana). Batavia. F. magnistellata (E. and H.). F. obtusata (Lam.; E. and H.). Tongatabou; Fiji. F. sidfurea (E. and H.). Vanikoro. F Quoyi (E.. and H.). New Ireland; Fiji. F Ellisiana V. (nom. x\ox.) — M. favosa Ellis and Sol., Hist., p. 167, pi. 1, fig. 1, 1186, non Linne= Prionastrma favosa E. and H., non Linne. F. fusco-viridis (Q. and G.; Dana). Tongatabou; Fiji. . F virens (Dana). Fiji. F. Jlexuosa (Dana). Fiji. F. spectabilis (Yer.)z=Astrcea rnagnifica Dana, non Blainv.r:/ 3 . spectabilis Ver. East Indies. F sinuosa (Dana). Fiji. F. favulus (Dana). Fiji. A. F. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. 93 F. coronata (Studer, 1881) Singapore. F. robusta (Dana). Fiji; Amboina. F. valida (Yer.) = Astrcea heliopora (jjars) Dana, p. 246, pi. xiii, figs. 11a, lib. Wakes I. F. tessellata Ver., nom. nov. = A. tesserifera Dana (non Ehr.). F. Chinensis (Ver.) = Prionastrcea Chinensis Ver., Coram. Essex Inst., v, p. 35, 1866. Hong Kong. F. armata (Ver.) = Astrcea intersepta Dana, Zooph., p. 246, pi. xiii, figs. 12a to 120* (?io?il£s\)ev, = Stephanoccenia) = Plesiastrcea armata Ver. in Dana, Coral Is., ed. ii, p. 381. F. coronella Ver., sp. no v. — Astrcea parvistella (pars) Dana, Zoopb.., p. 244, but not the figures. One of Dana's specimens differs from the type. Calicles small, (2-5 to 3'5 mm ,) angular, separated by narrow, nearly solid walls. Septa unequal, in three cycles or more, usually 24 to 30, those of the 3d cycle very narrow, the larger ones roughly serrate and strongly granulated ; six prominent pali before the primary septa ; columella nearly solid. Endothecal dissepiments regular, nearly horizontal, not crowded. This and the next preced- ing mieht be referred to Goniastrcea about as well as to Favites. Fiji. The following are from the Red Sea : F gibbosa (Klunz., p. 40, pi. iv, fig. 10, as Prionastrcea. T. pentagona (Esp.; Klz., non Ehr., = P. melicerum E. and H. F. spinosa (Klunz., p. 39, pi. iv, f. 7, pi. x, f. 5). F. vasta (Klunz., p. 38, pi. iv, f. 8, 12, pi. x, f. 4a, 4 b, as Prionas- trcea). F tesserifera (Ehr.; Klz.; E. and H.). F JEgyptorum (Edw. and H.) = Metastrcea JEgyptorum E. and H. Recent and fossil. Family Orbicellidae Ver. Star Corals. This family will include the astreiform corals that have circular or nearly circular calicles, and increase by mural or exothecal budding. The polyps, when expanded, ai'e exsert. Orbicella (Dana), restricted. Astrcea, subgenus Orbicella (pars), Dana, Zooph. Expl. Exped., p. 206, 1846. Heliastrcea Edw. and Hainie, Hist. Corall., ii, p. 456, 1857. Orbicella Verrill, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., i, p. 47, 1864. Verrill, in Dana's Corals and -Coral Islands, ed. 1, p. 380, 1872; ed. 2, pp. 380, 388, 1874: ed. 3, pp. 421, 429, 1890. Corallites cylindrical or nearly so. Costse well developed and serving, with more or less cellular intercostal exotheca, to unite the corallites. Septa exsert ; paliform teeth and columella are present. 94 A. E. Verrill— Hernia dian and West Indian Reef Corals. Orbicella annularis (Ellis and Sol.) Dana. Star Corals. Madrepora astroites Pallas, Elench. Zooph., p. 320, 1766 (not of Linne, ed. x. p. 796, which was a palaeozoic fossil, nor of ed. xii). ft Madrepora acropora Linne, Syst. Nat., ed. xii, p. 1276, 1766. (Probably not this species, perhaps a Solenastrcea, but indeterminable.) Madrepora annularis Ellis and Solander, Nat. Hist. Zooph., p. 169, pi. liii, fig. 1, 2, and Madrepora faveolata, p. 166. pi. Iiii, figs. 5, 6, 1786. ft Madrepora acropora Esper, Pflanzenth., Fortsetz., i, p. 21, pi. xxxviii, 1797, (non Linne, Syst., ed., xii, p, 1276.) Astrea annularis Lamarck, Hist. Nat. Anim. s. Vert., ii, p. 259, 1816. Astrea annularis Laruouroux, Exp. Meth. Genres de Polyp., p. 58. pi. liii, figs. 1, 2, and Astrea faveolata, p. 58, pi. liii, figs. 5, 6, 1821. Astrea (Orbicella) annularis Dana, Zoophytes U. S. Expl. Exp., p. 214, pi. x, fig. 6, and f A. (O) stellulata, p. 215, pi. x, fig. 7, (variety,) 1846. Heliastrcea annularis Milne-Edwards and Haime, Hist. Nat. Corall., ii. p. 473; and f Heliastraia acropora, p. 477, 1857. Heliastrea annularis ; + H. acropora ; + H. Lamarcki Duchassaing and Micbel- otti, Mem. Corall. Antilles, p. 352, [76], 1861 (t. Vaughau from types, non II. Lamarc/, ana E. and H.). Orbicella annularis Verrill, Proc. Boston Soc Nat. Hist., ix, p. 33, 1862, rate of growth. Phylloccenia sculpta + P. limbata + Cyphastraea costata (pars) + Astr&a Barba- densis Duucan, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London, xix, pp. 432-444, pi. xv. figs. 6, 6a, 1863, all fossils, (t. Vaughan from types). Plesiastrcea ramea Duncan (fossil), op. cit., xx, p. 39, 1864 (t. Vaughau ). Orbicella annularis Verrill, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., i, p. 48, 1864; Pourtales, Flor. Eeefs, Cor., Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., vii. No. 1. pi. iv, figs. 1-10, 1880. Orbicella annularis A. Agassiz, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., xx, No. 2, p. 61. pis. i, ii, 1890, rate of growth. Verrill, these Trans., x, p. 553, 1900. Orbicella acropora. (pars) Gregory, Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. Lond., Ii, p. 272 (now Linne,) ; + Cyphastra:a costata, p. 274 ;+ Echinopora Franski, p. 274. pi. xi, figs. 2a, 2b, 1895, (teste Vaughan from types). Orbicella acropora Vaughan, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., xxviii, No. 5, p. 275. 1899; Samml. Geol. Eeichs-Mus., ii. p. 22, 1901, (not of Gardiner, 1899). Plate XV. Figure 1. This common and well known species was admirably figured by Professor L. Agassiz in the plates of Florida Reefs, published by Pourtales, L880. It shows considerable variations in the size of the calicles; in the extent to which they are crowded together ; in the prominence of their borders above the intervening exotheca : in the prominence *>i' the septa above the walls ; and in the extent to which the small septa of the third cycle are developed. I>;it yet these variation-, so far as I have seen, never go so far as to render difficult the recogni- tion of the species, unless the specimens are badly worn. A. A Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 95 The specimens from which the figures of annularis, faveolata, stellulata, and pleiades were made, in the work of Ellis and Solander, were all badly worn. Hence there has always been much uncer- tainty as to their identification. However, there seems to be no doubt but that their annularis "was really this species, and their faveolata was probabty the same species, more eroded. There is more doubt about stellulata. It may be the same thing-, but it might be a Solenastrcea. (See p. 07.) It seems best, however, to let Dana's determination of the latter stand, for it is as likely to be correct as any other, and is based on types still preserved. The M. aeropora of Linne is utterly indeterminable. The locality is unknown, and the diagnosis is so brief and vague that it applies equally well to any one of a dozen or more species of small astrean corals, both Pacific and Atlantic. Nor does the author refer to any figure in earlier works. It is useless and unfortunate t<> try to apply the name to the present species and to displace a valid and long established name by one of extreme uncertainty, as has been done recently by both Gregory and Vaughan. I do not know any good reason for such a course, in this case. The name aeropora (L.) should be discarded as indeterminable, both generic-ally and specific- ally. If used at all it should only date from H. aeropora E. and H. There is no certainty nor probability that the Linnaean species was the same as annularis, nor is there any good reason to believe that the aeropora of Esper, or of Edw. and Haime was the same as the aeropora of Linne. Even if the aeropora of Edw. and Haime should prove to be only a variation of annxdaris (which may still be doubted), it does not follow that the name should be adopted as from Linne (ed. xii), for Edw. and Haime applied this name arbitrarily to the particular form that they had in view. They could have had no more knowledge of this Linnaean species than Esper, Lamarck, Dana, and others, for there is nothing definite on which to base any such knowledge. It is certain that the contemporaries of Linne, like Pallas and Ellis, did not thus identify this species, for they described the an /cdaris under other names. The aeropora of Esper mayor may not be the same as annularis, but in either case the latter has several years priority. Had this species been what Linne had before him, he would undoubtedly have referred to Pallas, who had already well described it as M. astroites, for he referred to the other species described by Pallas. That Pallas had the annularis particularly in view, instead of cavernosa, in his description of astroites, is evident D6 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. from what he there says of the size of the calicles, and also when, on p. 326, he; compares the stars of M. porites with those of his astroites, and says they are subequal. This species occasionally shows certain calicles larger than usual, and with more septa. Such calicles may subdivide by regular fission, as is the case with the similar unusually large cells in some species of Porites, Madrepora, Pocillopora, etc., in which fission is elsewhere very unusual. One of oui Bermuda specimens shows such a cell in the very process of subdivision, (pi. xv, fig. 1, a). This coral occurs on the outer reefs of the Bermudas, but it is not common there. It is verv common and grows to a large size on the Florida Reefs, in the Bahamas,* and throughout the West Indies. When well grown it forms hemispherical or spheroidal masses, up to five feet or more in diameter. But it also grows in irregular incrusting plates, and sometimes in nodose or lobulate masses, or even in branched forms. Mr. A. Agassiz in the work quoted, 1890, has given some interest- ing data as to its rate of growth. Other data were given by me in Proc. Boston Soc, x, p. 862, and in Dana's Coral Islands, p. 125. Variety, stellulata (Dana, ex. Ellis and Sol.). Heliastrcea stellulata Edw. and Hairne, Hist. Corall., ii, p. 473, 1857. ? Cyphastrwa oblita Duch. and Mich., Corall. Ant., p. 77, 1860. Plate XV. Figure 2. The two types of Dana's stelhdata are in the Museum of Yale Uni- versity. They are beach-worn specimens of a true Orbicella, more or less infiltrated with calcium carbonate, to which the unusual solidity of the walls and exoth'eca, in some parts, as seen in sections figured by Dana, seems to be partly due. In other parts the structure is nearly as in 0. annularis, to which it probably belongs, though there are differences in the sections not due to infiltration. Its septal arrange- ment is the same as in ordinary specimens of the latter, those of the third cycle being distinct, but narrow and thin. The borders of the calicles seem to have been but little raised, and the septa rather thinner than usual, and not much exsert, but the poor condition of the specimens renders these characters rather uncertain. The calicles are rather smaller (2 to 2-5 n " n in diameter) than is usual in O. annularis. The thin septa are in three regular cycles ; those of the third cycle are very thin and reach only one-fourth or one- * There is a fine Bahama specimen, about four feet in diameter and three in height, in the Amer. Mus., New York (coll. R. P. Whitfield). A. JEJ. Yerrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 97 third to the columella, which is well developed. The septa are a little thickened at the wall ; their faces are only slightly granulated. There are a few irregular small teeth on their inner edges where best preserved ; upper ends are all worn off ; some have a paliform tooth at the base. The costae are well developed, inosculating, with irreg- ular exothecal dissepiments between them, as in O. annularis. But in some vertical sections the walls appear as narrow, solid structures, (where unaltered) ; in the sections the columella region is loosely filled with stout ascending trabecular the endotheca consists of small, very thin, nearly horizontal dissepiments, inclining downward a little, and often in two series. No. 4266. Their origin is uncertain, but it appears to be West Indian. They are in the same beach-worn state as several other types of AY est Indian corals studied by Professor Dana. Apparently most West Indian corals, in good condition, were scarce in American museums at the time when he wrote his great work. It appears to be a small or somewhat dwarfed variety of O. annu- laris. I have seen fresh specimens of a similar variety from the Florida Reefs. This may well be identical with M. stellulata Ellis and Sol., but the latter cannot be determined with any certainty from the figure, which represents a badly worn specimen. Its calicles, as figured, are mostly even smaller than in Dana's type, and somewhat unequal in size ; the walls appear to be as solid as in the latter ; the calicles project slightly as in annularis ; 12 to 15 septa are figured, all per- fect ; columella is as in annularis. There is much more reason for calling this a variety of 0. annidaris than there is for identifying it with Solenastra a excelsa (jmvs) Pourtales, Deep Sea Corals, p. 77, 1871. Plate XV. Figure 4. Dana's type of this species, in the Boston Society of Natural His- tory, was carefully studied by me a number of years ago, and descriptions were made at that time. The type is apparently slightly beach-worn, but so little that the natural surface of the coenenchyma and costse and the summits of the septa are well preserved in most parts, and there is no evidence of post-mortem alteration by infiltra- tion to account for the solidity of the coenenchyma, referred to by Dana, and which is, indeed, quite remarkable in most parts. The coral is very solid and heavy as contrasted with 0. annularis or Solenastrcea hyades. A fragment, apparently of the same specimen, and which appears to have been used by Dana in describing the details, is preserved in the Museum of Yale University. From this the accompanying photograph has been made. (PI. xv, fig. 4.) The coral grows in irregular, often upright, lobed or gibbous masses, up to 100 to 150 mm or more high, but when young it must be encrusting. No. 1729. The type specimen is so strongly lobed that the lobules in some places look like incipient branches. But these may possibly be due to the coral growing over the tubes of invading bivalves or annelids, though none can be seen without sections. The calicles are more closely crowded on the lobules, especially at the obtuse summits where they become angular and are separated by thin Avails and cellular exotheca. Elsewhere the calicles are nearly circular, scarcely elevated, and separated by exothecal spaces usually about equal to the radii of the calicles, but toward the base often equal to their diameters. The exotheca and walls are very solid in most parts. The 24 costse are subequal, thickened, only slightly raised, faintly or almost microscopically granulated; those of adjacent calicles are So under Cyphastrcea costata Duncan = C. oblita D. and M. (p. 274, op. cit.) lie says : "it was named by Duchass. and Mich, two years previously ; but they gave so inadequate a diagnosis that their name has no claim to precedence." Yet the latter diagnosis consists of six lines, giving details of the septa, costa?, columella, pali, grairalations, etc., that were never mentioned by Linne, Ellis and Sol., and other early writers on whose briefer diagnoses he bases radical changes in accepted nomenclature. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. 99 usually separated at the surface by a slight intermediate groove, form- ing polygonal areas around the calicles. The exotheea is nearly level with the edges of the walls and costa?, flat or slightly concave, minutely granulated or nearly smooth, sometimes slightly vesicular at the surface, but usually almost solid and blended with the costa? and walls ; near the tips costs? unite and exotheea is cellular. In a transverse section, near the surface, the entire partition between the calicles may be perfectly solid, whether thick or thin, but in many cases one or two rows of small rounded or crescent- shaped vesicles can be seen, and sometimes, close to the surface, vesi- cular dissepiments are visible between the small costa?, while close to the basal margin of the coral the exotheea may be decidedly vesicu- lar, appearing almost like miniature honey-comb in transverse sec- tions. But this basal portion is formed by the thin, down-growing margin, where the new calicles are very short, oblique, and far apart, as in many other corals that have a thin, proliferous margin. The septa are generally 24, subequal, in three regular cycles ; those of the first two cycles are nearly equal in height and thickness; those of the third cycle are thinner and narroAver, and generally bend to the right and left in pairs to join the straight septa of the second cycle, usually at a point more than half-way to the columella, and often very near it. The summits of all the septa are narrow and only slightly raised above the walls. The edges are irregularly ser- rulate, two to four of the basal teeth being the larger. The sides are distinctly granulated. The septa are all thin, but slightly thickened toward the wall, and all are narrowed above the base, so as to leave a cup-like calicular cavity. The columella is small, trabecular, papil- lose, and often nearly wanting. In transverse sections of some calicles it is solid, and formed by the union of the inner edges of the septa, but in most it is small, porous, trabecular. Diameter of the calicles 2*5 to 3 mm ; breadth of intercalicinal spaces, usually 1 to 2 mm , sometimes 3 to 4 mm or more, near the base. Origin uncertain, supposed to be West Indies. Several irregular gibbous masses of this species, 3 to 5 inches in thickness, in the Amer. Mus., New York, were found near Osprey, West Florida, cast on the beach after a storm, by R. P. Whitfield (No. 485). I have also seen specimens from Key West. This species, in the form and structure of its calicles and septa, resembles Solenastrma hyades, but the latter has cellular exotheea and rudimentary costa?, characteristic of Solenastrma, while this has the costa? and exotheea of Orblcella, though the exotheea and walls LOO A. E. Verrill — Bevmudian and West Indian Reef Corals. become more solid and heavy than usual in that genus, hut not more so than in 0. hirtella and some other species. In both this and hyades the septa of the third cycle are well developed and bend toward and join those of the second cycles ; in both the septa are thin and but little prominent above the wall; and the columella is usually well developed in both. But hyades lacks the radial costal ridges on the exotheca and the bounding polygonal grooves between the calicles. The differences in sections are very marked. However, there are places, near the base, where the exotheca becomes more cel- lular in this species, and in sections of the under side it is composed of angular exothecal cells separated by thin dissepiments only. In some respects this species is intermediate between Solenastrcea and Orbicella, and raises the doubt whether a larger series might not compel us to unite the two genera. I have seen no specimens truly intermediate between this and hyades, and as they can be distinguished by structural characters generally held to be generic, it is necessary to keep them separate here, but they may eventually prove to be one species. In that case Solenastrcea cannot be maintained as a distinct genus. From O. annularis and var. stellulata it can at once be distin- guished by the thinner and much less projecting septa, and by the wider septa of the third cycle, which do not bend toward and join the septa of the second cycle in those forms. Orbicella liispidula V., sp. nov. Plate XV. Figures 3, 3a, 3&. Coral an encrusting mass over 125 mm across, and from 5 to 20' thick. The texture is rather solid and heavy, there being much solid exotheca between the calicles, which are rather far apart, the inter- spaces being mostly equal to, and often exceeding, their diameter. The calicles are round, regularly stellate, a little prominent, with swollen, sloping, costate rims, much as in those of 0. annularis, which they resemble in size, though distinctly larger. The septa are in three very regular cycles : the twelve principal ones are wide, nearly equal, all reaching the rather large columella ; their edges are per- pendicular and finely, sharply serrate, with slender rough teeth, which extend also over their prominent, obtuse or subtruncate sum- mits, giving them a rough appearance under a lens ; their surfaces are also rough or hispid with numerous conical grains. The septa of the third cycle are narrow, straight, and usually reach about half- way to the columella. A. E. Yerrill — JBermudian and West Indian Reef Corah. 101 The costse are thick, not very high, meeting or inosculating between the calicles, and covered with a single row of small, slender, rough spinules. The columella is well developed, formed of con- torted trabecular processes, and often having a small pit in the cen- ter and a few erect spinules, similar to the slender, rough, paliform teeth that often (but not regularly) stand at the base of some of the 12 larger septa. In sections the walls are very thick and nearly solid. The endo- thecal dissepiments are small, thin, irregularly convex or flat above. The calicles are not filled up below, or only slightly encroached upon, by a deposit between some of the septa. Diameter of the calicles 3 to 3.5 mm ; distance between them mostly 2 to 4 mi ", often more. Florida Reefs (Maj. E. B. Hunt), Yale Museum, No. 98. Near Nassau, N. P. (coll. R P. Whitfield), Amer. Mus., New York. This has the general appearance of 0. annidaris, but with calicles larger than usual and decidedly farther apart. The walls and exotheca are much thicker and more solid, and the endothecal cells are fewer and less regular. The sharply spinulose and hispid septa and costce are also characteristic. The exothecal deposits are nearly as solid as in Oeulina. A Nassau specimen, in the American Museum, is an irregular rounded mass, about five inches in diameter and three to four thick, with a lobulated surface. The coral is heavy and solid ; the surface of the coenenchyma is spinulose ; the costse well developed. The calicles are more variable in size than in the type, in some places being one-half smaller and closely crowded. Coll. R. P. Whitfield. Orbicella Braziliana Ver., nom. nov. Orbicella cavernosa Quelch, Voy. Chall., xvi, p. 106, 1886 (non Lam.). I propose this name for the form taken by the Challenger, off Barra Grande, Brazil, in 30 fathoms. According to Quelch it forms rounded masses two feet in diame- ter. Its exotheca is so vesicular as to partly hide the costae ; the septa are uniformly thickened. As he refers it to cavernosa, it should have large calicles with four cycles of septa. Since nearly all the other Brazilian corals are distinct from the West Indian, the locality and depth where this was found, as well as the characters mentioned, indicate a species distinct from the common West Indian reef species. 102 A. E. Verrill — Bennudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Orbicella cavernosa (Linne) Ver. Madrepora cavernosa Linne, Syst., ed. xii, p. 1276, 1766. Esper, Fortsetz. i, p. 18, pi. xxxvii, 1797. Madrepora radiata Ellis and Sol., Zooph., p. 169, pi. xlvii, fig. 8, 1786. Favia cavernosa Oken, Lehr. Naturg., p. 67, 1815. Astrea radiata and .4. argus Lam., Hist. Anim. sans Vert,, ii, pp. 258, 259, 1816 ; ed. 2, p. 404. Lamouroux, Encyl. Meth., pp. 57, 131, pi. xlvii, fig. 8, 1824. (Eeprint of plate of Ellis and Sol.) Astrea cavernosa Schweig., Naturg., p. 419, 1820. Edw. and Hairne, Brit. Fossil Corals, p. xxxix, 1850. Astrea {Orbicella) argus and .1. (0.) radiata Dana, Zooph.. pp 206, 207. pi. x. figs. In, lb, 1846. Astrea cavernosa, A. radiata, and .4. conferta Edw. and Haime, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. x, pl. ix, figs. 1, lo, vol. xii. pp. 97, 101, 102, 1850. Heliastrcea conferta, H. cavernosa, and H. radiata Edw. and Haime, Hist. Corall., ii, pp. 460, 463, 470, 1857. Orbicella cavernosa Verrill, Bull. Mns. Comp. Zool., i, p. 47, 1864. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., x, p. 323, 1865. These Trans., x, p. 553, 1900. Pourtales, Florida Beefs, p. 76, 1871. Quelch, Reef Corals, Chall. Exp., xvi, pp. 12, 106, 1886. Orbicella radiata (pars), Gregory, Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., Ii, p. 270, 1895. Orbicella cavernosa Van ghan, op. eit., p. 27, 1901 (Syn. and description). Vaughan adds to the synonyms the following fossil forms described by Duncan: A. endothecata, A. cylindrica, A. antiguensis f, A. intermedia, A. antil- larwinf, A. brevis. Much of the confusion in regard to the name of this species is due to the fact that it was generally described and figured from badly beach-worn specimens by the earlier writers. Such specimens have the septa and calicles worn away and the hard exotheca thus becomes prominent around the excavate calicles, so as to greatly change the appearance of the coral. Another cause is the rather wide variations in the size of the calicles. The normal or average specimens have the calicles about 6 to *- in diameter, but occasionally a specimen occurs in which part or all of them may be 9-1 mm , or rarely, even ll mm in diameter. Some- times, on crowded parts of large specimens, the diameter may he only 4 to 5 mm . The degree of elevation of the calicles is also more or less variable on a single specimen. The calicles may be pretty close together, where crowded, but in other cases they are separated by spaces of 4 to 6 m,n or more. The costffi are usually well developed as denticulated, rounded, radial ribs, usually 48 in number. The septa are generally about 48, arranged in four regular cycle-. but several of those of the last cycle are often rudimentary or lack- ing, reducing the number to 40-44. They differ in breadth and s A. JE. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 103 thickness according to the cycles ; those of the last cycle are very thin and often bend toward and join those of the third cycle. The principal septa are exsert, denticulated, and thickened at the wall. The columella is usually well developed and broad. The paliform teeth are distinct, but not very prominent. It sometimes forms hem- ispherical masses four to five feet or more in diameter. This species appears to be rare at the Bermudas, and probably occurs only on the outermost reefs. The only specimen seen by me from there was from near the North Rocks. (Centennial collection.) It is a hemisphere about 11 inches in diameter, of the typical form. It is common on the Florida reefs and throughout the West Indies. Bahia, Brazil; (Yale Mns.);=var. hirta, nov., with elevated corallites; roughly serrate, thin costse and septa; calicles deep, 5-G'" m broad ; septa narrow, perpendicular within, usually 40-44. PL xxxiii, figs. 2, 2a. Orbicella aperta Verrill. Heliastrcea aperta Verrill, these Trans., vol. i, part 2, p. 356, 1868. Plate XXXIII. Figures 1, In. This species is remarkable, not only for its thin, lacerately toothed, and strongly exsert septa, but also for its very thin walls and abun- dant and very cellular exotheca, so that the coral is very light, as compared with 0. cavernosa and 0. annularis. There are usually four cycles of septa, those of the third being very narrow. The costa? are rather feeble and those of the fourth cycle are rudimentary or lacking. The calicles average somewhat smaller than in 0. cavernosa, but decided^ larger than in 0. annularis. They are about 6 to S mm in diameter. The interseptal loculi are deep and wide. The columella is rather wide, but is loosely trabecular and lamellar. Having recently reexamined the original type of this species, in comparison with large series of O. cavernosa, I must adhere to my original opinion that it is a distinct species. Mr. Gregory (op. cit., p. l'71) thinks it is only a form of 0. caver- nosa. Mr. Vaughan (op. cit., p. •". 1) thinks it a strongly marked variety, if not a distinct species. Both species occur on the coast of Brazil, in shallow water, and apparently in the same region, but perhaps not in the same stations. The type was from the Abrolhos Beefs, Brazil, in three to four feet of water. According to Mr. R. Rathbun, it is abundant in the Bay of Bahia, as at the Island of Itaparica, where it is collected to be burned into quicklime, with other corals. No. 15 is. 104 A. E. Verrill — Bermndian and West Indian Reef Corals. Solenastraea hyades (Dana) D. and Mich. Astrea (Orbicella) hyades Dana, Zooph. U. States Expl. Exp., p. 212, pi. x, fig. 15, 1846. Heliastrcea f hyades Eclw. and Hainie, Hist. Nat. Corall., ii, p. 478, 1857. Solenastraia Bournoni Eclw. and Haime, Ann. Sci. Nat., xii, p. 121, 1850; Hist. Corall., ii, p. 497, 1857. Solenastrea hyades + f S. micans + ? Heliastrcea abdita Duch. and Mich., Corall. Antill., pp. 76, 77, pi. ix, figs. 9, 10 (not 10 and 11, as in text), 1860. (On pi. ix there are two figures numbered 9, one by error for 10.) Solenastrcea hyades Verrill, in Dana, Coral Islands, ed. 1, p. 280; ed. 3, p. 421, 1890. Solenastrcea excelsa (pars) Pourt., Deep Sea Corals, p. 77, 1871. f? Solenastraea stelhdata (pars) Gregory, Quart. J. Linn. Soc, li, p. 273, pi. x, figs, 4«, 4b, 1895 (non Ellis and Sol.). Plate XV. Figures 5. 5a. The types of Orbicella hyades Dana and 0. excelsa Dana are in the Boston Society of Natural History, where I carefully studied them several years ago. Very similar specimens of hyades, from St. Thomas, attached to stones, are in the Yale Museum. These form convex masses, encrust- ing and thin at the margins, where the newly formed calicles are very oblique. (PI. xv, fig. 5.) No. 1586&. Calicles circular, or nearly so, mostly 3 to 3.5""" in diameter ; bor- ders generally distinctly elevated above the exotheca, often to the height of .5 to l mm . Younger and smaller calicles, 1.5 to 2.5 mm in diameter, are scattered between the full grown ones. In the middle of the convex summit the calicles are so crowded that the walls are in contact, and here they often become angular by crowding, and when not in contact their edges may not be elevated. On other parts they may be separated by intervals of 2 to 3 mm or more. The walls are very thin. The cost;e are thickened and roughly minutely serrulate ; they are very narrow and mostly confined to the wall, never extending across the exothecal spaces, when these occur. The surface of the exotheca is smooth or vesicular ; in sections the exotheca is openly vesicular. Septa 20 to 24, mostly 24 in mature calicles; 12 extend to the columella ; those of the third cycle are also wide, but thinner, and most of them bend toward and join the larger ones about midway between the wall and columella. The septa all become thin and curved toward the columella, but thickened at the wall; the sum- mits are narrowed and rather prominent above the walls ; inner edge irregularly and roughly serrulate, especially distally ; sides A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 105 roughly granulated. Paliform lobes small and thin. Columella usually rather small and loose ; formed of small twisted processes from the inner edges of the septa, but variable in size. Thickness of the larger mass from St. Thomas, about 50 mm ; diameter, 125 mra ; diameter of calicles mostly 3 to 3.5 mm ; rarely 4 mm . This species is found on the Florida Reefs and throughout the West Indies. It has not been found at the Bermudas. St. Thomas (coll. C. F. Hartt, Yale Mus.). In the Amer. Museum, New York, there is a large turbinate mass, 12 to 14 inches in diameter and about 10 inches high, from Jamaica. Mr. Pourtales put Madrepora pleiades Ellis and Sol. and M. steUulata E. and H., as doubtful synonyms of this species. The original descriptions and figures of both those species are too imper- fect for definite determination, having been based on badly beach- worn specimens, superficially examined, and rudely figured. Mr. Gregory adopted stelhdata as the name of this or an allied fossil species, and put hyades under Orbicella n'-rapora. Yet Dana's description and figures are vastly better than those of Ellis and Solander. It seems incredible that such an error should have been made in so recent a work. The steUulata of Dana (ex. Ellis and Sol.) is an Orbicella, and is quite likely to be the same species named steUulata by Ellis and Sol. Surely Dana had as good reasons for his opinion as Gregory had. Therefore, it seems best to follow Dana's determination of that name, as being the prior one, and also because it eliminates a very doubtful and useless name. See p. 97. As for pleiades (Ellis and Sol.), that is so doubtful a form that it has been interpreted in many different ways. According to Edw. and Haime it is the same as their Heliastrcea acropora, and this seems to be the prevailing opinion. But the description and figure would apply just as well or better to certain East Indian species of ISolenastrma. Hence it is best to eliminate the name by considering it the same as Solenastrcea pleiades (Dana). There is no reason for thinking that it was a West Indian coral. The fossil Solenasti'ma steUulata of Gregory may not be this species, for it has larger costa?, and much thicker and more solid exotheca and walls, while the septa of the third cycle are represented as narrow and straight. The figured sections resemble more nearly some of those seen in Orbicella excelsa, to which I am inclined to believe that his figured specimens belong. The Madrepora hyades Ellis and Sol. was a Siderastrcea, and has no relation to Dana's species. 106 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Plesiastraea Goodei Verrill. These Trans., x, p. 553, pi. lxvii, fig. 1, 1900. In addition to the type, I have seen another fine Bevmudian speci- nien <>f this species, in the American Museum, Xew York, collected on a reef in Bailey Bay, at the depth of ahout 20 feet, by Mr. R. I'. - Figure 1. — Plesiastnca Goodei Ver. Part of type. x 4. Whitfield, in 189*7. It is about 10 inches in diameter, in the form of a somewhat irregular and lobulated hemisphere. The same museum has two smaller specimens, in the form of sub- conical masses, 3 to 4 inches in diameter, obtained in the Bahamas by Mr. R. P. Whitfield. These also agree very closely with the type in all essential points, but some of them have the calicles more crowded, smaller, and subangnlar in some areas. Stephanoccenia intersepta (Esper.) Edw. and H. Madrepora intersepta Esper, Pflanz.. Forts., I, p. 99, pi. lxxix. 1 T9T. Astrea intersepta Lam., Hist. Anim. s. Vert., ii. p. 266, 1816: ed. ii, p. 417. (nun Dana). Stephanoccenia intersepta and S. Michelini Edw. and Haime, Ann. ScL Nat., x, pp. 300, 301, pi. 7, fig. 1-lb, 1849; Hist. Corall.. ii. pp. 260, 266. 1857. Gregory, Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, li, p. 276, pi. xi. tigs. 5a, 56, 6, 1895. Vaughan, op. cit,, p. 20, 1901. Antillastrcea spongiformis Duncan, Revision Mad., p. 108. 1S84. (t. Gregory from type). The recent specimens that I have seen from the West Indies agree better with S. Michelini. which is, perhaps, only a massive variety of S. intersepta. The American Museum, New York, has a large lobulated mass, over a foot in diameter, from Jamaica, This lias six large rounded lobes, the largest about 6 inches in diameter, rising from a common basal mass. The septa are much exsert, narrow, entire, and with the inner edge perpendicular, leaving a narrow central cup. The columella is A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 107 small, lamellose, sometimes with a minute central tubercle. The calicles vary considerably in size, being- smaller and more crowded, sometimes angular, at the bases of the lobes. The distance between them is also variable. The diameter of the calicles varies from 1.75 to 2.5 mm , but most of them are about 2 to 2.5 mm . Throughout the West Indies, but not recorded from Florida nor from the Bermudas. Fossil in the elevated reefs of many of the West Indies. Cyphastraea nodulosa Ver., sp. nov. Plate XXXI. Figures 2, 2a, 26. The coral forms small nodular masses, about 55 to 65 mm in diameter and 35 to 45 mm high, consisting of numerous small, rounded or short, subclavate nodules, rising like incipient branches from a common thick, irregular base. It is compact and heavy, with small circular calicles. The corallites, where not much crowded, project distinctly above the coenenchynia and have a rather thin rim and feebly costate wall. In other parts they are not at all raised and the calicles may be immersed in the coenenchynia, which is very compact, with the sur- face sometimes covered with low rounded granules, in radial costal lines, but in other parts it is often nearly smooth. The calicles are small, but rather open and deep, owing to the narrow septa. They are mostly from 1.25 to 1.50 mm in diameter, and are often separated by spaces of 1 to 2 mm . The septa are in three cycles, consisting of 12 narrow, subequal ones, of the two first cycles, alternating with 12 very narrow or rudimentary ones of the third cycle. These last are often lacking, or invisible without a lens, in some of the systems. The larger septa are narrow, usually much exsert, with an obtuse, serrulate apex, and a perpendicular inner edge, which is finely ser- rulate or subentire ; their proximal portion is very thin and denticu- late. The paliform tooth is very small, but distinct, papilliform. The columella is small, minutely trabecular with one or more minute papilla? on the surface. In sections the walls and exotheca are often entirely compact, especially near the surface, but in other parts there may be exothecal cellules ; the septa are thin and divided into numerous fine tra- becular ; the dissepiments are numerous, very thin, nearly horizontal, often subtabular ; columella loosely trabecular. Bahamas,— R. P. Whitfield; three specimens, No. 542, Amer. Mus. 108 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Family Stylophoridae Ver. Stylophorince Edw. and Haime, Hist., ii, p. 132, 1857. Stylojihoridce Verrill, these Trans., i, p. 5 14, 1867. Corals mostly branched, often encrusting when young ; sometimes lobulate or massive, increasing by budding. Calicles small, stellate, inmersed, usually separated by rather abundant exothecal coenen- chyma, not entirely solid, and often granulated or striated on the surface. Septa generally either 10 or 12. Loculi between the septa not filled up below by stereoplasm. Columella various. Polyps exserl in expansion, usually with 12, 20, or 24 tentacles. This family is chiefly Indo-Pacific, where it is represented by numerous species of Stylophora. Madracis decactis (Lyrn.) Ver. Astrea decactis Lyman, Proc. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist., vi, p. 260, 1859. Madrtu-is decactis Verrill. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., i, p. 45, 1864. Pourtales, Deep Sea Corals, pp. 28, 67, pi. vii, figs. 1-4, 1871. Quelch, op. cit., p. 53, 1886. Gregory, op. cit., p. 258. fig. 1. 1895. Verrill, these Trans., x, p. 554. pi. lxvii, figs. 8, 10, 1900. Reussia lamellosa Duch. and Mich., Corall. Antill.. p. 339 [62], pi. ix, figs. 7. 8 (as numbered on plate, not 8, 9 as in text), 1860 (non Stylojihora minddlis, p. 61, pi. ix, figs. 6, 9, as numbered, not 6, 7, as in text). Stephanocamia dendroidea Duncan, Quart. J. Linn. Soc, xix, p. 432, 1863, non Edw. and H. (t. Gregory). Axhelia decactis Vaughan, op. cit., p. 8, 1901. ? Madracis asperula Moseley, Voy. Chall., ii. p. 182, 1880. from S. W. Bank, off Bermuda, 30 fath. {? non E. and Haime). This species occurs in thin crusts, irregularly massive, nodose or lobulated, and also both in slender, and in short, stout, branched 2. 2a. Figure 2. — Madracis decactis (Ly.) Ver. Part of the dry coral. Figure 2a.— The same, with the polyps expanded. x 12. forms. The animals have been described both by Pourtales and myself and were figured by me. (These Trans., x, pi. lxvii, fig. 10.) A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. J 09 The general color of the coral, in life, is yellow, yellowish brown, or purplish brown ; disk often purplish, with white radii, forming a star around the mouth ; lips and tips of tentacles white. As stated by Pourtales, and figured by me in 1900, there are three pentamerous cycles of tentacles (5, 5, 10) and two equal cycles of septa (5, 5). Sometimes a few rudimentary septa of the third cycle appear. One Bermuda specimen has several very large calicles, with 20 to 30 regular septa. PI. xiv, fig. roposes to unite them under the name Axhelia. Both names. are of the same date. Therefore, if they are to be united, Duncan's choice of names has precedence and should be upheld. Kent gave it the name Pentalo- jdiora, as a substitute for Reussia (preoccupied). However, these genera seem to me sufficiently distinct. Axohelia lacks the definite bounding ridges of the calicles and the granulated exotheca. Its exothecal surfaces are smooth or striated, and show no partitions between the calicles. Perhaps the Madracis taken by the Challenger, on the S. W. Bank, in 30 fathoms, and recorded by Moselev as M. asperula, was M. decaetis, which is not uncommon on the reefs in shallow water.* Some of the lobulated or branched clumps are 6 inches or more high and broad, but they are very brittle and not often obtained entire. Several large and fine specimens of this kind are preserved in the American Museum, New York, as well as a slender, dichoto- mously branched variety. Both forms occur at the Bermudas. It is found on the Bermuda Reefs and throughout the West Indies. It also occurs as a fossil in the raised reefs of many of the islands. Gregory (op. cit.) records it as a Pleistocene fossil from Bermuda, (probably from Nelson's collection in Geol. Soc, London). The age of such Bermuda fossils, from the " beach rock," is however very uncertain, but they are probably postpliocene, or post glacial. Pourtales was evidently wrong in referring to this species the Stylophora mirabilis Duch. and Mich. Probably he was misled by errors in the numbering of the plate (ix). On that plate there are two figs. 9. One of these is a misprint for 7, and represents the enlarged calicles of the mirabilis (fig. 6), and shows 18 to 24 equal septa. The other fig. 9 is a Solenastrma and should have been 10. Other errors in numbering occur on this plate. * Pourtales (Deep Sea Corals, p. 27, pi. vii, fig. 4, and in later papers) records M. asperula Edw. and Haime, from the West Indian region, in 36-280 fathoms. 110 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. Axohelia Schrammii ? Pourt., Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., iv, p. 41, pi. viii, fig. 2, 1874. Plate XVIII. Figures 3, 4. Coral small, arborescently branched, the terminal branches slender, tapered, acute ; the larger stems are about 12-15 mm in diameter. The coral is hard ; the coenenchyma is abundant in the larger branches, and its surface is covered with long, curved septocostal striae, between which it is microscopically granulated, but there are no lines of gran- ules bounding the calicinal areas, as in Madracis. Septa 10, equal, narrow, slightly prominent. Columella small, solid, tubercular. Several specimens are in the Museum of Yale Univ. They are attached to pieces of a cable. (Coll. H. A.Ward.) Guadaloupe (Pourt.). Its calicles agree better with A. myriaster (?) Pourt., pi. viii, fig. 3, which may not be distinct. No. 5062. Family Oculinidse Edw. and Haime, restr. Oeulinidoe Verrill, these Trans., i, p. 514, 1867. Corals generally branched, increasing by budding. Calicles round, stellate. Septa 12 to 48 or rarely more, unequal, usually entire or subentire ; pali often present. Interseptal loculi become filled up and obliterated below by a solid endothecal deposit, or stereoplasm. Usually a solid coenenchyma, with curved costal striations on its surface, separates the calicles, especially in the older parts of the coral, where it is often abundant. Madrepora (Linne) Oken, restr. (non Lam.). Type, M. oculata Linne. Madrepora (pars) Linne, and of all writers before 1801 (not of Lamarck, 1801, nor of 1816 ; not of Ehrenberg, 1834). Matrepora, restricted (altered spelling), Oken, Lehrb. Naturg., p. 72, 1815. Oculina (pars) Lamarck, Hist. Anim. sans Vert., ii, p. 284, 1816. Amphelia and Lophelia Edw. and Haime, Coniptes-rendus, xxix, p. 69, 1849. Amphihelia and Lophohelia Edw. and Haime, Hist. Nat. Corall., ii, pp. 116. 118, 1857. Lox>holwlia Pourtales, Deep Sea Corals, p. 25. It is well known that Linne (Syst. Nat., ed. x, 1758) did not include in his genus Madrepora any recognized species of the Lamarckian genus of that name, but placed by an error M. muricata (in which several species were included) in his genus Millepora, although it agrees with his definition of Madrepora. He corrected this mistake in the ed. xii, p. 1_ ; 79, where Madrepora muricata appears. Pallas, (Elenchus, p. 327, 1766) had previously made the same correction. No valid attempt to subdivide the great genus Madrepora seems t<> A. E. Verritt — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Ill have been made until 1801, when Lamarck (Syst. Anim., pp. 369-375) divided it into eight genera.* Unfortunately he restricted the name Madrepora to the group that included 31. muricata and 31. porites Pallas. The latter was made the type of Porites, by Link, 1807." The next restriction of the name was by Oken (Lehrb., 1815), who established a number of additional generic subdivisions and restricted Madrepora (which he spelled Matrepora\) to four species, one of which, 31. ramea, became the type of Dendrophyllia Bv., 1830 ; the others were earlier (1810) placed in Oculina by Lamarck. One of these (31. oculata Linne), which is the long-known and officinal "white coral " of the Mediterranean, the " 31adrepora vulgaris " of Tourne- fort, may well be taken as the true type of 3Iadrepora, not only on account of Oken's restriction, but also because of the rule, advocated and followed by many naturalists of the Limmean period, that the type of a genus should be the most common or officinal and well- known species, if such were included. Certainly 31. oculata would answer well to this requirement, and so would M. prolifera. Moreover, in following the principle of elimination, this was one of the very last of the determinable Linna?an species to receive a special generic name (1849). 31. proli/'era, the second species of Oken, and the type of Lophohelia E. and H., is now made congeneric with 31. oculata. Therefore, it appears that octdata should be taken as the true type of the restricted genus Madrepora, if the Lamarckian nomenclature must, in this case, be abandoned, as argued by VaughanJ and other recent writers. * These genera are as follows : — C'yclolites, p. 369 ; Fungia, p. 369 ; Caryo- phyllia, p. 370 ; Madrepora, p. 371 ; Astrea, p. 371 ; Meandrina, p. 372 ; Pavona, p. 372 ; Agarieia, p. 373. f That Oken, in using Matrepora, did not intend it as a new name, but only as a corrected spelling of Madrepora , is proved by the fact that in citing the Lin- nnean names of species under various genera, he invariably quotes them as " Matrepora" or "Mat.'''' of Linne'. The generic divisions of Madrepora, pro- posed by Oken are as follows : — Astrea, p. 65 = Astrea (pars) Lam., 1801 ; Acro- pora, p. 66; Turbinaria, p. 67; Favia, p. 07; Pectinia, p. 68 = Meandrina Lam., 1801 ; Undaria, p. 69= Agarieia, Lam., 1801 ; Mycedmm, p. 69 ; Mcean- dra, p. 70; Mairepora, p. 71 (includes 4 species, viz. — M. ramea, M. prolifera, M. virginea, M. oculata) ; GaJaxea, p. 72 (with 4 species) ; Mussa, p. 73 (2 species) ; Fungia, p. 74, 2 sp. — Fungia Lam., 1801. Probably Lamarck's Systeme Anim. sans Vert., 1801, was not known to Oken, for he makes no reference to it. The coincidences in some of the names were probably due to the influence of the older specific and polynomial names. Neither does he i*efer to Link's work of 1807. } Samml. Geol. Eeichs-Mus., ii, p. 08, 1901. 112 A. IH. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Ehrenberg, in 1834, definitely restricted Madrepora to a group that included Porites and Mbntipora, while he called the Lamarckian genus, Heteropora. His nomenclature cannot be followed : 1st. because Porites had been separated and named by Link, 1807, and Lamarck, 1816 ; 2d, no recognizable species of Mbntipora was included in Madrepora by Linne, ed. x ; 3d, Heteropora had pre- viously been used by Blainville for a bryozoan; 4th, Oken's restric- tion lias priority. For several reasons, it seems to me doubtful whether, under the rules of priority usually accepted, it will not be thought by many unnecessary to abandon the name Madrepora for the muricata- type, as restricted by Lamarck, for the following reasons : — 1st. — By Linne and all other writers of his period Madrepora was used as a collective name for all corals of the order Madreporaria. It was rather an order or suborder than a genus, and therefore it seems useless to apply the rigitl modern rules of priority to such a group name. 2d. — Madrepora muricata L. had been referred to Madrepora by Linne, as M. spinosa, before the date of ed. x (Mus. Tessin., p. 118), and its reference to Millepora in the later work was clearly an error speedily corrected.* 3d. — Linne, in ed. xii, gave his more mature and corrected views as to his own genera. Therefore, for the discussion of generic nomen- clature, it might be better not to go back of that edition. 4th. — It is possible that at least one of his species in the ed. \. viz. M. polygama, No. 28, p. 795, belongs to the Lamarckian genus Madrepora, for it was described as having cylindrical, 12-rayed calicles, though the larger cells, mentioned by him, were probably parasitic barnacles. This species is probably indeterminable. It may have been a Mbntipora. Should M. polygama L. be hereafter positively identified as a species congeneric with M. muricata, as is possible, this fad alone would, perhaps, make valid Lamarck's restriction of the name Madn - porn in the opinion of many. Such a determination is not impos- sible, though this species has hitherto remained very doubtful. In the meantime many persons will doubtless prefer to take the more recent and radical course, and apply some other name to Lamarck's Madrepora. Yaughan (op. cit., p. 68) has adopted Isopora, first used under Madrepora as a subgeneric name by Studer, * By another error he referred the "red coral'' (Corallium rubrum) to Madre- pora iM. rubru. p. 797). A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. 113 in 1878. Under this name he included the whole extensive genus. This name would surely be a very inappropriate one, so far as its significance is concerned, nor would Studer's definition apply to the genus, as a whole. Moreover, it may become necessary to separate Isopora, in Studer's sense, as a genus. I believe that Acropora Oken has much better claims for adoption in place of Madrepora. (See below.) As restricted above, the genus will include branching oculinoid corals that increase by lateral or marginal buds ; with turbinate corallites, and deep cup-like calicles. The coenenchyma is usually abundant and solid in the main branches and trunk, but may be very scanty in the terminal branches. Pali lacking. Septa broad, entire. Columella small or lacking. Besides the type and 31. virginea (L.), which is considered identi- cal with it by Edw. and Haime, the genus Madrepora , as restricted above, would include the following species and others: 31. vemista E. and H., Australia. 31. exigua (Pourt., as Lophohelia). Off Florida, 36-79 fathoms. 31. Carolina (Pourt., as Lophohelia). Off Havana. 31. p>rolifera (L.). Boreal and Arctic, 'and in deep waterto Florida. 31. in fundibul if er a Lam. (as Ocidina). Kent, fig., 1871 ; Quelch, p. 53. Ternate. 31. subcostata (Edw. and H.). Locality unknown. 31. Bef ranee i (E. and H.). Pliocene of Europe. 31. Candida (Moseley, 1881, as Bophohelia). Off Sombrero I., 450 fathoms. 31. tenuis (Moseley, 1881, as Lophohelia). Philippine Is. 31. anthophyllites (Ellis and Sol.) ; E. and Haime, as Lophohelia. E. Indies. Type is in Hunterian Mus., t. Young. 31. ornata (Duncan). North Atlantic. Family Eusmillidse Verrill, 1866. EusmiUinm (pars) and Euphylliacece Edw. and Haime, Hist. Corall., ii, pp. 144 and 183, 1857. Corals dichotomous, glomerate, or massive, often meandriniform or astreiform, increasing chiefly by fission, complete or incomplete. Septa entire or nearly so, sometimes very finely serrulate. Pali- form lobe, feeble or lacking. Columella variously developed, often lacking. Zooids actiniform, much exsert in expansion. Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XI. 8 November, 1901. 114 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Eusmilia aspera (Dana) Edw. and Haime. Euphyllia aspera Dana, Zooph. U. S. Expl. Exp., pp. 164, 720, pi. ix, fig. ?. 1846. Eusmilia aspera Edw. and Haime, Hist. Corall.. ii. p. 187, 1857. Eusmilia Knorrii Edw. and Haime, Mon. Aster., Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., ser. 3, x, p. 265, pi. v, fig. 2, 1849.* Gregory, op. cit., p. 261, 1895. Vaughan. op. cit., p. 13, 1901. Dana's figured type is in the Yale Museum. The description is good and the outline figure is very coi-rect. It represents a branch with three calicles, broken from a larger specimen, also in the Yale Museum. No. 466. 3. Figure 3. — Eusmillia aspera (Dana). Part of type, £ natural size. This specimen has the columella well developed in most of the calicles, though small in some of the younger ones. It consists of variously contorted thin laminae. The costre are alternately large and small ; the larger ones are thick, angular, uneven or lobed, often cristate near the calicles, and irregularly dentate, with small rough teeth. There can be no doubt of its identity with E. Knorrii K. and H., as these authors themselves admitted in their Hist. Corall., 1857. Therefore it seems strange that both Gregory and Vaughan should have tried to restore this discarded later name without any legiti- mate reason.! * Gregory (op. cit., p. 261) quotes the date of Knorrii Edw. and Haime. Monog., as 1848. Edw. and Haime themselves quote it in Hist. Corall., ii, 188, as 1849. Gregory also quotes aspera Dana as 1848. It is well known that his report was jrablished in 1846. But Gregory repeats this wrong date under various other species, so that we cannot reckon it a typographical error. Edw. and Haime give the date as 1846, correctly. f Gregory's statement that Dana's species was ' ' so inadequately diagnosed that there can be no certainty regarding it," is obviously erroneous. Edw. and Haime certainly were able to recognize it. The figure and description are far better than those of most corals before Dana's work. Moreover, the type, duly labeled, was in the same case and on the same shelf with other specimens that Mr. Gregory examined when he made his very hasty visit to the Yale Museum, (see p. 145). He could have studied it and various other types of Dana, had he taken the necessary time. A. E. Verrill—JBermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 115 Family Mussidae Ver. Fasciculate, glomerate, massive, and sometimes simple corals, increasing by fission, and with strongly dentate or spinose septa, without a paliform lobe. Calicles generally large, sometimes united in short or long series, but always with distinct centers and radial septa. Polyps much exsert in expansion, actiniform, with large tentacles. Isophyllia Edw. and Haime (emended*). Rose Corals. " Cactus Corals." Mussa (}Jars) Dana, Zooph., p. 178, 1846. Symphyllia (pars) Edw. and Haime, Ann. Sci. Nat,, xi, p. 236, 1849 ; Coral!., ii, p. 373, 1857; Duch. and Mich., Corall. Antill., p. 69, 1861. Isophyllia Edw. and Haime, Pol. Foss. Paleoz., p. 87, 1849 ; Hist, Corall., ii, p. 974, 1857. Mycetophyllia (pars) Edw. and Haime, Compt.-rend., xxvii, p. 491, 1848 ; * Hist. Corall., ii, p. 375, 1857 (2d section). Lithophyllia (pars) Duch. and Mich., Corall. Antill., pp. 67, 68, 1860, young, (non Edw. and Haime). Ulophyllia (pars) Bruggmann, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Oct., 1877, p. 312. Symphyllia (pars) Duncan, Revision, Journ. Linn. Soc, xviii, p. 91, 1884. This genus, as now restricted, includes a group of Mussidi. .' Symphyllia anemone + S. comferta + S. aglos + S. helianthus+ S. Tkomusiana + S. aspera + S. cylindrica + S. Knoxi + S. verrucosa (abnormal) Duch. and Mich., Corall. Antill., pp. 71. 72, 1860. t lAthophyllia argemone + L. cylindrica Duch. and Mich., op. cit., p. 68, pi. ix fig. 121, pi. x, fig. 15, pi. ix, figs. 17, 18, 1860, (young). Isophyllia australis + cylindrica + Knoxi t Lithophi/llin Cuboisis + L. hivera (nun Pallas) + L. argemone Quelch, Voy. Chall., Zool., xvi, pp. 10. 11, 12, pp. 83-86, 1886. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 119 Plate XVIII. Figure 2. Plate XIX. Figures 2, 3. Plate XX. Figure 2. This species occurs in abundance at the Bermudas, in shallow water (1 to 20 feet) on nearly all the reefs, and also along the shores attached to rocks, and even to small stones on shell-sand bottoms, where other corals do not grow. It is very abundant even in Harrington Sound, whei*e but few species of corals are found, owing to the less density of the water. I have personally collected and studied hundreds of specimens of this and the following species, and have kept large numbers alive, to ascertain, if possible, whether two or more species occur there, and to learn the character and extent of the variations. Probably no coral varies more than this in form, mode of growth, union and separation of the calicles, and consequently in the size and form of the calicles, character of the columella, number and size of the teeth of the septa, extent of the epitheca, etc. Therefore many nominal species have been founded, especially by Duch. and Mich., on mere stages of growth and on ordinary indi- vidual variations in the mode of growth, union of the walls, etc. The colors of the living animals of this and fragilis are also extremely variable, and often very beautiful. Most commonly they are variegated with gray, lavender-blue, green, and flake-white in variable proportions. But specimens often occurred, especially in 1898, rarely in 1901, that were largely or wholly bright emerald- green, or grass-green. I have had some that were bright green over one-half the surface, and lavender and gray on the other half. The difference in the external appearance of the animals of this and fragilis are slight. Therefore the color of the animal cannot he used to distinguish species nor even varieties. The same is true of the isolation and union of the calicles in series, for a single specimen often shows the extreme conditions on its different parts. The collines generally have simple, solid, rather thick walls, but sometimes they are double with a groove on the summit, as is the case more commonly in fragilis. This species has a heavier and more solid coral than fragilis, with stronger and thicker walls. It can best be distinguished by the decidedly thicker and closer septa, which have stronger, stouter, and more regular, spiniform teeth on their edges, the size of the teeth decidedly increasing toward the columella, where the septa arc also usually distinctly thicker. The calicles, when well grown, are generally broader, more flar- ing, and more shallow. The costse are less prominent, thicker, 120 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian -Beef Corals. closer, and strongly spinulose, with small, but strong, acute, rough spines. The collines are radial at first, but may soon become sinuous. They may be solid, or they may be double with a groove on top, more or less wide and deep. In many large specimens a con- siderable proportion of the calicles are simple. A medium specimen, 80 mm across, has usually 10 to 12 septa to the centimeter, of which 7 or 8 are larger ones, the others being much smaller. The larger calicles are 20 to 25 mm wide, but others on the same coral are not over 15 mm ; they are 8 to 10 m,n deep. This example has double walls. The columella in this is made up of few strong trabecular and angular spines. In this specimen the larger septa are thickened toward the columella and bear on that part large, thick, spiniform teeth ; more distally the teeth are smaller, decreasing to the margin. PI. xviii, fig. 2. A very well grown Bermudian specimen, 100 mm in diameter, has five pretty nearly circumscribed large marginal calicles ; four of them are just beginning to have marginal infoldings, for new collines. In this the diameter of the undivided calicles is 28 mm , but some that are beginning to divide are 80 to 33 mm across, transversely, but 40 to 45 mm across the broadest parts; depth 10 to 13 mm . The collines are double-walled in most places, with a wide, deep, inter- mural groove. The septa are numerous, close, rather thick, especially toward the columella ; the edges are strongly and rather regularly toothed, the teeth being mostly acute and thickened, generally decreasing in length toward the margin of the calicles. The costa? are thickened, little elevated, roughly spinose, with small acute spines. This coral was attached by a small central pedicel and the under side is six-lobed and imperfectly covered with epitheca to within 4 to 8 mm of the margin. The columella is formed of rather slender, loose trabecular and spinous processes. PI. xix, fig. 2. A Bermudian specimen with six unusually large and open, nearly simple, marginal calicles has six large, regular marginal lobes, con- spicuous on the under side ; only one of these has begun to infold the margin, for secondary divisions. The collines are thick and nearly solid. The five undivided marginal calicles are 22, 23, 28, 32, and 35 mm , in transverse internal diameter, from wall to wall ; the one that has just begun to divide is 40 mm across and 52 am long ; the most regular one is 32 mm wide and 40 mm long ; the central calicle is about 20 by 25 mm across, and 15 mm deep ; the marginal calicles are about 8 to L0 mm deep. (PI. xx, fig. 2.) A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. 121 The septa are strong, thickest toward the columella, where they bear large, stout, angular, acute teeth, often irregular and united by their bases. Small thin septa usually alternate with the larger ones, and have long, thin, sharp teeth. There are usually about five larger and four smaller septa to a centimeter. The columella is small and composed of many slender processes in some of the calicles, and of fewer, stouter ones in others. The costa? are thick, not much elevated, roughly spinulose, with small acute spines. This specimen is quite different from most, in appearance, owing to the great size, shallowness, and regularity of its calicles, but it seems to be simply a specimen that has delayed its secondary divi- sions longer than usual, so that its calicles have grown broader. A few examples of this species have very shallow calicles, the inner surface of the cup being nearly flat, but in other respects they agree with the ordinary forms. Two or more specimens, crowded when young, may graft them- selves together and later form a solid coral similar to the normal ones, but usually somewhat more irregular. Abnormal specimens, owing to injuries or disease, may have the septa very much thickened and often hollow, and their spines may be hollow, swollen, or even bulbous at the tips. S. verrucosa D. and M. was evidently based on a specimen of this kind. Our largest perfect specimens are 150 to 200 mm (six to eight inches) in diameter, but larger and less perfect ones were often seen, perhaps the largest were 10 inches across. This species is found from Bermuda and the Florida Reefs, south- ward, throughout all the West Indies. Isophyilia fragilis (Dana) Ver. Eose Coral. Lettuce Coral. Mussa fragilis Dana, Zooph. Expl. Exp., p. 185, pi. viii, fig. 9, 1846. Isophyilia fragilis Verrill, in Dana, Coral Islands, ed. 2, p. 380, 1874, ed. 3, p. 424, 1890. Quelch, Voy. Chall., Zool., xvi, p. 84. Symphyllia Guadulpensis Edw. and Haime, Ann. Sci. Nat., xi, p. 256 ; 1849 ; Hist. Corall., ii, p. 373, 1857. (Young.) Isophyilia Guadulpensis Pourtales, Deep Sea Corals, p. 71, 1871. Symphyllia f strigosa + f S. anemone + f S. marginata Duch. and Mich., Corall. Antill., pp. 70, 72, pi. x, fig. 16, 1860. (Indeterminable from the descrip- tions.) Plate XVI. Figures 1. 2. Plate XVII. Figures 1-7. Plate XVIII. Figure 1. Plate XIX. Figures 1, 4, 5. This species, which is about as common as dipsacea at Bermuda, and lives with it, can best be distinguished from the latter by the thin, lacerate-toothed, very unequal principal septa, which are not 122 A. K Verrill — Bermudlan and West Indian Repf Corals. crowded, but have rather wide interseptal spaces, in which are the much thinner and narrower small septa ; by the usually deep, steep- walled calicles ; and by the prominent, thin, lamelliform, rather dis- tant, and only slightly serrulate external costae. 4a. 4. Figure 4. — Isophyllia fragilis (D.). Portion of a specimen having many of the calicles isolated, with the polyps partly contracted. Photographed from nature. About -? natural size. Figure 4«. — The same, with the polyps. A specimen having two calk-lt-s isolated and the rest in a long connected series. About § natural size. The collines maybe high, steep, and narrow, with a thin solid wall, or they may be double-walled, with a groove on top ; or they may be entirely disunited in some specimens, up to 2*5 inches (65 mm ) in diameter. But these variations in the. collines may occur on a single specimen. The septa are decidedly thinner, fewer, and much more openly arranged than in dlpsacea of the same size, and the "latter has shorter, much stouter, and more regular septa! teeth, and less prominent, closer, thicker, and more spinulose costse. The original type* of Dana belongs to the Museum of Yaie * Vaughan (op. eit. , pp. 41, 42, 1901) erroneously refers this species to Colpo- phyllia gyrosa. He says that from the descriptions "no specific distinction between the two can be discovered." This statement seems absurd, for the Mussa fragilis= Isophyllia was very well described and figured by Dana. He also described and figured the strong, spiniform teeth of the septa. Such a mistake seems unaccountable, and the more so because Quelch had already referred it to Isophyllia, in addition to my previous determination of it. Tin- type of I. fragilis, in the Yale Museum, I have now figured. (See pi. x\ i. fig- 1.) A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 123 University. It is attached to a stone on which the name and locality (Bermuda) were written in Dana's handwriting. The stone is of granitoid character, but it may have been taken to Bermuda in ballast, as often happens there. It belonged to the Redfield Bermuda collection, which was presented to Yale University many years ago. No. 4298. This specimen, owing to its growing upon an angular corner of a stone, is quite irregular in form ; one side is closely adherent to the stone, almost to the edge, while the other side is free from 10 to 35 mm , and shows very well the thin lamellate costa?, finely, unevenly serrulate, especially distally where they are highest. They are about one-third as thick as the width of the intercostal spaces. The collines are irregular and crooked ; most of them are double-walled, with a slight groove on top, the walls themselves being thin ; in some places the walls are simple, or nearly so. The valleys are unequal ; most are elongated, dee]), and narrowed by crowding ; others are nearly circular and less deep ; the longer ones are 14 to 20 nim wide, from wall to wall ; the larger circular ones are about 24"' m broad (in other specimens they are often 30 ram broad). The septa are very thin, very unequal, openly arranged ; their edges are irregularly and sharply dentate, with long, thin, flat, acute or lacerate teeth, unequal in length and breadth, rough on their sides and ends ; the larger teeth are near the columella There are about six principal septa to a centimeter, with four or five much thinner ones. The columella is open and loose in structure, composed of slender, irregular, rough spiniform processes from the septa. This coral is 80 mm broad and 4'.t""" high, where thickest (pi. xvi, fig. l). A somewhat younger, turbinate specimen from Bermuda (coll. 1901), agreeing very closely with the type in the characters of the septa, dentations, costa 3 , etc., has deeper and more flaring calicles of somewhat large size, 20 to 30 mm in diameter. In this the walls are in nearly all cases separate ; they have united partially in some of the collines, leaving a wide furrow, but in two collines they form only a very thin and simple wall, showing that this is a matter of small importance. This specimen was attached by a small pedicel, leaving the lobulated outer wall free for 30 to 35 mm all around ; the costa? are thin, high, laminar, and very finely serrulate. (PI. xix, fig. 1.) Other regular young specimens, when attached by a small pedicel, have an imperfect epitheca that covers most of the under side, except within 4 or 5 mm from the edge, and the base may be flat and horizontal, circular or lobed. (PI. xvii, figs. 1-3.) 124 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. Simple young specimens, 20 to 25 mm in diameter, are low, shallow, nearly circular, and usually show no trace of division or lobulation of the margins. They may have five cycles of septa, with the larger ones lacerately toothed as in the adult. Plate xix, fig. 5. The radial lobes and collines vary greatly with age ; the most regular young ones, 40 to 65 mm across, usually have six regular, radial calicinal lobes, with six radial collines, and a central primary calicle, but the primary lobes are often five, more rarely four or three. The collines are frequently solid or nearly so, without a groove on top. (PL xvii, figures 1-3.) In ordinary adult specimens the septa are thin, generally rather broad, unequal, and not very close together. The number to a cen- timeter may be eight to twelve, in fully formed calicles, but in imperfectly formed calicles there may be ten to twelve or more. The larger ones are normally thin, but firm, broadly rounded toward the margin, and not very prominent above the wall. But the form varies greatly in different calicles. The serrations are generally numerous, unequal, and mostly rather long, the larger teeth being fiat, not very wide at base, and with the tips mostly acute, but some- times forked or lacerate. Those toward the outer ends of the septa are usually decided^ shorter than the inner ones, but they are irregularly larger and smaller on the whole edge. The columella may be rather large and spongy, or it may be small and trabecular or laminose even on the same specimen. The costae are well developed, and like raised, thin ribs, separated by regular grooves, and with the edges sharply and rather regularly serrate, with the teeth very much smaller than those of the septa. Sometimes the costae are sublamellar. They may be confined to a narrow zone close to the edge, or they may be more than 25 mm long, according to the variable extent of the epitheca. This species is more apt to have part of the corallites isolated and nearly circular than I. dipsacea. Frequently many of them are dis- united for much of their length. The larger round calicles may sometimes become 40 mm in diameter before they begin to divide. One of our Bermudian specimens has, on one side, a simple, curved, linear valley, five inches long (125 mm ), containing a row of uniform, united calicles, while on the other side the calicles are partly isolated, and partly in short groups of two or three, and of various forms. In the form and colors of the soft parts this species does not differ materially from the last. Its colors are equally variable, but per- A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. 125 liaps the bright green colors are more common in this species. The tentacles are less numerous. When full grown this species is often 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm ) in diameter and 4 to 5 inches thick. When the calicles are crowded resorption of portions of the collines may break them up into detached cone-like or columnar por- tions, or may simply cause interruptions of their continuity. Specimens partially killed by injury to the calicles may repair themselves by budding out new cup-shaped calicles from the muti- lated parts, and then the new growth may go on just as in the case of young ones arising from eggs. During the spring of 1901, owing to a period of unusually cold and stormy weather in February and March, many dead or partly dead specimens of this species and I. dipsacea were seen, in place, and even those that seemed to be uninjured refused to expand, though in previous years they expanded very freely in confinement. They expand best in bright sunshine and during hot days. This species is common at the Bermudas, in shallow water. Florida Reefs. West Indies to St. Thomas. Probably generally distributed in the West Indies. In most collections this species is confused with I. dipsacea, usually under the latter name. It is not always easy to distinguish the two, without careful examination. It is possible that the two forms may eventually have to be united as varieties of one species. But all the numerous specimens of this group that I have hitherto studied can be pretty definitely arranged under the two species, by the differences in the septa and costa?. The following species seems to be so different that it can hardly be confused with either of the preceding, unless when young. Isophyllia multiflora V., sp. nov. t Isophyllia multilamella Pourt., Deep Sea Corals, p. 70, 1871 {non Duch. and Mich.) Plate XX. Figure 1. Plate XXV. Figure 1. This species is remarkable for the rapid division of the calicles, and the unusually small size of the calicles, which are very crowded, and many of them are isolated or in very short series. The collines are mostly irregular, simple, narrow, with a thin solid wall, but in the larger examples they are often meandriniform. The calicles are rather deep, mostly decidedly stellate, generally 14 or 15 ram in diameter, but varying from 12 to 18 mm ; depth to 8 mm . 120 A. E. Verrlll — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. Septa rather narrow and thin, closely arranged, their edges covered with numerous rather slender, acute, rough teeth, the proximal ones usually the larger. The sides of the septa and teeth are covered with numerous, sharp, rough, conical grains, giving them a rough or hispid appearance, under a lens. The columella is well developed, rough, porous, composed of small, irregular, contorted and hispid lamella? and spinous processes of the septa. There are usually 1 1 or 12 well-formed septa to a centimeter, besides some rudimentary ones. The costse are not much elevated, except close to the edge, slightly thickened, hispid laterally, and sharply serrate with small rough spinules. The epitheca is imperfect, but usually covers much of the lower side. The animals of this coral are smaller than in the other species, and they form elegant crowded groups, when expanded. The colors are similar to those of dipsacea and fragilis, but emerald-green is per- haps a more common color in this. Our largest Bermudian specimen (pi. xx, fig. 1) is 40 mm thick and 85 mnr aci'oss, with a nearly flat upper surface. This has 2 7 distinct calicinal centers, of which only five or six are isolated, most of the others forming series of two or three. The margin has about twelve small lobes. A very regular small specimen (pi. xxi, fig. l) is about 55 mm broad and 25 mm high, with twelve small marginal lobes and twelve radial collines, six of which are primary and extend to the central calicle in sinuous lines, mostly uniting to the five-lobed colline sur- rounding the central calicle, while the short secondary collines are nearly radial and unequally developed. Each of the six primary marginal calicles has already divided into three, more or less sepa- rated calicles, and the secondary central calicle has formed four smaller ones around itself, so that it is 5-lobed. Thus there are now 23 distinct calicinal centers on this small specimen. No. 4009. A considerably larger one of I. dipsacea or I. fragilis would usually have but seven calicles. This rapid increase in the calicles seems to be characteristic of this species, which often resembles an astrrean coral, such as Acant/tastrwa, in the size and shape of its calicles and septal teeth, though many of the calicles are not isolated, like those of the latter. I am unable to refer this rather rare species to any of those described by Duch. and Mich., or others,* unless it be the form * The Isophyllia Danaana (Edw. and H., as Myoetophyllia, Hist., ii, p. 377. pi. D4, fig. 2) resembles this species in the width of the calicles and valleys, and in its septa, but the valleys are long and sinuous ; the collines low and obtuse : and the columella is feebly developed. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. L27 briefly described by Pourtales as multilamellar which seems quite distinct from the species to which he doubtfully referred it. Bermuda and the Florida Reefs. Occurs also in the West Indies, at the Bahamas, etc. It occurred on the Serpuline Atolls, near Hungry Bay, and in Great Sound, Bermuda. Mussa (Symphyllia) hispida V., sp. nov. Astrcea dipsacea Dana, Zooph., p. 225, pi. xi, figs. 4-4cc, 1846 (non Lain.) Aeanthastrcect dipsacea Verrill, in Dana, Coral Islands, eel. 1, p. 380 ; ed. 3, p. 421, 1890, non E. & H. Plate XXI. Figures 2, 2a, 2b, 2c. Dana's type of this species is preserved in the Museum of Yale University in good condition. No. 4287. It is an astreiform, hemispherical mass, about 100 mm in diameter. The calicles are mostly simple and clearly circumscribed ; some are circular, but many are elliptical or irregular ; some are elongated and have 2, 3, or 4 centers in a series, as in I. multiflora. The walls between the calicles are double and separated by an openly vesicular exothecal structure, the proper wall being thin and solid. The septa are thin, sharply granulated laterally, deeply lacin- iate, especially near the columella, and have long, rough, lacerate and hispid teeth, largest toward the top. The columella is large, loosely and coarsely trabecular, with rough spines on the surface. In a section the coral appears very cellular ; the endothecal dissepi- ments are compound, long, and much inclined ; septa are perforate and trabecular. Diameter of calicles, 8 to 18 mm ; the elongated calicles with two or three centers may be 25 to : J >0 mm long ; 10 to 12 mm wide ; depth 7-10 ram ; distance between them, -1 to 4 mm . West Indies (t. Dana). Rare in collections. This species resembles Aeanthastrcect, in which I formerly placed it, but it has the structure of a Mussa. The double wall and vesicular exotheca are not found in Acanthastrcea, nor the elongated calicles with several centers, dividing by fission. The locality of Dana's type was uncertain, but was supposed to be West Indian. A similar species is found at Pernambuco, Brazil. See below; List of Brazilian Corals, and pi. xxi, f. 3. Mussa (Symphyllia) rigida (Dana) Ver. Astrcea (Fissicella) rigida Dana, Zooph., p. 237, pi. xii, figs. 3a-8d, 1846. Prionastrcea ? rigida Edw. and Hainie, Hist. Corall., ii, p. 523, 1857. Isophyllia rigida Verrill, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., i, p. 50, 1864 ; Coral Islands, ed. 3, p. 422 (non Pourtales). 128 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Beef Corals. Plate XXV. Figures 2, 3. The Isophyllia rigida Verrill (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., i, p. 50, 1864) was based on Astrea rigida Dana (Zooph., p. 237, 1846). The type of the latter is in the Museum of Yale University. It is a badly beach-worn, astreiform specimen, with irregular polygonal calicles, mostly 10 to 12 mm across. The walls are very solid, often 3 to 4 m thick. The edges of the septa are entirely destroyed. In sections it resembles an Isophyllia with unusually well isolated calicles. Its origin is unknown ; West Indies? No. 4297. Several fresh specimens from the Bahamas (coll. Fv. P. Whitfield), Amer. Mus. and Yale Mus., are apparently of this species. These have deep, roundish or irregular, isolated calicles, 10-1 5 mm in diame- ter ; many are dividing ; septa about 30, stout, exsert, strongly spinose-dentate, the distal teeth larger, divergent ; upper ones erect, prominent, acute; columella small, trabecular. Walls entirely united, nearly solid. The larger hemispherical masses are 90-1 00 mm aero—. No. 6616. Plate xxxiii, fig. 4. Allied to M. Harttii, var. conferta, but septa are thicker, with the distal erect teeth much stronger ; walls more solid. Mussa Harttii Verrill. Mussa Harttii + Symphyllia Harttii Verrill, these Trans., i, pp. 357, 358, 1868. B. Eathbun, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., ii, p. 40, 1878 ; Amer. Naturalist, xiii, p. 542, 1879. Plate XXII. Figures 1-2. Plate XXIII. Figures 1, 2. Plate XXV. Figure 4. Plate XXXIII. Figure 3. A larger series of this species than that first studied has convinced me that both the forms originally described by me, provisionally, as distinct, are really only extreme growth-forms of one variable species. In the Museum of Yale University there are several intermediate specimens, some of which I have now figured. (PL xxii, figs. 1, 2.) It occurs with all the corallites united to their summits by a vesi- cular exotheca (jSymphyllia-form, pi. xxiii, fig. 1), var. conferta; in dichotomous groups with the calicles and branches disunited, and without exotheca (fig. 2), var. laxa : in masses with the corallites free for only a short distance, leaving o\\\y deep grooves between (pi. xxii, fig. 1); in groups in which the corallites are free for \ or ^ their lengths, with exotheca below (fig. 2), var. intermedia ; and in various other intermediate forms. One specimen (pi. xxxiii, fig. 3) consists of a cluster of seven calicles of the Symphyllia-iorm, arising from a dichotomous branch of the typical Mussa-iorm.. No. 4545. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 129 The calicles generally separate rather quickly in all the forms, and a large part of them are circular and irregularly elliptical, or hour- glass shape, owing to imperfect division. The size of the calicles, even when circular, is quite variable, but is mo&tly between 12 and 18 mm ; the elliptical ones are often 25 to 30 mm long. The septa are generally very thin, deeply lacerately toothed, the longer teeth being on the wider and rounded upper portion. They are usually rather openly spaced, about 9 or 10 wide ones to a centi- meter, with as many very narrow or rudimentary alternating ones. In some specimens there are 12 large septa to a centimeter. In the extreme form, var. confertifolia (fig. xxii, fig. 1), there are 16 larger and 16 smaller, very thin septa to a centimeter. The columella is generally well developed, very porous, composed of numerous rough, irregular trabecular processes, with free spines on its surface. But sometimes it is coarsely, rudely trabecular and very loosely arranged, or it may be almost lacking. The costae are usually rather thin and not much elevated, but they are covered with numerous, rather close, sharp, elongated, often recurved spinules. These costal spines are very characteristic for this species, but in some specimens they become fewer, more irregu- lar and less elongated, on some parts at least. Brazil, from Pernambuco to Abrolhos Reefs ; Victoria ; Porto Seguro, Bahia, Mar Grande, etc., common, — C. F. Hartt ; R. Rath- bun. According to Mr. Rathbun the clusters are sometimes 2 feet across. Var. confertifolia Ver., now Plate XXII. Figure 1. The type of this variety is much more delicate than usual, with much more numerous, thinner, and crowded septa (about 16 larger and 16 smaller septa to the centimeter) ; they are covered with long, slender, sharp teeth. The columella is well developed and finely trabecular. The costae are small, close, and crowdedly spinose, with small acute spinules, much as in the typical form, but smaller. The corallites are short, pretty closely crowded, circular, elliptical, and some ai*e irregular and rather smaller than usual. They are united for onlv a short distance, or not at all, bv exotheca. Pernambuco, Brazil, — Derby and Wilmot, 18*70. No. 4551. Trans. Conn. Acad., Vol. XI. 9 November, 1901. L30 A. K Verrill — Berrmidian and West Indian Reef Corals. Mussa lacera (Pallas) Oken. Madrepora lacera Pallas, Elench. Zooph., p. 208, 1766. Esper, Pflanz., i, p. 148, pi. xxv, fig. 2, 1791. Madrepora carduus Ellis and Sol., Zooph., p. 153, pi. xxv, 1786. Mussa lacera Oken, Lehr. Naturg., p. 75, 1815. CaryophylUa carduus Lam., Hist. Anim. sans Vert., ii, p. 229, 1816; ed. 2, p. 357. CaryophylUa lacera (pars) Ehr. , Corall. E. Meeres, p. 92, 1834. Edw. and Haime, Ann. Sci. Nat., ii, p. 238, 1849. Mussa carduus Dana, Zooph. Expl. Exp., p. 175, 1846. Edw. and Haime, Hist. Corall., ii, p. 334, 1857. LithophyUia lacera Edw. and Haime, Hist. Corall., ii, p. 291, 1857 (Young) + L. Cubensis, op. cit., p. 292. Scolymia lacera Haime, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, iv, p. 279, 1852. Bruggmann. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., xx, p. 303, 1877. Vaughan, op. cit., pp. 6, 34, 1901. This large species is common in the Bahamas and southward to Cnracao. On the Florida reefs it seems to be rather rare. It has not been found at the Bermudas. It forms dichotomons clumps, often more than a foot high and broad. The calicles, when full grown, are mostly isolated and nearly circular. They are from 40 to 65 mm in diameter, and sometimes more, but mostly about 5jO mm . The calicles vary in depth, some being shallow, others rather deep. The septa are numerous and strongly toothed, but the teeth vary widely in form ; usually the distal ones are much the larger. The larger septa are usually pretty thick, but sometimes they are thin and fragile. The exterior is covered with rows of strong, acute costal spines. I regard the simple forms with broad calicles and wide base, referred by Edw. and Haime to LithophyUia lacera, as the young of this species before fission takes place. The two forms occur in the same localities. It is certain that all the species of Mussa and Isophyllia have such a simple young stage, before they begin to divide, in which the diameter of the cup equals or exceeds that of the adult calicles after division. The size of the calicles and the number and character of the septa and their denticulations all corre- spond well in the two forms. Moreover, I have seen specimens of the simple Lithopyllia-iovm in which infoldings of the margin had already taken place, to begin the process of fission. If this form be not the young of " carduus,'''' as I believe, then its young have not been discovered, which would be remarkable in the case of such a large and common species. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 131 Pallas described both forms and considered them the same, under the name of M. lacera. The type of carduus is still in the Hunte- rian Mus. (t. Young). Probably the Lithophyllia Cabensis Edw. and Haime is only a slight variation of the same young form, for similar variations occur in the adult calicles. Mussa angulosa (Pallas) Oken. Madrepora angulosa Pallas, op. cit.. p. 299, 1766. Esper, op. cit., i, p. 92, pi. vii, 1791. Mussa angulosa Oken, Lehr. Naturg., p. 73, 1815. Dana, Zooph., p. 176, 1846. Edw. and Haime, Hist. Corall., ii, p. 329, 1857. This species is closely allied to M. lacera. It differs from it in the smaller size of the branches and calicles, which are usually from 25 to 50 mm in diameter, and are apt to be crowded and angular. The principal septa are generally rather wide and exsert. A study of a large series of specimens might, perhaps, compel us to unite them in one species. It is much less common in collection than M. lacera, and most specimens are beach- worn. It ranges from Florida to the Antilles, but seems to be rare on the Florida reefs. TJlophyllia crispa (Lain.) Edw. and Haime. Oulophyllia crispa Edw. and H., Ann. Sci. Nat., ser. 3, xi, p. 268, 1849. Ulophyllia crispa Edw. and H., Hist. Corall., ii, p. 378, 1857. I have studied a fine large specimen from Singapore, in the Ward collection, now in the Field Columbian Museum, at Chicago. This is 12 X 8 inches across, and about 6 inches thick. The valleys are mostly 15 to 20 mm wide, but some are 25 to 30 mm across in the widest places; depth ]o to 15 ram . The septa are rather loosely arranged, usually 9 or 10 to a centi- meter, mostly wide and strongly toothed at base, projecting but little above the walls, and not much thickened ; narrow ones alter- nate in some places between the wider ones, but not regularly. The large teeth of the wide septa are mostly broad at base, triangular, about as broad as high, subequal ; usually the larger ones are on the basal part, but not infrequently the larger ones are above the middle. The ridges or collines are angular, broad at base, thin and simple at the summit. Columella variable, sometimes well developed, trabecular, sometimes open or rudimentary. Exterior of the coral lobulated at the margin, faintly costulate, nearly smooth, and with- out spines. 132 A. E. Verrill — Bermudimi and West Indian Reef Corals. This is not a West Indian species, as some writers have supposed. All specimens that I have seen were from Singapore. Several other, apparently distinct species, have been described from the Indo-Pacific region. Among them are the following : — IT. aspera Quelch, op. cit., xvi, p. 88, pi. iii, figs. 5-56. Banda. IT. cellulosa Quelch, op. cit., p. 87, pi. iii, figs. 6-6c, 1886. Banda. IT. maxima Rehberg, Abh. Gel). Xaturw. Yer., Hamburg, xii, p. iS, pi. i, fig. 12, 1892. Duke of York Island. IT. Stuhlrnanni Rehb., op. cit., p. 17. Zanzibar. Addenda to Favitince. The following species should have been inserted on page 91. Favia Whitfieldi Ver., sp. nov. Plate XXV. Figure 5. This coral forms rounded masses, up to four inches (I00 mm ) in diameter. Calicles a little elevated, rather large, 8-12 mm in diameter, mostly nearly circular ; some are elliptical and undergoing fission; a few are irregularly lobed. Their cavities are rather deep, funnel- shaped, narrow at the bottom. Septa somewhat exsert, rounded at the summit, and roughly ser- rate ; paliform lobe well developed, serrate. Columella small, lamel- lose or trabecular ; walls thick, solid, separated by dense exotheca having few cellules in one row. Nassau, X. P., — coll. R. P. Whitfield. Two good, fresh specimens are in the American Museum Nat. Hist., Xew York. Xo. 540. I have seen other specimens that are beach-worn. This species is quite unlike any of the other West Indian species of Favia. Its general appearance, and especially its large, round calicles cause it to resemble some of the East Indian species. Its septa are more roughly serrate than in most species. Family Echinoporidae. Emended. Coral usually foliaceous or frondose, sometimes branched, rarely encrusting, generally thin, with the exotheca or ccenenchyma spar- ingly developed and usually cellular, but sometimes solid (Acantho- pora). Corallites short, often obliquely appressed ; increasing chiefly by marginal, basal, or intercostal budding, generally scattered irregularly and only on one side of the foliaceous species, but some- times on both sides, and not forming collines, but sometimes arranged in short rows. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 1 oo Septa often strongly exsert, dentate or lacerate, the distal ones usually continuous with the cost*. Common base often thin, but firm, imperforate, irregularly costate, often echinulate. These corals often resemble fungian corals, like Agaricia and Podabacia, but they have distinct and often large exothecal dissepi- ments and lack synapticula?. To this family I now unite the genus Mycedium Oken, as emended, = Phyllastrcea Dana. Mycedium (Oken) Edw. and Hairne. Type M. elephantotus (Pallas; Esper.) Mycedium (pars) Oken, Lehr. Naturg., i, 69, 1815. Agaricia (pars) Ehr., Corall., p. 105, 1834 (non Lain.) Phyllastrcea Dana, Zooph. Expl. Exped., p. 269, 1846. Helioseris (pars) Edw. and Haime, Coinpt.-rend., xxix. p. 72, 1849. Mycedium (pars) Edw. and Haime, Ann. Sci. Nat., xv, p. 130, 1851 ; Hist. Nat. Corall., iii, p. 72, 1860 (non Myeeclia Dana, 1846). The coral in this genus usually forms thin, foliaceous, often con- torted fronds, simple or clustered. They may be unifacial or bifa- cial. The calicles are rather large, one-sided, oblique or appressed, stellate, usually scattered, not in long series. Collines rudimentary or lacking. Septa rather few, thickened, serrate or laciniate, exsert, prominent externally, continuous from calicle to calicle, as septo- costre. Costa? coarse, rough, serrate. Under side of coral rather coarsely costate. Much unnecessary confusion has arisen as to the characters of this genus. This has been clue chiefly to the fact that most writers have failed to recognize the true characters of the type species, Madrepora ele- phantotus* of Pallas, and have had very different species under this name, including two or more West Indian species*of Agaricia, as will be shown under that genus, which have nothing to do with the true elephantotus. Milne-Edw. and Haime had, however, a more correct idea of the nature of the original genus, and their interpretation of it must hold good, even though they included some species that may better be placed elsewhere. But their species described as elephan- totus is not the species of Pallas. * It has been suggested by Quelch that this spelling was a typographical error for elephantopus, but the allusion is plainly to the resemblance of a broad foliaceous coral to an elephant's ear, not to the foot. Some of the early poly- nomial writers gave these foliaceous corals the vernacular name "Elephants Ears." See Voy. Chall., xvi, p. 116, foot note. 134 A. E. Verritt — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. The Jf. elephant at us of Pallas was not an Agaricia, and was from " Oceanus Indicus." It belongs to a strictly Indo-Pacifie group of corals. It Avas carefully described by Pallas, who said that he had seen but a single specimen. So that there was here no con- fusion due to an original mixture of several species. Such confusion was due to the confounding of other very unlike species with it by subsequent writers, even down to the present year. Vaughan (op. cit., pp. 63, 64, 67, 1901) identifies it with a Wesl Indian species very close to " M. fragile,''' 1 from which he thinks it may be distinct (p. 67), and he states that he has seen good speci- mens, but does not give the characters. Therefore we can only infer that he considers it a West Indian foliaceous Agaricia. Gregory (op. cit., pp. 280, 281, 1895) unites it definitely with the species A. frag His, without a mark of doubt. But the species described by Pallas, as plainly stated by him, was a widely different coral. He stated that the stars (calicles) are scattered, nearly in quincunx ; that they are prominent and lacerate: that the exterior of the coral has rather remote, rough, longitudinal costae ; and that it seems intermediate between J/, agaricites and M. lactuca. None of these characters apply to the Agaricia fragilis and its allies, nor to any true Agaricia. His description* clearly indicates a coral with large, well-defined, stellate, scattered calicles, having lacerate septa, continuous distally with the subparallel, radial, granulated costae, and with a coarse, roughly costate exterior surface, instead of one with the fine and even striations characteristic of Agaricia fragilis and its allies. Pallas does not state that the calicles are in series, nor does he mention transverse sulci or collines, though these characters are carefully described by him under J/, agaricites on a previous page. Hence we must conclude that they did not exist in his species, espe- cially as he also says that the stars are nearly in quincunx. This is also the case in Esper's elephantotus. * The original Latin description (Eleneh. Zooph., p. 290j is as follows : — ' • Madrepora conglomerata subturbinata, intus lainellis granulosis parallelis stellisque lacero-prominulis sparsis. Coralliuin format laminani tenuein. subturbinatarn, nndato-crispam. lacihio- sam, sessilem, extns longitudinaliter porcis remotiuscmlis striatum : intus prffldi- tam lamellis longitudinalibus, subparallelis, obtusisatque granulosis, quae passim interrupts? sunt stellis rariusculis, fere in quincunces sparsis. lacero promi- nulis ; barum lamellae ista? longitudinales quasi radii sunt. Locus: Oceanus Indicus. P"st quasi medium inter M. Lttvtin-uin & agaric-ibis quasdam varietates." A. E. Verrill — JBermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 135 In fact, the description calls for a coarsely costate and rough coral, having scattered, stellate calicles, without collines. The genus Phyllastrma Dana, based on P. tubifex Dana, corre- sponds to it in many respects, and is evidently congeneric with it, as noted by Edw. and Hairae. Several other allied species are known to me. Unfortunately, Edw. and Haime described as elephantotus a very distinct species, with very fine, close, equal costal stria' on the under side, and this has helped to perpetuate the confusion. Esper (Pflanz., i, pi. xviii, figs. 1-4) figured as M. elephantotus Pallas, from the East Indies, a foliaceous species, with thin, clustered, convoluted fronds, strongly radially costate and serrate, but not echinate, below. Calicles stellate, appressed, raised proximally, with coarse, serrate, angular septa. This may well be the real elephanto- tus Pallas. It corresponds to it better than does any other figure. Dana (Zooph., p. 339) referred to a specimen of this species that he had seen in Peale's Museum, Philadelphia. This museum was burned many years ago, but Dana's sketch of this specimen is in the collections of the Yale Museum, with other unpublished draw- ings of corals presented b}^ him. It is probably of Indo-Pacific origin. Ehrenberg described in 1834 a different species under the name of Agaricia f elephantotus* It had calicles six lines in diameter, which is much larger than those of Esper's species. The Mycedium Okeni Edw. and Haime (Hist., iii, p. 7-">, pi. Dl2, figs, la, ]b (not 2)), also has large calicles, 10 mm in diameter, and is probably very close to elephantotus, if not the same. It has rough, dentate, angular septa and the calicles somewhat in series. There is evidently an error in the numbering of the figures on the plate. Quelch (op. cit., p. 110) referred this species to Phyllastrma Dana. As for 31. cucullata Ellis and Sol., it seems to be a species of Agaricia that cannot yet be positively identified. I have seen no specimens like it, nor do any of the modern descriptions agree very well with it. It is certainly not the same as elephantotus of Pallas, though it may be the species wrongly called by that name in some modern books; possibly it is the M. elephantotus of Edw. and Haime, but the latter is not the elephantotus Pallas. Gregory puts it as a synonym of his erroneous elephantotns-fragiHs. The A. cucullata, Dana is probably A. purpurea Les., described below. * Doubting its real identity with the Pallasian species, he gave it the provi- sional name of megastoma, as noted also by Dana. It is perhaps a Tridae- ophyllia. Edw. and Haime, ii, p. 381, consider it the yonng of T. lactuca. 1 36 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Some of the species of Podabacia resemble the M. elephantotus rather closely in form. This is particularly the case with an appar- ently undescribed species.* Mycedium explanatum Verrill. Phyllastrcea explanata Verrill, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., i, p. 53, 1864. Plate XXIX. Figures la, 16, lc. Additional specimens of this species show considerable variations from the type. The fronds may be 8-1 mm thick, but become very thin, about .05 mm , at the margin. The under side is covered with unequal, raised, rounded, dichotomous costse, the larger ones separated by three to six smaller ones ; they are not serrulate nor echinate. On the older parts of the upper side, the corallites are large, often crowded, sometimes erect, but usually much inclined, mostly 8-10 n,m in diameter. The septa vary from less than 12 to 18. Most com- monly there are about 12 larger, subequal, very thick and prominent ones, with several much thinner ones of the 3d cycle. The large ones are perpendicular within, acute-angular at the summit, and con- * Podabacia dispar. sp. nov. Coral thin, foliaceous, in broad fronds, often concave above, and very thin at the edges. Common wall thin but compact, with few or no perforations, and covered with unequal, slightly raised, but con- tinuous, costas ; often every 4th or 8th one is larger than the intermediate ones, which decrease in size according to the cycle of the septa with which they corre- spond, the smallest extending only a short distance from the edges. Their edges are finely granulated, and sometimes the larger ones are sparingly denticulate with very small, rough, irregular teeth, very much smaller than those of P. Crus- tacea. The calicles are irregularly scattered ; the larger ones are stellate, with a well developed columella, made up of irregular rough processes, sometimes united into a nearly solid mass. Septa thin, in three cycles, with some very thin perforated ones of the 4th cycle on the distal side. Usually there are nine to twelve larger septa ; but in the outer calicles there are usually but six. The principal septa are wide, rise abruptly, and form a prominent, somewhat thickened lobe or angle at the summit, beyond which the edge is concave, thin, finely and sharply serrate, and continuous with the long septo-costa?. The prominent angle is often lacerate-toothed, but more frequently it is subentire. The septo-costae are of several sizes, but generally the alternate ones are very thin, deeply lacerate, and much perforated close to the edge. The synapticula- are large and conspicuous. Plate xxix, tigs. ."">. ~)k. Diameter of the larger calicles, 4-6""" ; thickness of coral, 1.5 to 2 inches from edge, 6-8 mm . Samoa Is. (Coll. H. A. Ward). Museum of Yale Univ., No. 6178. and Field Cohunb. Mus., Chicago. A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 137 vexly rounded externally, where they pass into thick, stout costae, bearing several conical, rough, often hollow spines. The summit is roughly serrate or spinulose ; the inner edge and sides sharply and roughly granulated. The septo-costre are often long, becoming thinner between the corallites than on their walls, and alternately thicker and thinner ; they bear rather fine, strong, suberect, acute or lacerate spines. Toward the margin of the coral the corallites are smaller, more appressed, but circular, and have 6 to 12 larger, thick, prominent, exsert, acute, lacerate or spinose septa. The septo-costse here become thinner and higher, with erect, rough or lacerate, rather distant spines. The columella is generally pretty well developed and roughly trabecular. In sections (fig. le) the exotheca is pretty compact, with numerous rather small dissepiments, much smaller than in the next species. Tahiti; Mus. Comp. Zool.; Yale Mus.; Field Columb. Mus. For the older, thick form, with stout, swollen or rounded corallites, I have used the variety name, turgida. It often looks like a dis- tinct species, but it grades into the thinner form. The differences are probably due to age. Mycedium tenuicostatum Ver., sp. nov. Plate XXIX. Figures 2, 2a, 2b, 2c. Coral forms a large foliaceous frond, more or less bent and irregu- lar, considerably thickened and cellular in the older parts, but thin at the margin. Exterior dichotomously costate ; the costae are unequal, 1 to 3 or 5 smaller ones between the larger ; all are broadly rounded, more than twice as wide as the narrow intervening grooves ; their surfaces are slightly rough with minute granules. Corallites, toward the center of the upper side, are large and much crowded, expanded, prominent, often erect ; the larger ones are 15 to 18 mm across, with very exsert, excurved, very roughly lacerate and spinose septa, which are thick and broad at the summit, with the inner edge flaring and roughly dentate and the outer or costal por- tion lacerately dentate. There are often 24 septa, in three cycles, but frequently only 12 to 18 are present ; those of the third cycle are thin and narrow ; sometimes smaller septa of the fourth eycle appear. Many corallites are but little prominent, with the septa thinner and not much exsert, angular at the summit, and roughly 138 A. E. Verrill — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. spinulose. The septo-costa? are very thin and high, separated by spaces 4 to times as wide, with few angular teeth. In sections (fig. -2c), the exotheca is abundant, coarsely cellular ; the dissepiments are convex and numerous. Singapore (?); Mus. Yale Univ.; Field Columb. Museum. Echinopora elegans Ver., sp. nov. Plate XXIX. Figube 3. The coral forms broad, thin, contorted, foliaceous fronds, some- times 20 inches (500 mm ) broad and 10 inches high, while the average thickness of the folia? may be 3 to 4 mm , becoming very thin and translucent toward the margins, but yet compact and strong. Under side has rather loosely scattered small calicles in some parts, but toward the margins they are absent and the surface is evenly and closely covered with very small, nearly equal costse, roughened with minute granules. The upper side is roughly echinulate, and bears larger and more prominent calicles, which are rather crowded in some parts, but irregularly arranged, and becoming more scattered toward the mar- gins, where the intervals are often equal to three or four times their diameter. The larger corallites are verruciform, 3 to 4 mm in diameter, with very roughly echinulate septa and costse. The septa, in the larger calicles, form three very unequal cycles. The six primaries are much exsert, a little thickened, hispid laterally, and with the edges finely lacerately toothed. Usually they consist of two or three deeply divided lobes, the outer one standing on the outer thecal margin ; the next, just within the calicle, is a little wider ; the third, usually smaller, may represent the paliform lobe or tooth. Those of the second cycle are smaller and thinner, but lobed in the same way. Those of the third cycle are very small ami narrow, or often rudimentary. The septo-costa? are numerous, even, and rather close, represented, in general, by rows of small, upright, echinulate or lacerate spinules of about equal size ; toward the margins the costulre become more elevated, with the edge echino-lacerate. The columella is usually well developed, finely trabecular or spongy. Samoa (coll. Ward); Mus. Yale University and Field Columbian Museum. No. 6180. A. E. Verritt — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. 139 Echinopora concinna Ver., sp. nov. Plate XXIX. Figure 4. The coral forms large, thin, foliaceous, bent fronds, a foot or more across, becoming very thin but firm at the edges. Both surfaces bear similar calicles in the type. The septo-costae are fine, very regular, only slightly raised, and each bears a row of regularly spaced, not crowded, small, erect, rough spinules, which give a neat and very regularly spinulose char- acter to the surface. The calicles are small, low, verruciform, rather open, with deep and conspicuous interseptal loculi. The septa are in three cycles, the smallest very thin and narrow. The larger ones are wide, thickened at the walls, a little prominent, angular at the summit, and lacerately toothed. The columella is well developed and finely trabecular or spongy. Diameter of calicles about 4 mm ; their height about 1 to 2 mm . Pelew I., — coll. Ward; Yale Museum and Field Colum. Mus., Chicago. This is allied to E. striatula Studer, (Monatsb. Kong. Akad. Wiss., Berlin, 1877, p. 644, pi. iii, figs. 10a, b,) from New Britain. Family Agaricidae Ver., 1867. Fungidce (pars) Dana, Zooph., p. 283, 1846. Lophoserince (pars) Edw. and Haime, Coinpt.-rend., xxix, p. 71, 1849. Hist. Corall., iii, p. 35, 1860. Lophoseridce Duncan, Kevision, p. 146, + Plesiofungidaz (pars), p. 133, 1884. Agaricidce Verrill, these Trans., i, p. 542, 1867. Corals generally compound, increasing mostly by marginal bud- ding, often thin foliaceous or frondose, either unifacial or bifacial, sometimes in thick plates or massive. Calicles small and shallow, often without definite solid walls. Septa usually numerous, low, finely serrulate or subentire, more or less of them continuous, as septo-costa?, with those of adjacent calicles. Synapticulae exist between the septa, and in thick or massive forms there are also dissepiments. < )uter wall compact, imperforate, usually with slender, serrulate costal striatums, seldom echinate. Polyps short, scarcely exsert, with small, short, verruciform, blunt or clavate, or often rudimentary tentacles. 140 A. E. Verritt — Bermudian and West Indian Reef Corals. Agaricia Lam. (emended). Type A. undata Ellis and Sol.* Agaricia (pars) Lamarck, Syst. Anim. sans Vert., p. 375, 1801 (1st species is " M . cucullata Ellis and Sol.," 3d species is M. undata; 2d species is now Merulina ampliata). UndariaOken, Lehr. Naturg., p. 68, 1815 (includes 1st, agaricites; 2d, undata). Agaricia (pars) Lam., Hist. Anim. s. Vert., 1815. Agaricia (subgenus Mycedia) Dana, Zooph., pp. 333, 335, 1846 (non Mycedium Oken, 1815). Agaricia and Mycedium (pars) Edw. and Haime, Corall., iii, pp. 72, 80, 1860. Duoh. and Mich., Cor. Antill., pp. 80, 81, 1860. Agaricia Quelch, Voy.